JP2019072046A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which, when the game is placed in a special state, enables keeping track of information about not only the number of times the game is controlled to an advantageous state but also the game value obtained in the advantageous state in a manner being associated with the advantageous state, the game machine also improving the performance effect.SOLUTION: The game machine includes display means capable of displaying a specific image to identify the number of times the game is controlled to an advantageous state when the game is placed in a special state more advantageous than the normal state. The display means can display numeral information about the game value obtained in the advantageous state together with the specific image associated with the advantageous state. In addition, specific display execution means changes a first specific display, after it is displayed in a period in which detection means is disabled for detection, to a second specific display more advantageous to the user than the first specific display as a specific display corresponding to the detection means detectable of the operation of the user. The specific display execution means then executes an operation performance using the changed second specific display in a period in which the detection means is enabled for detection.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 45

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, capable of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and capable of controlling a gaming state after ending the advantageous state to a special state more advantageous than a normal state.

  As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device and the game medium is in a predetermined winning area, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information such as a special symbol is provided. Some devices are configured to be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result in the device. In such a gaming machine, a predetermined number of open games are played when controlled to an advantageous state. And, there is one that is configured to be controlled to a special state that is more advantageous than the normal state, the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state. In addition, there is one that displays the number of times of being controlled to a specific advantageous state continuously in a so-called "in series" in a special state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2015-202210, A

  However, in the gaming machine described above, when in the special state, only the number of times controlled to the specific advantageous state can be known.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and deals with information regarding the gaming value obtained in the advantageous state, not only the number of times controlled in the advantageous state when in the special state, to the advantageous state An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can be grasped.

  (1) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display (for example, variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state) The game state after the end of the advantageous state can be controlled to a special state (for example, a probability change state, chance time, etc.) which is more advantageous than the normal state (for example, low probability low base state etc.) Display means (for example, effect control) capable of displaying a specific image that can be specified for the number of times controlled to the advantageous state when the gaming state is the special state, such as a pachinko gaming machine 1 etc. Images for which the CPU 120 can identify the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "first big hit" and the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "second big hit" The image which can be specified about the number of times controlled to the big hit gaming state regardless of whether the image “★ × number” which can be specified about the number, or whether the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit” And so on), and the display means can display numerical information on the game value obtained in the advantageous state together with the specific image corresponding to the advantageous state (eg, for example). A numerical value information "○○○○ pt" related to the accumulated winning balls number is displayed along with the number of times the jackpot gaming state is controlled, etc.), and detection means capable of detecting the player's action (eg, push button) 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera etc., and specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, as shown in FIG. 75, FIG. 82 to FIG. 88) Small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc.) Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) for performing the first specific display (for example, the first specific display) as the specific display. , Small button (white) D901, etc., and an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, a 16R certainty big hit (see FIG. 57), a big hit and a big change big hit In the case, the second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D 901 if the second specific display is high) The specific display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick When the first specific display is a large button (red) D903 such as D904, the second specific display can display a stick D904 or the like), and the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, FIG. 79 to FIG. In T4 to T11 and the like shown in 88), after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, a small button (white as shown in FIG. 82C) After D901 is displayed, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 83 (G), and a large button (white) D902 is further shown in FIG. 83 (I). The second specific display (e.g., the diagram shown in FIG. 79) is changed to the second button (e.g., the diagram shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88). As shown in FIG. 83 (J) or FIG. 83 (K), an operation effect (eg, shown in FIG. 83 (K)) is prompted by using the large button (red) D 903 or the large button (red) D 903 U etc. As shown in FIG. 83 (L), it is characterized in that the effect of notifying the result is performed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp not only the number of times controlled to the advantageous state but also the game value obtained corresponding to the advantageous state. Also, the rendering effect is improved.

  (2) In the gaming machine according to the above (1), when the gaming value is equal to or more than a specific number, the display means can display numerical information on the gaming value in a specific mode (for example, regarding the cumulative award ball number When displaying numerical information, usually, for example, in a normal mode such as "black", when the cumulative number of prize balls is equal to or more than a specific number, it may be displayed in a specific mode such as "gold") Good.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

  (3) In the gaming machine of the above (1) or (2), accumulating means for accumulating the gaming value until a predetermined ending condition is satisfied (for example, in all the big hit gaming states controlled during consecutive channing , And counting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, etc.), and the display means can display numerical information on the game value accumulated by the accumulating means (for example, in summary display mode) It may be made to carry out consecutive chan information production etc.).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement.

  (4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the display means can specify one specific image which can be specified regardless of the type of the advantageous state about the number of times controlled to the advantageous state. It is possible to display (for example, an image “image imitating a crown that can be specified for the number of times the jackpot gaming state has been controlled regardless of whether the jackpot type is“ first jackpot ”or“ second jackpot ” "" May be displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the number of times of being controlled to the advantageous state without disturbing the display other than the specific image.

  (5) In the gaming machine according to (4), the player is asked whether the display mode of the specific image is a mode in which a plurality of specific images are displayed or a mode in which one specific image is displayed. Reception means for receiving the selection of (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can set, as an effect customization function, whether the mode of the continuous chan alert effect is an individual display mode or a collective display mode, etc.) The display unit can display the specific image according to the mode received by the reception unit (e.g., according to the value of the channel change notification flag in the channel change notification effect setting process shown in FIG. 35). May be executed).

  According to such a configuration, the specific image can be displayed in a mode according to the player's preference.

  (6) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (5), the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is relatively effective, such as the reach effect of the super reach) And the like. Further, the display means limits the display of the specific image in response to the specific effect being performed (eg, a relative effect such as a reach effect of super reach). During the execution of a specific effect with high effect, if you do not execute the continuous chan notification effect, or if you are running the continuous chan notification effect even during the execution of the specific effect, the continuous chan notification effect image display area 5A , Or displaying the continuous channel notification effect semi-transparently).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible not to reduce the effect of the specific effect.

  (7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6), the display means restricts the display of the specific image when the power of the gaming machine is restored when the gaming state is the special state. It is possible (for example, when recovery is performed after a power failure or the like occurs in a definite change state, continuous channel notification effect is not performed, or recovery is performed after a power failure or the like occurs in a definite change state. Also in the case of executing the consecutive chan alert effect, it may be performed in a special mode in which the number of consecutive chans or the cumulative number of winning balls can not be specified.

  According to such a configuration, the number of times the advantageous state is controlled or the gaming value obtained in the advantageous state is false because the power of the gaming machine is restored when the gaming state is the special state. Can be prevented from being displayed.

  Moreover, the invention which concerns on the following (8)-(16) is included in the form for implementing invention mentioned later. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, there has been known a gaming machine which displays an operation promoting image corresponding to the operation means during the effective period of the operation means (button or the like) as disclosed in JP-A-2016-83473. There is. In this gaming machine, when the user does not perform the operation, the operation promoting image may be gradually enlarged, or may be changed from the button-shaped operation promoting image to the patram-shaped operation promoting image. However, since the operation promotion image corresponding to the operation means changes with time and the operation promotion image does not change when it is operated earlier, there is a problem that the rendering effect is poor. In view of this point, provision of a gaming machine with improved rendering effects is desired.

(8) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of playing a game (pachinko gaming machine 901, slot machine, etc.), and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (For example, a push button 9031 B, a stick controller 9031 A, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera, etc.) and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons (white) D901 shown in FIGS. Specific display execution means (such as large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. For example, a button development effect process (S90529), a variable display effect process (S90172), etc. The row means, as the specific display, the first specific display (for example, small button (white) D901, etc.), the advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (Figure The second specific display (for example, the first specific display is a small button (white) D901), which has a high degree of expectation (see 57), and a high degree of expectation if the big hit and the probability change big hit normally occur. 2 If the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, and the second specific display is a large button (white) D902, a large button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (red) D 903 such as the stick D 904, the second specific display can display the stick D 904 etc.), and the detection ineffective period by the detection means can be displayed. (For example, in T4 to T11 and the like shown in FIGS. 79 to 88), after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 82C) After the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 83 (G), and further, the large button (white) D902 is shown. As shown in 83 (I), the large button (red) D 903 is changed to the third button after the change in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88). Operation presentation (for example, FIG. 83 (K) using two specific displays (for example, large button (red) D 903 and large button (red) D 903 U etc. as shown in FIG. 83 (J) and FIG. 83 (K)) As shown in Figure 83 (L As shown in), the effect of notifying the result etc. is executed.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to (8), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, a weak effect, a middle effect, a strong effect shown in FIG. 77C). Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D 901 shown in FIG. 84C is a small button (as shown in FIG. 84D or 84E). White) When the weak action effect of displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on D901 is executed, it changes to the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the large shown in FIG. 85 (G) In the button (white) D 902, as shown in FIG. 85 (H) and FIG. 85 (I), the middle effect effect of displaying the image TS 901, the image TS 902 and the image TS 903 acting on the large button (white) D 902 is executed. Shown in Fig. 85 (I). Thus, the small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 88 (A) changes to the stick D904, and as shown in FIG. 88 (B) and FIG. 88 (C), the image KS901 which acts on the small button (white) D901 or As a strong action effect of displaying the image KS 902 or the image KS 903 is executed, the stick D 904 may be changed as shown in FIG. 88C.

  According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(10) In the gaming machine of the above (8) or (9), the action effect acting on the specific display is a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action shown in FIG. And the like, and the rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the case without change and the change) In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), since the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, depending on which button etc. the action production is executed, the second The rate of change to the specific display may be different).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(11) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (8) to (10), a plurality of types of action effects (for example, weak action effects, medium action effects shown in FIG. 77C) are applied to the specific display. The display mode of the specific display after the change is, for example, a large button (white) D 902, a large button (red) D 903, and a stick D 904 shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. There is a large button (white) D 902 U, a large button (red) D 903 U, a stick D 904 U, etc., and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 77C, in the case of weak change (one-step change), medium change (two-step change), and strong change (three-step change), weak-action effect, medium-action Respective decision of production, strong action production Since the case is different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, strong change is different depending on which button etc. the action effect is executed, for example, when the small button (white) D 901 before the change is When the weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is performed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, which is strong When the change is performed, the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to any specific display varies depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is performed. You may

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(12) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (11), the detection means includes a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.), and the detection means corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. 87 is performed, and shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. 88, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D 904 executes the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change. The operation effect to be detected may be executed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(13) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (8) to (12), the specific display execution means is an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed may be displayed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(14) In the gaming machine according to any one of (8) to (13), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous fluctuation The specific display may be displayed over the display, the specific display may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and may be changeable.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(15) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for giving a notice that the gaming machine according to any of the above (8) to (14) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state etc.) , The countdown effect, the feature fall effect, etc.), and the effect presentation acting on the specific display is performed by the execution of the advance presentation effect, and the second specification is performed by the action presentation being performed. It may be changed to display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

(16) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (8) to (15) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be invalid) or the second state (for example, Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 89) settable to a state where the auto button function is effectively set, etc., and specific effect (eg, button preview when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, effect processing under variable display shown in FIG. 72, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, detects the detection result of the detecting means Based on the above, it is possible to execute the specific effect as the effect execution condition is satisfied, while in the second state, the specific effect can be executed as the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means. (For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc. are performed) The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being executed (for example, the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 of FIG. 89 is executed). Part etc.).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example etc. of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is a figure which illustrates a change pattern. It is a figure which illustrates change pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of start winning a prize judging processing. It is a figure showing an example of composition of judgment result designated command at the time of winning. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening pre-processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the setting example of an opening control pattern, and the opening setting example of a big winning opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing under big hit opening. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special winning opening judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit opening post process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a cumulative award ball number update process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start waiting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production customization processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect setting process during positive variation. It is a flow chart which shows an example of continuation chan information production setting processing. It is a figure which illustrates a battle production pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a battle production determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a battle production determination table. It is a figure which illustrates a boss | annular notice production pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a boss | annular notice production | presentation determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production processing under variable display. It is a flow chart which shows an example of ending effect processing. It is a figure which shows the display operation example in a presentation customization function. It is a figure which illustrates the example of execution of battle production. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in battle production etc. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in battle production etc. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in battle production etc. It is a figure showing an example of production operation in battle production etc. It is explanatory drawing of the game property in the pachinko game machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows the example of rendering operation in the high base state of the pachinko game machine of a modification. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine by another mode. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. FIG. 8 is an explanatory view exemplifying a game random number counted on the main substrate side. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a change category and a change pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a data control area for game control. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a production control pattern, etc. It is a block diagram etc. which show the structural example of the data holding area for presentation control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the starting winning a prize judgment processing in special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of starting winning a prize. It is a flow chart etc. which show an example of random number value judging processing at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of selection of a change category determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a change category determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the effect determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is an explanatory view explaining an example of a button development production category and a button development production pattern. It is a flow chart which shows an example of button development production determination processing. It is an explanatory view explaining a determination rate etc. of button development production. It is an explanatory view explaining a decision rate of a button development production pattern. It is explanatory drawing explaining the flow of the specific button development production in various periods in a button development production. It is an explanatory view explaining a flow of concrete button development presentation. It is an explanatory view explaining a flow of concrete button development presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in the display area of an image display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an auto button setting process. FIG. 14 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a display mode in the case of setting the function of the auto button to valid or invalid. It is explanatory drawing which shows the comparative example of the automatic continuous hit by long press operation, and the automatic continuous hit by an automatic button function.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. In the game board 2, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is shot and shot from a predetermined ball striking device.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. The special symbol which is identification information of is displayed variably. For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B can variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. Do. In addition, the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols, in which combinations of what are turned on and turned off in the 7-segment LED are different.

  A plurality of special symbols are given symbol numbers corresponding to them. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are attached to the numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are attached to the symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "the first special view", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as the "second special view" .

  The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are both formed, for example, in a square shape. The type of the first special figure and the type of the second special figure may be the same, or the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B may be configured to variably display numbers indicating, for example, "00" to "99".

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A in the special figure game and the variable display of the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are plural types of identification information capable of identifying each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 5, decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" are arranged. Then, in response to any one of the change of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the change of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B being started in the special figure game, In the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, variation of the decorative symbols is started. After that, when the finalized special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special view game, each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R on the "left", "middle" and "right" in the image display device 5 The finalized decorative pattern that is the result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed.

  Thus, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special drawing game using the first special drawing in the first special symbol display device 4A, or the special drawing using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B In synchronization with the game, variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns that can be identified respectively is performed, and a finalized decorative pattern to be a variable display result is derived and displayed. Note that, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means stopping display of identification information such as a decorative symbol and the like, and ending variable display. On the other hand, during the variable display from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the fixed decorative symbol as the variable display result is derived and displayed, the change speed of the decorative symbol is "0", and the decorative symbol is displayed. For example, the symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, and may be in a display state that causes, for example, slight shaking or expansion and contraction. Such a display state is also referred to as a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed in a definite manner, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol by the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include, for example, complete stop display of the decorative pattern only for a time shorter than a predetermined time without causing slight shaking or expansion or contraction.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbols display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are constituted by, for example, eight kinds of symbols. Corresponding symbol numbers are attached to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are attached to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”. The decorative design is not limited to eight types, and may be any number as long as it can constitute an appropriate number of combinations, such as a combination of big hit and a lost combination.

  After the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, until the finalized decorative symbol to be the variable display result is derived and displayed, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R for "left", "middle" and "right" For example, when the scroll display is performed such that the symbol numbers flow sequentially from the top to the bottom from the one with the highest symbol number to the next, and the decorative symbol with the highest symbol number is displayed, the symbol number is subsequently minimized. A certain decorative pattern is displayed. Alternatively, when at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is scrolled from a large symbol number to a small symbol number and a decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number is displayed, Subsequently, a decorative symbol with the largest symbol number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 5H, a holding storage display for specifying the number of holdings of variable display corresponding to the special view game is performed. Here, the game ball passes the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A, and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6B, for suspension of variable display corresponding to the special view game. It occurs based on the starting winnings by doing. That is, although the start condition for executing the variable display game such as the special view game and the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, that the variable display game is being executed based on the start condition established earlier When the start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to being controlled to the jackpot gaming state or the like, suspension of the variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning a prize storage display area 5H, the first reserve for displaying the number of special view reserve storages in an identifiable manner on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special view hold memories in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special view hold storage number in a distinguishable manner. The first special view reservation storage number is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended. The second special view reservation storage count is the number of storages for which the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended. The number of pending storages of the variable display obtained by adding the number of the first special view pending storage and the number of the second special view pending storage is particularly referred to as the total pending storage number. The term "number of Tokushu reserve storages" simply refers to a concept that includes all of the number of first to reserve special storages, the number of second reserve special storages, and the total number of pending storages, but in particular to some of these There are also cases.

  Under the image display device 5, a normal winning ball device 6A and a normal variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The regular winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening as a starting area which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is an electric motor having a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilting position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character is provided, and a second start winning opening is formed as a start area different from the first start area.

  As an example, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, when the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is in the off state, it is difficult for the game ball to easily pass the second starting winning hole It will be open. On the other hand, in the case of the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by tilting control in which the movable wing piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric character is on. It becomes easy to expand and open. In addition, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normal opening state, the gaming ball may enter more than in the enlarged opening state. It may be configured to be low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area changes between an enlarged open state in which the game ball easily passes and a normally open state in which the game ball hardly passes or can not pass.

  The game ball which has passed the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. A predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out as winning balls based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first start opening switch 22A, and the first start if the number of the first special view pending storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit. The condition is met. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 22B, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball, and the second special view reserve storage number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit, the second start The condition is met. The number of winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the first starting opening switch 22A and the number of the winning balls to be paid out based on the detection of the gaming ball by the second starting opening switch 22B. The numbers may be the same or different from each other.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning prize ball device 7 includes a special winning opening door which is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 serving as a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2 and a specific area which changes to an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. To form a winning opening as.

  As an example, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the OFF state, the big winning mouth door closes the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball can not pass the big winning mouth . On the other hand, in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning mouth door is in the on state, the big winning mouth door opens the big winning mouth, and the gaming ball easily passes the big winning mouth Do. As described above, the special winning opening as the specific area is changed into an opened state in which the game ball easily passes, which is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball can not pass and which is disadvantageous for the player. In place of the closed state in which the game ball can not pass through the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball hardly passes through the big winning opening may be provided.

  The game ball which has passed through the special winning opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as winning balls. Thus, when the game ball passes through the special winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, for example, when the game ball passes other winning openings such as the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when the special winning prize opening is opened in the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the gaming ball can enter the special winning prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special winning hole is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to get the winning ball by passing the gaming ball through the big winning hole, which is disadvantageous for the player. It becomes 2 states.

  An ordinary symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2. As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of LEDs of 7 segments, dot matrix, etc. like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and plural kinds of identification information different from the special symbol The symbol is usually displayed variably. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a common game.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a general drawing reserve display 25C is provided. The general drawing retention indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general drawing retention memory number as the number of effective passing balls passed through the passing gate 41.

  On the surface of the game board 2, in addition to the above-described configuration, a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball, and a large number of obstacle nails are provided. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings can be provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. It may be done. In this case, a predetermined number of gaming balls may be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the gaming ball having entered one of the general winning openings is detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. At the lowermost position of the game area, an out port is provided where game balls that have not entered any winning port are captured.

  At the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided, and further, a gaming effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the gaming area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure in the gaming area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right portion of the gaming machine frame 3 is provided a striking operation handle which is operated by a player or the like to fire a gaming ball as a gaming medium toward the gaming area. For example, the hit ball operating handle adjusts the resilience of the gaming ball in accordance with the amount of operation by the player or the like. The hitting control handle may be provided with a single-shot release switch or a touch ring for stopping the drive of the firing motor provided in the hit shooting device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming ball paid out as a winning ball and the gaming ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine can be supplied so as to be able to be supplied to the ball striking device. A plate is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower tray for retaining the surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper tray so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 31A, which can be held by the player and can be tilted, is attached to a member forming the lower tray, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body. The stick controller 31A includes an operating rod held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operating rod. The trigger button may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation can be performed by pushing and pulling the predetermined operation finger or the like while the player holds the operation stick of the stick controller 31A with the operation hand. Inside the operating rod, a trigger sensor may be incorporated so as to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button.

  A tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower tray at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit may be two transmissive photosensors disposed parallel to the board of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operating rod as viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1; As seen from the player's side, it comprises four transmission type photo sensors which are combined with two transmission type photo sensors disposed vertically to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod. Just do it.

  The member forming the upper tray is provided with, for example, a push button 31B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper tray main body. The push button 31B may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically or electromagnetically detecting an instruction operation by a player or the like. A push sensor for detecting an operation performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the body of the upper tray at the installation position of the push button 31B.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 20 such that the game ball passing through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. For example, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is started, for example, that the previous normal drawing game has ended, after the normal drawing start condition for the normal drawing is satisfied, the normal symbol display 20 The popular figure game by is started.

  In this common-play game, after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time as the common-pattern fluctuation time has elapsed, the determined normal symbol as the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, if a specific normal symbol such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per common figure". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is “general symbol lost” Become. In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the expansion and release control is performed such that the movable wing piece of the electrically-driven tulip that constitutes the normally variable winning ball device 6B is tilted. The normal release control is performed to return to the vertical position when.

  For example, after the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the occurrence of the start winning which is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. 2, the gaming ball having passed the first starting winning opening formed in the regular winning ball device 6A. A special drawing game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the establishment of the first start condition by the previous special drawing game, the end of the big hit gaming state, or the like. In addition, the second start condition is satisfied by the occurrence of the start winning that the game ball which has passed the second starting winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Later, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, by the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state, the special figure game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  In the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, after the variable display of the special symbol is started after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the special symbol Derivate and display the finalized special symbol. At this time, if a specific special symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol, it becomes a "loss". .

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an example, a special symbol indicating the number "3" or "7" is a big hit symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is a lost symbol. Each symbol such as a big hit symbol or lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Also, the special symbol common to both of the special figure games may be a big hit symbol or a lost symbol.

  After the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special figure game and becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, in the big hit gaming state, the big winning opening door of the special variable winning ball device 7, predetermined upper limit time The big winning opening is in the open state in the period until the elapse of or the time until the predetermined number of winning balls are generated. As a result, a round for setting the special variable winning prize ball device 7 to a first state advantageous to the player is performed.

  The special winning opening door with the big winning opening opened during execution of the round receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then the special winning opening is closed, thereby the special variable winning winning ball device 7 is changed to a second state disadvantageous to the player to complete one round. The round, which is the opening cycle of the special winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of times of execution reaches a predetermined upper limit number. Note that, even before the number of round executions reaches the upper limit number, round execution may be ended when a predetermined condition is met.

  In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state in which the number of round executions is “16” is also referred to as 16R big hit state, while the jackpot state in which the number of rounds execution is “6” is also referred to as 6R big hit state.

  Of the special symbols indicating the number of "3" or "7" that will be the jackpot symbol, the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is the 16R jackpot symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number of "3" is the 6R jackpot symbol . After the special symbol showing the number of "7" which is the 16R big hit symbol as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game is derived, it is controlled to the 16R big hit state. On the other hand, after the special symbol indicating the number of "3" which is the 6R big hit symbol as the determined special symbol in the special figure game is derived, it is controlled to the 6R big hit state.

  In the 16R big hit state based on the fact that the confirmed special symbol as a variable display result in the special figure game has become the 16R big hit symbol, "16" is set relatively high as the upper limit number of rounds when the big winning opening becomes open state Thus, the substantial period in which the big winning opening is open from the start to the end of the jackpot gaming state is relatively long. Therefore, in the 16R big hit state, many game balls are easy to pass through the big winning opening. On the other hand, in the 6R big hit state based on the determined special symbol as the variable display result in the special view game becoming the 6R big hit symbol, the relatively small upper limit number of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened " Since "6" is set, the substantial period in which the big winning opening is in the open state from the start to the end of the big hit gaming state is relatively short. Therefore, in the 6R jackpot state, only game balls smaller than the 16R jackpot state can pass the large winning opening. Thus, in the 16R big hit state, control is performed to change the large winning opening to the first state and the second state in the first change mode in which the game ball easily passes. On the other hand, when in the 6R big hit state, control is performed to change the large winning opening to the first state and the second state in the second change mode in which the game ball hardly passes.

  It is not limited to what makes passing easy of a game ball differ according to the number of times of execution of the round which makes a big prize mouth a 1st state, for example, passage of a game sphere according to the period which makes a big prize mouth a 1st state The ease of operation may be made different. As an example, the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7, the period until the predetermined upper limit time which becomes the first period elapses, or the period until the first number of winning balls occur In the open state, control is performed to change the large winning opening to the open state in the first change mode in which the game ball easily passes. On the other hand, the special winning prize opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 7 is a period until a predetermined upper limit time which is a second period shorter than the first period elapses, or a period until a second number of winning balls are generated. By setting the special winning opening in the open state, control is performed to change the special winning opening to the open state in the second change mode in which the game ball hardly passes.

  A big win in the first big hit state in which the big winning opening is changed in the first change mode in all rounds executed when in the big hit gaming state, and in some rounds executed when the big hit gaming state A second jackpot state may be provided in which the mouth is changed in the second change mode. As an example, although the first big hit state and the second big hit state are both the upper limit number of rounds "16", in the first big hit state in the first change aspect the big winning opening in all of the 16 rounds While changing to the open state, after changing the big winning opening to the open state in the first change mode in 6 rounds of 16 rounds in the second big hit state, the big winning opening in the remaining 10 rounds May be changed to the open state in the second change mode. As described above, when in the first big hit state, control is performed to change the first winning state to the first state and the second state in the first change mode in which the game ball easily passes through the big winning opening, while in the second big hit state At some time, control may be performed to change the first state and the second state in a second change mode in which the game ball hardly passes the special winning opening in a predetermined period.

  For example, as in the game in the 16R big hit state, the game in the game state in which a large number of game balls easily pass through the big winning opening is an advantageous state for the player than the predetermined game in the 6R big hit state. The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment executes a predetermined game and an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game, depending on whether the large hit game state is controlled to the 6R big hit state or the 16R big hit state. It is possible.

  In "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided in image display device 5, a special figure game using the first special figure in first special symbol display device 4A Among the special drawing games using the second special drawing in the second special symbol display device 4B, variable display of the decorative design is started in response to the start of one of the special drawing games. Then, a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when variable display is ended by stop display of the decorative symbol in each of the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. In this case, the variable display state of the decorative symbol may be in a predetermined reach state.

  In the reach state, when the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the big hit combination, the display is continuously changed with respect to the decorative pattern not being stopped and displayed yet It is a display state in which the state, or all or part of the decorative pattern changes synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of "left", "middle" and "right", when the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined big hit combination are stopped and displayed, they are still displayed. In the remaining decorative symbol display area which is not stopped and displayed, the display condition in which the decorative symbol is changing, or in all or part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", "right" It is a display state in which the decorative design is fluctuating synchronously while constituting all or part of the big hit combination.

  In response to the reaching state, the variation speed of the decorative pattern is reduced, a character image different from the decorative pattern is displayed in the display area of the image display 5, and the display mode of the background image is changed. By rendering and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern or changing the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, a rendering operation different from that before reaching the reach state may be executed. A rendering operation such as a character image display, a change in the display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of a moving image, or a rendering operation such as a change in the variation pattern of the decorative pattern, or a combination of some or all of them It is called reach effect indication. In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5, but also the voice output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, etc. An operation mode different from the above may be included.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns having different operation modes may be prepared in advance. And each reach mode differs in the possibility of becoming a "big hit". That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be made different depending on which of the plurality of reach effects is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as an example, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are set in advance. Then, when the reach mode of the super reach such as the super reach α or the super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result is the “big hit” is higher than when the reach mode of the normal reach appears.

  Unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may reach the reach state during the variable display of the decorative pattern, or the variable display result may become the "big hit", etc. A variable display effect may be executed to notify the player by the variable display mode of the decorative symbol or the like. In the present embodiment, variable display effects such as “slip” and “simulated link” can be performed. It may be determined whether or not to execute the variable display effect of “slip” or “simulated link” in response to the change pattern being determined on the main substrate 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of “slip” is to be executed on the effect control substrate 12 side may be determined regardless of the variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side.

  Unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or "slip" or "simulated links" during variable display of decorative symbols, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, image display or voice output as a message, etc. There is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol may reach the reach state by the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol such as lamp lighting, or the reach effect by the super reach may be executed. An advance notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". The production operation to be the preview production is the variable display state of the decorative design after the variable display of the decorative design is started in all of the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle" and "right" It is sufficient if it is executed before the reach state. In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may become a "big hit" may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is in the reach state.

  When a special symbol to be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a finalized special symbol in the special drawing game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol does not reach the predetermined state after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. The fixed decoration pattern which becomes non reach combination of may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display mode of the decorative symbol is referred to as a "non-reach" variable display mode when the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the lost symbol is displayed as a stop as a final symbol in the special figure game, the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started after the variable symbol display of the decorative symbol is started. Then, after the reach effect is performed, or the reach effect is not performed, the finalized decoration pattern to be a predetermined reach loss combination may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of a decorative symbol is referred to as a "reach" variable display mode in the case where the variable display result is "loss".

  When the special symbol to be the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol in the special figure game, the predetermined reach effect is executed corresponding to the change display state of the decorative symbol becoming the reach state. After that, or the reach effect is not performed, the finalized decorative symbol which is a predetermined big hit combination is stopped and displayed. Here, for the finalized decorative pattern to be a big hit combination, for example, the symbol numbers variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5 are “ Among the decorative symbols 1 ”to“ 8 ”, any one of the decorative symbols having the same symbol number is“ left ”,“ middle ”, and“ right ”in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. What is necessary is just the one displayed on the predetermined effective line and displayed in a stop.

  Depending on whether the special symbol derived as the finalized special symbol is the 16R big hit symbol or the 6R big hit symbol, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed as the big hit combination may be made different. As an example, when the 16R big hit symbol is derived as the finalized special symbol, the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the big hit combination is selected for all of the decorative symbols of "1" to "8", while the 6R big hit is selected. When the symbol is derived as the finalized special symbol, the decorative symbol to be displayed in the big hit combination is selected for the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even "2", "4", "6" and "8" May be In this case, it is notified that the 16R big hit state will be reached by stopping display of any of the decorative symbols with odd number “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” in the big hit combination Be done. On the other hand, when any of the decorative symbols with symbol numbers “2”, “4”, “6” and “8” is stopped and displayed in the big hit combination, whether it will be 16R big hit state or 6R big hit state The player becomes unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

  In response to the determined special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 6R big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, or the reach effect is not executed, the decoration pattern of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed The variable display mode of the symbol is referred to as the "first jackpot" variable display mode. On the other hand, in response to the finalized special symbol in the special figure game becoming the 16R big hit symbol, the fixed ornament symbol of the big hit combination is stopped and displayed after the predetermined reach effect is executed or the reach effect is not executed. The variable display mode of the decorative symbol is called the "second jackpot" variable display mode.

  In the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is "big hit" is controlled to the probability changing state in which probability change control is performed. The probability change control is control to improve the probability that the special display game and the variable display result of the decorative symbol become a "big hit" as compared to the normal state. That is, by performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result is a "big hit" is enhanced in the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbol than in the normal state, and the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is high. Become. The normal state is a gaming state different from a specific gaming state such as a big hit gaming state, a probability change state, and a time saving state. Further, the time saving state is a gaming state in which high open control and time saving control are performed. Hereinafter, the gaming state in which at least one of the high opening control and the time saving control is performed is referred to as a time saving state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, both the high opening control and the time saving control are performed in a short time state. The high open control is a control that improves the frequency at which the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the enlarged open state more than the normal state. That is, by performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the enlarged open state is increased than in the normal state, and the possibility that the second start condition is satisfied is increased. Specifically, for example, in high open control, control to shorten the variation time of the regular symbol in the regular game with the regular symbol display 20 than in the normal state, and the variable display result of the regular symbol in each regular game Control to improve the probability of being hit "flat" more than in the normal state, tilting to perform tilting control of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result becomes "on flat" One of the control for making the control time longer than in the normal state and the control for increasing the number of tilting times more than in the normal state may be performed, or two or more of the controls may be It may be performed. In addition, time saving control is control for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in the special figure game compared to the normal state. That is, by performing the time saving control, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the special figure game becomes shorter than that in the normal state, and the time until the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived and displayed becomes faster. When both high opening control and time saving control are performed together, the variation time of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is shortened, so the next variable display result is It is possible to save the number of gaming balls which decreases before becoming a "big hit" and the time required for the next variable display result to become a "big hit".

  That is, in the present embodiment, after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to be a probability change state and is controlled to be a time saving state. In other words, after the big hit gaming state ends, time saving control and high open control are performed along with the probability change control.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed, one of the condition that the special view game is executed a predetermined number of times and the variable display result becomes “big hit” again first. It ends when it is established. However, if the variable display result is "big hit" again, as described above, after the big hit gaming state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the high release control and the time saving control end after the probability change control ends. For example, with regard to the probability change state, it is determined that one of the predetermined number of times the special drawing game is executed and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" again, whichever condition is met first. With regard to high open control and time saving control, one of the conditions is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times greater than the predetermined number of probability variation control, and the variable display result becomes "big hit" again. End when it is true.

  In addition, the gaming state which is both a definite change state and a short time state is also referred to as a high probability high base state. The gaming state which is a definite change state and not a short time state is also referred to as a high probability low base state. The gaming state which is a short time state and not a definite change state is also referred to as a low probability high base state. A normal state that is neither a short time state nor a definite state is also referred to as a low probability low base state. When the gaming state is a high probability high base state or a high probability low base state, the probability of the variable display result being a "big hit" corresponding to each special view game is higher than usual, so the low probability low base state It becomes easy to become a big hit game state compared with. In addition, when the gaming state is high probability high base condition or low probability high base condition, the special figure fluctuation time in each special figure game is shortened and the second start condition is easily established, the low probability low base It becomes easy to become a big hit game state compared with the state. Thus, the high probability high base state, the high probability low base state, and the low probability high base state are advantageous states for the player. Also, although the gaming state in which at least one of the high opening control and the time saving control is performed is referred to as the time saving state, the gaming state in which only one of the high opening control or the time saving control is performed Also included. Moreover, a definite change state is also called a special game state. In the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in one of the low probability low base state, the high probability high base state, and the low probability high base state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the high release control and the time saving control are described as ending after the probability change control ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the high release control or the time saving control may end with the probability change control or before the probability change control ends. For example, a predetermined number of times related to the probability change control after the big hit gaming state is over, a predetermined number of times related to the high opening control, or a predetermined number of times may be determined according to the type of the big hit symbol. That is, for example, after the big hit game state with a big hit symbol is ended, the high opening control or the time reduction control ends with the probability change control, and after the big hit game state with another big hit symbol is ended, the high open control or time short control May end later than the probability change control. The high release control does not have to end with the time saving control. That is, the high release control may end after the time reduction control ends or before the time reduction control ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the time saving control and the high opening control are performed together with the probability change control after the big hit gaming state ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after the jackpot gaming state ends, one or two of the probability change control, the time saving control, and the high opening control may be performed. For example, depending on the type of jackpot symbol etc., it may be determined whether to perform the probability change control after the jackpot gaming state is over, whether to perform the high opening control, or whether to execute the time saving control.

  Although the jackpot gaming state, the high probability high base state, the high probability low base state, and the low probability high base state are described as advantageous states for the player, advantageous states for the player are limited thereto. I will not. For example, in the present embodiment, in the case of providing a bump, a small hit, etc., a bump, a small hit, etc. is also included in the advantageous state advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a battle effect which is an effect during definite variation is executed in a predetermined period such as a period in which a predetermined number of special drawing games in a definite variation state are executed. In the battle effect, an effect during battle is performed such that the player character plays against the enemy character. As an example, when the player character wins the battle with the enemy character in the battle effect, the player is notified in an identifiable manner that the probability change state ends and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. On the other hand, when the player character loses the battle against the enemy character in the battle effect, the player is notified that the probability change state is finished and the control is made to the short time state, in a recognizable manner. The effect of notifying the result of the battle according to the transition of the gaming state is also referred to as a battle result informing effect. As described above, the battle effect may include an effect during battle and a battle result notification effect. In the present embodiment, for example, the possibility that the player character wins the battle depends on which of a plurality of rendering modes during the battle effect such as whether the player character is superior to or inferior to the enemy character. Are different.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13 and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 also includes a relay board 15 or the like for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 2 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board comprising a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and the effect control board 12 or the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, main board 11 controls the variable display of the 1st special figure and the 2nd special figure by performing lighting / extinguishing control of each LED etc which form 1st special symbol display 4A and 2nd special symbol display 4B. It also has a function to control the variable display of a predetermined display pattern, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20 etc. ing.

  The main circuit board 11 includes, for example, a microcomputer 100 for game control, a switch circuit 110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls, and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 100 for game control, and the microcomputer 100 for game control A solenoid circuit 111 or the like that transmits a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. And various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electric parts for presentation such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 produces effects such as all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9 etc. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for the purpose to execute a predetermined rendering operation.

  The voice control board 13 is a control board for voice output control provided separately from the effect control board 12 and causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12 and the like. The processing circuit etc. which perform the audio | voice signal processing for this are mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 or the like is turned on / off. A lamp driver circuit or the like for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start opening switch 22A, the second start opening switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor called, for example. It is sufficient if it has. In addition, the main substrate 11 has a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold indicator 25A, a second hold indicator 25B, and a common view hold indicator 25C. The wiring which transmits the command signal for performing display control of etc. is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 is relayed by the relay substrate 15. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 via the relay substrate 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. In the effect control command, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control an audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a game effect lamp 9 And a lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED and the like.

  FIG. 3A is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE, and the second byte indicates EXT. The first bit of MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of EXT data is "0". The command shown in FIG. 3A is an example, and another command may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 3A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. "H" of "8001H" indicates that "8001" is a hexadecimal number. The same applies to other commands. The command 8002H is a second change start command for specifying a change start in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is an ornament that is variably displayed in each of "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. It is a fluctuation pattern specification command which specifies a fluctuation pattern such as a symbol. “XX” of the EXT data in “81XXH” indicates that the value is an unspecified value, and is a value that is arbitrarily set according to the content of the command. For example, in the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern or the like designated in the fluctuation pattern designation command. The same applies to "XX" of EXT data in other commands.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 3B, the determination result whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit”, or the variable display result is “big hit”. Different EXT data are set in accordance with the determination result as to which of a plurality of types the jackpot type is to be made. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a result of the prior determination that the variable display result is "loss". The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type “first big hit” and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command for notifying of the preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type "second big hit" and the big hit type determination result.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol determination designating command for designating the stop of the variation of the decorative symbol in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a prize determination result specifying command for designating a predetermined determination result at the time of occurrence of the start winning, such as the first starting winning or the second starting winning. In this embodiment, a predetermined random number extracted at the occurrence of the start winning is determined to be included in a plurality of preset numerical ranges, and different data are designated according to the determination result based on the determination result. Set as EXT data of command.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designating command for designating the display of the effect image indicating the start of the big hit gaming state. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening open notification command for notifying that the large winning opening is in an open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening for notifying that it is a period in which the special winning opening has changed from the opening state to the closing state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command that designates the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-decision result or the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-decision result and the jackpot type decision result and the EXT data to be set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . In the large winning opening open notification command and the large winning opening open notification command, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the 6R big hit state or the 16R big hit state.

  The command B0XXH is a gaming state designating command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set in accordance with, for example, the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command B000H is a first gaming state specification command corresponding to the low probability low base state, the command B001H is a second gaming state specification command corresponding to the low probability high base state, and the command B002H is high probability low The third game state specification command corresponding to the base state is set, and the command B 003H is set as the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the high probability high base state. In the present embodiment, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in one of the low probability low base state, the high probability high base state, and the low probability high base state, it corresponds to the high probability low base state. Do not use the third game state specification command.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserve storage number notification command for notifying the first special view retention storage number in order to display the special view retention storage number in an identifiable manner in the start winning storage display area 5H or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserve storage number notification command for notifying the second special view reserve storage number in order to display the special view reserve storage number in an identifiable manner in the start winning storage display area 5H or the like.

  The command D0XXH is a large winning opening winning notification command for notifying that there has been a game ball winning to the large winning opening. The special winning opening winning notification command is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12, for example, when the gaming ball passes the special winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, the first hold storage number notification command is based on, for example, that the first start condition is satisfied when the first start winning is generated by the game ball passing the first start winning opening. The main substrate 11 is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as a notification of an increase in the number of first special image reservations. The second reserve memory number notification command is based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, when the second start winning occurs due to the game ball passing through the second start winning opening, the second special view hold It is transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 as a notification of an increase in the number of memories.

  In addition to transmitting the first pending storage count notification command as notification of an increase in the first special view storage limit, it may also be sent as a notification of a decrease in the first special view storage limit. Good. That is, even though the first reserved storage number notification command is transmitted on the basis of the fact that the first special view storage number is reduced based on the establishment of the first start condition in addition to the first startup condition. Good. Also, in addition to transmitting the second pending storage number notification command as notification of an increase in the second special view pending storage number, transmission may be performed as a notification of a decrease in the second special view pending storage number. Good. That is, on the basis of the fact that the second start condition storage condition is notified based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied in addition to the second start condition, the second hold storage number notification command may be transmitted. Good.

  Note that a second pending storage number notification command is transmitted in addition to the first pending storage number notification command based on the establishment of the first startup condition, and the second pending storage number is transmitted based on the establishment of the second startup condition. In addition to the notification command, a first pending storage count notification command may be transmitted. That is, on the basis of the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the first number of pending storages is notified as an increase in the number of first special views holding storages or the number of second special views pending storages. Both the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted. Similarly, the first pending storage is notified as a notification of a decrease in the first special view pending storage number or the second special view pending storage number based on the establishment of either the first start condition or the second start condition. Both the number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command may be transmitted.

  Also, instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, or in addition to the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, the total pending storage number is notified of the total pending storage number A storage number notification command may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase or decrease in the total pending storage number. When transmitting a total pending storage number notification command instead of the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command, it is specified which of the first start condition or the second start condition is met. You may make it transmit the starting opening winning combination designation | designated command. The establishment of the first start condition and the establishment of the second start condition are designated by the above-mentioned first fluctuation start command and the second fluctuation start command.

  In the present embodiment, in the start winning determination process, it is determined in which numerical range the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result extracted based on the occurrence of the start winning is included. Then, a value for designating the determination result of the random number MR1 is set in the EXT data of the prize determination result designating command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 12 is performed. The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 can recognize whether or not the variable display result is determined to be a "big hit" based on the EXT data of the winning determination result specification command.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main substrate 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM 101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data, etc., and a RAM 102 for providing a work area for game control A CPU 103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, a random number circuit 104 for updating numerical data independently indicating a random number, and an I / O 105.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 to execute a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data write operation in which the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores it, and various fluctuation data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103 Data reading operation to read out the data, reception operation in which the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105 Also, a transmission operation for outputting various signals is performed.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random number value counted on the main substrate 11 side. As shown in FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random value MR1 for determining the special display result, a random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, a random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, variation Numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 for pattern determination and the random number value MR5 for common result display result determination is controlled to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating a part or all of the random numbers MR1 to MR5. The CPU 103 updates the various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of the MR 5 may be counted.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not the variable display result such as the special symbol in the special figure game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit". It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535". The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit", For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "99".

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol, to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. ~ Takes a value in the range of "251". The random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of types prepared in advance, for example, “0” to “0 It takes a value in the range of 997 ". The random number value MR5 for determining the common drawing display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the common drawing game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per common drawing” or “general drawing loss”, etc. It is a random number value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of “3” to “13”.

  FIG. 5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "loss", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" and "variable" corresponding to each of the cases where it is "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the result is a "big hit" or the like. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "losing" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern, and the variable display result is "losing" and the decorative symbol is The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern.

  The non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the loss fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "loss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit variation pattern. The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of normal reach is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of super reach such as super reach α or super reach β is executed.

  FIG. 6 shows the variation pattern type in the present embodiment. Each fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 5 is included in at least one fluctuation pattern type among the plurality of fluctuation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include a single or a plurality of variation patterns classified based on, for example, the mode of the rendering operation performed during the variable display of the decorative symbol.

  As an example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns are classified according to the reach effect type, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern in which the variable display state of the decorative design does not reach a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach , And a variation pattern type including a variation pattern involving super reach. Moreover, about the fluctuation pattern with super reach, according to the content of reach production, you may make it classify | categorize into a different fluctuation pattern classification. Alternatively, different fluctuation pattern types may be classified according to whether or not a predetermined variable display effect is performed. As another example, a plurality of fluctuation patterns may be classified according to the variable display time of the decorative pattern or the like. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 6, one or more fluctuation patterns are classified into each fluctuation pattern type according to the contents of the variable display mode and the variable display. The specific classification of the fluctuation pattern shown in FIG. 5 can be specified, for example, from the setting of the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 as shown in FIG. That is, in the fluctuation pattern determination table 133, the fluctuation patterns to which the determination value is assigned according to each fluctuation pattern type are classified so as to be included in the fluctuation pattern type.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 stores various selection data, table data, etc. used to control the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. Also, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11 and a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. The table data etc. which comprise the fluctuation pattern table are stored.

  FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the special view display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is variable in the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit" before the finalized special symbol to be the display result is derived and displayed. Is a table to be referenced.

  In the special view display result determination table 130, the special view display result is determined according to the presence or absence of the probability change control whether the probability change control is not performed or the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 A numerical value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for is assigned to the special map display result of "big hit" or "loss". In the special figure display result determination table 130, table data indicating decision values assigned to a plurality of types of special figure display results is determined based on whether the special figure display result is controlled to a big hit gaming state as a "big hit". It is the corresponding data for decision.

  In the setting example of the special view display result determination table 130 shown in FIG. 7, in the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed, more determined values are “big hit” special view display results than the gaming state in which the probability change control is not performed. It is assigned. As a result, when in the definite variation state, the probability that the special view display result is determined to be "big hit" is higher than when not in the definite variation state.

  In this embodiment, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Instead, the special view display result is determined with reference to the same table data in the special view display result determination table 130. On the other hand, depending on whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, the special chart display result may be determined with reference to the respective table data in which the assignment of the determination value to the predetermined special chart display result is made different. Thereby, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A, and in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure The determination ratio of the display result can be made different.

  FIG. 8 shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 determines the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, when it is determined to control the special figure display result to the jackpot gaming state Is a table to be referenced. In the jackpot type determination table 131, the special symbol for which variable display is performed in the special figure game is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination depending on whether it is the first special view or the second special view A numerical value is assigned to a big hit type such as "first big hit" or "second big hit". As shown in FIG. 8, the jackpot type determination table 131 sets table data for setting the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 to a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type. May be included.

  In the setting example of the big hit classification determination table 131 shown in FIG. 8, depending on whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, the big hit classification of “first big hit” or “second big hit” The assignment of the decision value to is different. Thereby, the case of determining the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting the special drawing game using the first special drawing by the first special symbol display device 4A. In the case of determining the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting the special drawing game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, The ratio of determining the jackpot type as "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" can be made different.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, two types of table data in which assignment of determination values to a plurality of types of big hit types is different are prepared, and it is a special drawing game using the first special drawing, or the second special drawing The jackpot type is determined with reference to any of the two types of table data depending on whether the game is a special-figure game using a game, but the method of determining the jackpot type is not limited to this. For example, whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure, or a special figure game using the second special figure, in which one kind of table data having the same assignment of determination values to a plurality of big hit types is prepared. The jackpot type may be determined by referring to the same table data regardless of.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A and a lost variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132B shown in FIG. 9B as a variation pattern type determination table, and FIG. A lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time saving control) 132C shown in (C) is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is based on the random pattern value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern type determination according to the judgment result of the jackpot type when it is determined that the special figure display result is "big hit". Is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types. In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is determined depending on whether the determination result of the big hit type is "first big hit" or "second big hit". , Fluctuation pattern type CA3-1 to fluctuation pattern type CA3-3 is allocated. In the jackpot fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A, the determination value is assigned to each fluctuation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each fluctuation pattern type is different depending on which of plural types the jackpot type is determined. There is a part. For example, allocation of decision values to variation pattern types CA3-1 to variation pattern types CA3-3 is different between the case where the big hit type is "first big hit" and the case where it is "second big hit". As a result, it is possible to make the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type different according to the determination result as to which of the plural types the jackpot type is to be made.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9A, each variation pattern type is determined also when the big hit type is “first big hit” and also when it is “second big hit”. Although it is obtained, a certain variation pattern type may be determined only if it is a specific jackpot type. That is, the variation pattern type to which the determination value is assigned may be provided to either "first big hit" or "second big hit". Thereby, when it is determined that a certain jackpot type, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type different from the case where it is determined to another jackpot type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type is made to differ depending on the big hit type, but the determination ratio of the variation pattern type is not limited to this. For example, the determination ratio of the variation pattern type may be made different depending on the jackpot type and the gaming state. Further, the variation pattern type may be determined by a common determination ratio not related to the jackpot type or the gaming state.

  The lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C are the fluctuation pattern types when it is determined that the special figure display result is "lost". It is a table referred to in order to determine any of a plurality of types based on the random number value MR3 for type determination. Here, the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B is selected as the use table, for example, when the gaming state is the low probability low base state or the low probability high base state. On the other hand, the lost fluctuation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C is selected as the use table, for example, when the gaming state is the high probability low base state or the high probability high base state.

  In the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 132B and the lost variation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C, the determination value is assigned to the type of the variation pattern type to which it is assigned, or to the same variation pattern type There are different numbers of decision values. Thereby, when it is in a certain gaming state, it is possible to determine a variation pattern type different from that in the other gaming state. In addition, it is possible to decide fluctuation pattern classification with the decision ratio which responds to game state.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 stored in the ROM 101. The fluctuation pattern determination table 133 is a table referred to in order to determine the fluctuation pattern as any one of a plurality of types based on the random pattern value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern type. In the fluctuation pattern determination table 133, numerical values to be compared with the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination are allocated to one or more fluctuation patterns according to the fluctuation pattern type.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power source, a part or all of which is created on a predetermined power supply substrate. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, the content of part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period. In particular, data indicating at least the gaming state, that is, the data corresponding to the control state of the gaming control means and the data indicating the number of unpaid award balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary to restore the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power failure or the like is recovered after the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 11, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. There is. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 11 is a first special view reserve storage unit 151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 151B, a common view reserve storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special view reserve storage unit 151A stores the reserve data of the special view game which has started but has not been started although the game ball has passed through the first start winning opening formed by the normal prize ball device 6A. . As an example, first special view reserve storage unit 151A is associated with the reserve number in the order of winning on the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first start condition in the passage of the game ball from random number circuit 104 etc. The upper limit value of the number of memories is a predetermined upper limit value with numerical data etc. indicating the extracted random number value MR1 for determination of special view display result, random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination Remember until you reach. The reserve data thus stored in the first special view reserve storage unit 151A indicates that the execution of the special view game using the first special view is suspended, and a predetermined display is made based on the variable display result in the special view game. It becomes holding storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a game value is awarded.

  The second special view reserve storage unit 151B stores the reserve data of the special view game which has not yet started although the game ball has passed through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning prize ball device 6B and the start winning occurs. Do. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 151B is associated with the reserve number in order of winning on the second start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second start condition at the passage of the game ball from random number circuit 104 etc. The number is a predetermined upper limit value, with numerical data etc. indicating the extracted random number value MR1 for special view display result determination, random number value MR2 for big hit type determination, and random number value MR3 for variation pattern type determination as reserved data. I will remember until it reaches. The reserve data thus stored in the second special view reserve storage unit 151B indicates that the execution of the special view game using the second special view is suspended, and a predetermined display is made based on the variable display result in the special view game. It becomes holding storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a game value is awarded.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 151C stores holding information of the common drawing game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display unit 20 even though the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 151C determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 41 The numerical value data etc. which show the random number value MR5 for 1st are stored as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit.

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating count values of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be provided with a random counter for causing the CPU 103 to update a part or all of the game random numbers by software.

  For example, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 to MR5 are stored as random count values in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, and each randomness periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numeric data representing numbers is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the update operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 includes an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is provided with a CPU 120 for effect control which performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, etc. RAM 122, the display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, etc., and the effect control CPU 120 independently perform random number data updating indicating numerical value indicating random number A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  As an example, the effect control board 12 executes a program for effect control read out from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120 to execute a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the effect control CPU 120 reads out fixed data from the ROM 121, a change data write operation in which the effect control CPU 120 writes various change data in the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 in the RAM 122 Fluctuation data read operation to read out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, reception operation to receive various signal input from outside of the effect control board 12 via the I / O 125, the effect control CPU 120 to I / O for effect control CPU 120 A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12.

  The effect control board 12 includes wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13. Wiring or the like for transmitting an electric decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data to the lamp control board 14 is connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 35A an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A has been detected, and a game for the push button 31B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts up numerical data indicating various random number values used to control the effect operation. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used to control the rendering operation, in addition to the program for effect control. For example, in the ROM 121, there are a plurality of determination tables prepared to make various determinations, determinations, and settings by the effect control CPU 120, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data forming the various effect control patterns, etc. It is memorized.

  As an example, the ROM 121 stores a rendering control pattern table storing a plurality of types of rendering control patterns used by the rendering control CPU 120 to control rendering operations by various rendering devices. The effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content corresponding to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the effect control pattern table, for example, a special pattern change effect control pattern, a notice effect control pattern, and various effect control patterns may be stored.

  The special figure fluctuation time effect control pattern corresponds to a plurality of kinds of fluctuation patterns, in the period from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special figure game to the time when the definite special symbol as the special figure display result is derived and displayed It is composed of data indicating the control content of various rendering operations such as variable display operations of decorative symbols, reach display operations in reach effects, etc., or various effect display operations without variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect control pattern is composed of data etc. indicating the control content of the effect operation to be the notice effect to be executed corresponding to the notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns correspond to various effect operations performed in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and are composed of data indicating the control content.

  FIG. 12A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. Each effect control pattern, such as a special figure fluctuation effect control pattern and various effect control patterns, includes, for example, a effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, end code, It comprises control data for controlling various rendering operations, and the contents of the various rendering control, the switching timing of the rendering control, etc. may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data or the like for specifying the content of operation control in the movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value to be compared with the stored value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and a determination value corresponding to the execution time of each effect operation is set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main substrate 11, or that a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. Data indicating the switching timing of the effect control may be set according to the predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating an audio output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating an output mode such as a sound effect interlocked with a variable display operation of an ornamental pattern during variable display of an ornamental pattern. There is. That is, the audio control data is data for specifying an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating the lighting operation mode of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the lighting operation of the light emitter. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on an operation unit such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is effectively detected, and data indicating control content of a rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 12B is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode designated by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 5. Further, control is made to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is made to blink a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 or decorative LED in a mode specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B in the operation valid period specified by the operation detection control data, and to determine the content of the effect. In addition, dummy data may be set to data corresponding to a component for effect that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the effect control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 12 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable display of the decorative pattern An effect control pattern may be provided to execute an effect operation corresponding to a partial period. Alternatively, an effect control pattern may be provided to execute an effect operation corresponding to a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on, for example, the fluctuation pattern or the like indicated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, when starting variable display of the decorative pattern, for example. Further, the CPU 120 for effect control sets a corresponding effect control pattern, for example, when starting execution of a predetermined effect such as a preliminary effect or a large hit internal effect. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern may be configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. Thereafter, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 120 advances the control of the effect device in accordance with the contents of the process data # 1 to the process data #n included in the effect control pattern. In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination value # 1 to effect control process timer determination value #n, voice control Data # 1 to voice control data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control contents of the rendering operation in the rendering device, and the rendering control The presentation control execution data # 1 to the presentation control execution data #n for specifying the execution of are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like reads image data indicated by the instruction from an image data memory such as a CGROM and temporarily stores the image data in the VRAM. Further, in the voice control board 13 or the like that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated in the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. Let

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 as an area for holding various data used to control the effect operation, for example, an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. Is provided. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 13A includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 or the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the first start winning command buffer 194A shown in FIG. 13 (B1) and the second start winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 13 (B2) is the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Are stored in a predetermined area of The first start winning command buffer 194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the number of first special image storage blocks. A storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the second special drawing reserve storage number is provided in the second start winning command buffer 194B.

  When there is a start winning to the first start winning opening, a plurality of commands such as a first hold storage number notification command and a winning determination result designation command become one set, and are transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 . When there is a start winning to the second start winning opening, a plurality of commands such as a second hold storage number notification command and a winning judgment result specification command become one set, and are transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 . A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer 194A so that one set of commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning can be stored in association with each other. A storage area is secured in the second start winning command buffer 194 B so that one set of commands transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 120 stores the command received at the start winning combination in the free space of the first start winning command buffer 194A or the second start winning command buffer 194B according to the reception order. For example, the first hold storage number notification command at the top of the free space in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4” of the first start winning command buffer 194A based on the first start winning, the winning judgment result Store in the order of specified commands. On the other hand, the second hold storage number notification command at the beginning of the free space in the storage area corresponding to the buffer numbers "1" to "4" of the second start winning command buffer 194B based on the second start winning, the winning judgment result Store in the order of specified commands.

  When the first start winning combination and the second start winning combination occur, command transmission is performed in the order of the pending storage number notification command and the winning determination result specifying command. Therefore, if command reception is normally performed, the pending storage number notification command and the winning time are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the buffer numbers “1” to “4” as shown in FIGS. 13 (B1) and (B2). It will be stored in order of the judgment result specification command. In FIG. 13 (B1), commands are stored in storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” and “2”, and in FIG. 13 (B2), storage areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “3” Command is stored.

  The commands stored in the first start winning command buffer 194A and the second start winning command buffer 194B are deleted from those stored in the first storage area each time variable display of decorative symbols is started. And the subsequent memory contents are shifted. For example, when variable display of a new decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of a special drawing game using the first special drawing in the storage state shown in FIG. 13 (B1), it is stored in buffer number "1". Commands are deleted, and each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and buffer numbers "3" and "4" Each command stored in the area corresponding to each is shifted to the area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “2” and “3”.

  With regard to the area corresponding to the buffer number "3" in the second start winning command buffer 194B shown in FIG. 13 (B2), the second special view pending storage number notified by the second pending storage number notification command is " An example is shown in the case where a mismatch occurs due to "1". That is, the buffer number has a larger value than the second special view pending storage number notified by the second pending storage number notification command, and the second special view pending storage number notified from the main board 11 is (2) It is inconsistent with the number of second special view pending storages specified from the storage contents of the start winning command buffer 194B. In addition, since the shift of each command is performed when the variable display of the decorative design is started, it is immediately contradictory even if the buffer number becomes a value smaller than the number of special view pending storage notified by the pending storage number notification command. It must not be. However, differences at the time of reception of a command can be contradictory.

  Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described.

  In the main substrate 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes predetermined processing to be gaming control main processing. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC incorporated in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals, and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be entered after executing the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, whereby the gate switch 21, the first starting opening switch 22A, and the second starting opening via the switch circuit 110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing predetermined information output processing, for example, data such as jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step S13).

  Following the information output process, the game random number updating process for updating at least a part of the gaming random numbers such as the random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main substrate 11 side by software is executed (step S14). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 4B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 7 and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, a normal symbol process processing is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation of the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process processing, and enables variable display of the normal symbol and tilting operation setting of the movable wing in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, etc. Do.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in the I / O 105 corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, effect control After control data is set in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 12, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, etc., transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S15 shown in FIG. In the special symbol process process shown in FIG. 15, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101 of FIG.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 16, the CPU 103 first performs the first based on the detection signal from the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the start port switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first starting opening switch 22A is on (step S201; YES), the number of first special drawing holding memories, which is the number of holding memories for the special drawing game using the first special drawing, is a predetermined upper limit It is determined whether or not (step S202). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the number of first to-be-stored storages by reading the first to-be-stored storage number count value which is the storage value of the first to-be-stored storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. For example, when the first special figure storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; NO), the stored value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "1", for example ( Step S203).

  When the first start port switch 22A is off at step S201 (step S201; NO), or when the number of first special view storage blocks has reached the upper limit at step S202 (step S202; YES), Whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on is determined based on a detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B ( Step S204). At this time, if the second starting opening switch 22B is on (step S204; YES), the second special view pending storage number, which is the pending storage number of the special view game using the second special view, is a predetermined upper limit value It is determined whether or not (step S205). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the second special image storage number by reading the second storage number count value, which is the storage value of the second storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, for example. When the second special drawing reserve storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; NO), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is set to "2" ( Step S206).

  After one of the processes in steps S203 and S206 is executed, the number of to-be-saved special-image storages according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is increased by one when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special view game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to In addition, the second reserved memory number count value is increased by 1 when the game ball passes through the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special view game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to At this time, the total pending storage number is also updated so as to add one (step S208). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, may be updated so as to add one.

  After executing the processing of step S208, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special view display result and the big hit type from among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 104 and the game control counter setting unit 154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 for use and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is extracted (step S209). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view holding storage unit according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as holding information (step S210). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the first special image storage unit 151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, Numerical data representing random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in second special image storage unit 151B.

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type indicate whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative pattern is "big hit". Used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "big hit". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is used to determine the variation pattern type to which the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol belongs. The CPU 103 executes the processing of step S209 to select numerical data representing a part or all of the random display value used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative pattern or the variable display time. Extract.

  Subsequent to the process of step S210, transmission setting of the pending storage number notification command according to the starting opening buffer value is performed (step S211). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the storage control address of the first hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the transmission command buffer in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer, etc. The setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed on T12. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, etc. The setting for transmitting the second pending storage number notification command is performed. For example, after the special symbol process process is completed, the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 14 is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 after the special symbol process process is finished. It is transmitted.

  Subsequent to the process of step S211, it is determined which one of a plurality of previously set numerical ranges the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination indicated by the numerical data extracted by the process of step S209 is included (step S212). In the present embodiment, the range of “8001” to “8437”, the range of “8438” to “11277”, and the range other than these are set in advance as the plurality of numerical value ranges. As an example, in the process of step S212, the minimum value and the maximum value in each numerical value range are set, and which numerical value range is included by comparison with the random value MR1 extracted in the process of step S209. It is sufficient if it can be determined.

  After execution of the processing of step S212, transmission setting of a winning determination result specification command is performed (step S213). FIG. 17 shows a configuration example of the in-winning determination result designation command for which transmission setting is performed in the process of step S213. In the prize determination result specifying command shown in FIG. 17, different EXT according to the determination result as to which of the plurality of numerical ranges the random number value MR1 for special view display result determination extracted in the process of step S209 is included. Data is set. More specifically, the command 9500H is a winning combination determination result first specification command indicating that the random number MR1 is included in the range of "8001" to "8437". The command 9501H is a winning combination determination result second specification command indicating that the random number MR1 is included in the range of “8438” to “11277”. The command 9502H is a winning combination determination result third designation command indicating that the random number MR1 is included in a range other than the above.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, regardless of whether or not the probability variation control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, if the random number value MR1 is any one of "8001" to "8437", The special view display result is determined to be "big hit". Therefore, in the effect control board 12, it is determined that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit gaming state is controlled regardless of whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and the first determination command of winning determination result is determined. Designate to be identifiable on the side. If the random number MR1 is any one of "8438" to "11277", the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" only when the probability variation control is being performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to specify on the side of effect control board 12 that the variable display result is "big hit" and it is decided to control to the big hit gaming state when the gaming state is the definite variation state and the second judgment command upon winning a prize is determined. Specify to be The winning combination determination result third specification command specifies that it is possible to specify on the side of the effect control board 12 that the variable display result is “losing” and it is determined that the big hit gaming state is not to be controlled.

  After the process of step S213 is performed, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S214). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step S214; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S215), step S204. Go to the process of On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is "2" (step S214; "2"), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S216), The start winning determination process ends. As a result, even when both the first starting opening switch 22A and the second starting opening switch 22B simultaneously detect a starting winning combination of valid gaming balls, it is possible to surely complete the processing based on the detection of both starting starting winning combinations.

  In the start winning determination process, after the process of step S211 is performed, the process of step S213 is performed. After these processes are executed, by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. 14, the game ball passes through the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening, and the first start condition and the second start condition are obtained. When the start condition is satisfied, two commands, ie, a pending storage number notification command and a winning judgment result specification command, are collectively transmitted in one timer interrupt as one set. In addition, it is not limited to what is collectively transmitted in 1 timer interruption, and one command may be sequentially transmitted by the command control process of step S17 for every timer interruption.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 of FIG. 15, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152. And run.

  The special symbol normal processing of step S110 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is based on the presence / absence of the pending data stored in the first special view pending storage unit 151A or the second special view pending storage unit 151B. A determination is made as to whether or not the special figure game is to be started by the display device 4B. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not to control the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the big hit gaming state as the "big hit", based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result. The variable display result is determined before it is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, the finalized special symbol in the special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is set corresponding to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game . In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, multiple variation pattern types are used using numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determination of a variation pattern type based on the result of prior determination of whether or not to make the variable display result a "big hit". Processing to determine any of the types, processing to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types using numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determination of the variation pattern based on the determination result of the variation pattern type, and the like are included. ing. When the variation pattern setting process is executed and the variable display of the special symbol is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

  By the special symbol normal processing in step S110 and the variation pattern setting processing in step S111, a variation pattern including the determined special symbol, the special symbol, and the variable symbol display time of the decorative symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is determined. That is, the special symbol normal processing and the variation pattern setting processing are the random number value MR1 for determination of the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determination of the big hit type, the random number value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type, and the random value for variation pattern determination A process of determining a variable display mode of a special symbol or a decorative symbol is included using MR4.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". In this special symbol variation process, a process to make settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol Processing etc. is included. For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special figure variation time timer value which is the storage value of the special figure variation time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 is decremented by 1 or added 1 The same is true regardless of whether it is a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The timer measures the elapsed time. Further, it is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Thus, the special symbol variation process of step S112 is the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special feature in the second special symbol display device 4B. It is sufficient that the processing of controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special drawing game using the figure is performed by the common processing routine. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the variation of the special symbol reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol as the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed. It includes the process of setting. Then, it is determined whether the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not, and if the big hit flag is on, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "4". Be done. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "4". In this big hit opening pre-processing, the process of waiting until the waiting time until the end of the execution time of the fanfare effect executed on the side of the effect control board 12 elapses, or the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state is started A process of setting for opening the winning opening is included. When the setting for opening the special winning opening is made, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing of step S115 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, the elapsed time measured, the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23, etc. And the like are included to determine whether it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, the processing of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door is executed, and then the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6". .

  The big hit opening post process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "6". In this big hit opening post-processing, processing to determine whether the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened reached the large winning opening opening frequency maximum value, the winning opening opening frequency maximum value was reached In this case, a process of setting for transmitting an end designation command is included. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the maximum winning opening open number maximum value, while the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5", when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value is reached, the special drawing The value of the process flag is updated to "7".

  The big hit end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is "7". In this big hit end processing, processing to stand by until the waiting time until the end of the execution time of ending effect executed on the side of the effect control board 12 elapses, various settings for starting probability change control and time saving control Processing etc. are included. When such setting is performed, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "0".

  FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 18, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of second special view reservations is "0" (step S231). The second special figure reservation storage count is the number of reserved storages of the special view game using the second special view by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step S231, the second hold storage count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 154 may be read out, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the number of second special view reservations is other than “0” at step S 231 (step S 231; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in second special view suspension storage unit 151 B As data, numerical data representing a random number value MR1 for special image display result determination, a random number value MR2 for large hit type determination, and a random value MR3 for variable pattern type determination are read out (step S232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S232, for example, by updating the second reserved memory number count value by decrementing the second reserved memory number count value by one, and updating it so that the second special image reserved memory number is decremented by one, The holding data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the holding number "1" in the part 151B is shifted upward by one entry (step S233). In addition, in the process of step S233, the gaming control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S234).

  When the number of second Tokushu storages is "0" at step S231 (step S231; YES), it is determined whether or not the number of first special maps storage is "0" (step S235). The first special view reservation storage number is the number of suspension storages of the special view game using the first special view by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage count value stored in the first hold storage count counter and determines whether the read value is "0". Just do it. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of second special view reservations is “0”, and the number of first special views suspension storage is “0”. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the special view game using the second special view starts being executed with priority over the special view game using the first special view.

  When it is determined in step S235 that the number of first special view reservations is other than “0” (step S235; NO), the suspension stored corresponding to the suspension number “1” in first special view suspension storage unit 151A. As data, random number value MR1 for special figure display result decision, random number value MR2 for big hit classification decision and the numerical data which shows random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern category decision, it reads out respectively (step S236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S 236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting the first pending memory number count value and updating, etc. The pending data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the pending number "1" in the part 151A is shifted upward by one entry (step S237). Further, in the process of step S 237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may be updated so as to subtract 1 from the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter. At this time, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

  After performing any of the processes in steps S234 and S238, it is possible to use the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, as a use table for determining whether the "big hit" or "losing" is made. The figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special image display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is compared with the determined value assigned to each special image display result of "big hit" or "lost". Then, it is determined whether the special map display result is to be "big hit" or "loss" (step S240). At this time, for example, by confirming the state of the probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like, it may be specified whether or not the probability change control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed.

  After the special view display result is determined in step S240, it is determined whether the special view display result is a "big hit" (step S241). Then, if it is determined that the "big hit" (step S241; YES), the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the jackpot type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the jackpot type as any of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the jackpot classification determination table 131 set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot classification determination stored in the random number buffer for variation is each jackpot of “first jackpot” or “second jackpot” Depending on which of the determination values assigned to the type, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S244).

  Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the process of step S244, for example, by setting the value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), store the determined jackpot type Let As an example, if the big hit type is “first big hit”, the big hit type buffer value may be “1”, and if “big hit”, it may be “2”.

  If it is determined in step S241 that the game is not a "big hit" (step S241; NO) or after the process of step S245 is executed, the result of the predetermination as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state, In response to the determination result of the jackpot type in the game state, the determined special symbol is set (step S246). As an example, when it is determined that the special figure display result is not a "big hit" in step S241, the special figure display result is "loss" in response to the pre-decision result indicating that the "loss" is made. A special symbol indicating a symbol of "-" is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S241 that the special view display result is "big hit", the "3" or "7" that is the big hit symbol according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Set one of the special symbols that show numbers to the finalized special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "first jackpot", a special symbol indicating a number of "3" which is a 6R jackpot symbol is set as the determined special symbol. Also, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is "the second jackpot", a special symbol indicating the number of "7" that is the 16R jackpot symbol is set as the determined special symbol.

  After setting the finalized special symbol in step S246, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S247), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. . If, in step S235, the number of reserved memories of the special drawing game using the first special drawing is "0" (step S235; YES), after performing predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol End normal processing. In this demonstration display setting, for example, whether or not an effect control command for specifying a demonstration display by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main substrate 11 to the effect control substrate 12 or not. Determine At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 19, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big hit flag is on (step S261). Then, if the big hit flag is on (step S261; YES), the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" (step S263). .

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; NO), time reduction control is being performed, for example, by determining whether the time saving flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on or not. It is determined whether or not (step S264). When the time saving control is not being performed (step S 264; NO), the lost change pattern type determination table (normal time) 132 B is selected and set as a use table for determining the change pattern type to any one of a plurality of types (step S265). If time reduction control is in progress in step S 264 (step S 264; YES), a loss change pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132 C is selected and set in the use table for determining the change pattern type (step S S266). When one of the processes in steps S265 and S266 is executed, the total pending storage number may be specified, for example, by reading the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154.

  After one of the processes in steps S263, S265, and S266 is executed, it is set in the use table based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type stored in the variation random number buffer etc. The variation pattern type is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern type determination table (step S 267).

  That is, when the big hit flag is on, the table data corresponding to the big hit type determined by the process of step S263 is selected from the table data constituting the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination table 132A selected in step S262. Then, the variation pattern type to which the determination value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is assigned is determined.

  When the big hit flag is off, the lost variation pattern type determination table (normal) 132B selected in step S265 or the lost variation pattern type determination table (during time reduction control) 132C selected in step S266 The table data corresponding to the total pending storage number is selected, and the variation pattern type to which the determination value corresponding to the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determination of the variation pattern type is assigned is determined.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S267, the variation pattern determination table 133 is selected, and the variation pattern is set as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types (step S268). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be any one of a plurality of types by referring to the fluctuation pattern determination table 133 set in step S268 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for fluctuation pattern determination (step S269).

  The numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 when the process of step S269 is executed, or the first start winning combination The game balls that have passed through the mouth and the second start winning opening are extracted at the time of the start winning being detected, together with random number values MR1 to MR3, in the first special view holding storage unit 151A and the second special view holding storage unit 151B. It may be stored as hold information.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S269, a special view change time which is a variable display time of the special symbol is set (step S270). Specifically, the CPU 103 may set the special figure fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern determined in step S269 as the timer initial value of the special figure fluctuation time timer. Since the timer value of the special figure fluctuation time timer is decremented by 1 every timer interrupt, the value set as the timer initial value is a value based on the interrupt cycle T. For example, if the interrupt cycle is Tms, since the number of occurrences of the interrupt for one second is 1000 / T (times), the timer initial value for one second is 1000 / T. For example, if the interrupt cycle T is 4 ms, the timer initial value for one second is "250". The same applies to the timer initial values of the other timers on the main substrate 11 side and the timer initial values of the timers of the effect control substrate 12.

  After executing the process of step S270, according to the variation special view designation buffer value, the special view game using the first special view in the first special symbol display device 4A, and the second special in the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to start any one of the special drawing games using the figures, setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed (step S271). As an example, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S271, setting for transmitting various commands used for the start of variation of the special symbol is performed (step S272). For example, when the fluctuation special view designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command, a first fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the first hold storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 The transmission command buffer stores the data in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 causes the main board 11 to issue a game state designation command, a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command, and a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the second pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. In the buffer area. Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step S273), and the variation pattern setting process is ended.

  FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 20, the CPU 103 first determines, for example, whether the special view final display flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 or the like is on (step S291). Here, the special view finalization display flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S295 in response to the finalization display of the finalization special symbol as the variable display result in the special view game.

  When the flag for displaying special figure confirmation is off at step S291 (step S291; NO), the CPU 103 performs setting for deriving and displaying the confirmed special symbol (step S292). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol determination designation command to the effect control board 12 (step S293). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets a special view finalized display time which is a stop display time of the finalized special symbol (step S294). Specifically, CPU 103 sets a special figure determination display time as a timer initial value of the special figure determination display time timer value which is a storage value of the special figure determination display time timer provided in game control timer setting unit 153. Just set it. In the present embodiment, the time related to the fluctuation pattern is the special drawing fluctuation time, and the special drawing determination display time is not related to the fluctuation pattern, but in addition to the special drawing fluctuation time, the special drawing determination display time is also It may be a time related to the fluctuation pattern. For example, assuming that the total time of the special figure fluctuation time and the special figure determination display time corresponds to the fluctuation pattern, the timer initial value of the special figure fluctuation time timer and the timer initial value of the special figure determination display time timer according to the fluctuation pattern May be set.

  Subsequent to the process of step S294, CPU 103 sets the flag during special image determination display to ON (step S295), and ends the special symbol stop process.

  If it is determined in step S291 that the flag for displaying special figure confirmation is on (step S291; YES), it is determined whether the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). In the process of step S296, for example, it may be determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation time timer in which the timer initial value is set in step S294 has timed out. If the special figure determination display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; NO), the special symbol stop process is ended, and the process waits until the special figure determination display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure determination display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; YES), after the special figure determination display flag is cleared and turned off (step S297), it is determined whether the big hit flag is on or not. It determines (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S 298; YES), a big hit start presentation waiting time is set (step S 299). Specifically, a predetermined big hit start waiting time as a timer initial value of the big hit start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit start waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153 Just set it.

  Subsequent to the process of step S299, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start designation command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start designation command according to the big hit type buffer value is a send command in the send command buffer. It may be stored in the buffer area specified by the pointer.

  Subsequent to the process of step S300, the CPU 103 clears the big hit flag and turns it off (step S301). Subsequently, the CPU 103 sets, for example, a big hit start time flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 to an on state (step S302). Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for ending the time saving state or the probability changing state (step S303). In the process of step S303, for example, the process of clearing the time saving flag or the probability variation flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 and turning it off, or clearing the time saving counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 A process of initializing the count value of the time saving number to "0", a process of clearing the count value of the probability of variation by clearing the probability variation frequency counter, and the like may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the time saving flag is set to the on state when controlled to the time saving state in which the high release control and the time saving control are performed, and is cleared to the off state when the time saving state ends. That is, when the time saving flag is in the on state, it indicates that the gaming state is in the time saving state, and high open control and time saving control are performed. The probability change flag is set to the on state when controlled to the probability change state in which the probability change control is performed, and is cleared to be turned off when the probability change state ends. That is, the fact that the probability change flag is in the on state indicates that the gaming state is the probability change state, and probability change control is performed. Further, the time reduction counter is a counter for counting the remaining number of times of the special figure game in which the time reduction control and the high release control are performed. The probability variation number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining times of the special figure game in which probability variation control is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S303, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S304). Thereby, the change of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 12. In the present embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes even when the game state changes, but the game state designation command is transmitted only when the game state changes. May be In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the current gaming state is specified from the contents of the gaming state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but by receiving the hit start designation command instead of the gaming state designation command, the present The game state of may be specified. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S304 or the like. Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S305), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving state or the probability changing state is ended (step S306). For example, in the process of step S306, when the time saving flag is on, the time saving count value, which is the stored value of the time saving counter, is updated by subtracting 1, for example. It is determined whether the updated time count value matches the time reduction end determination value. It may be determined not to end the time saving state if the updated time count value does not match the time reduction end determination value, and it may be determined to end the time saving state if it matches. Further, in the process of step S306, when the probability variation flag is on, the probability variation number count value stored in the probability variation number counter is updated, for example, by subtracting one. It is determined whether or not the count value of the number of times of probability variation after updating matches the probability variation end determination value. If the count value of the probability variation count after the update does not match the probability variation end determination value, it may be determined not to end the probability variation state, and if it matches, it may be determined to terminate the probability change status. When it is determined that the time saving state is to be ended, the time saving flag is cleared to turn off, and the time saving state is ended. If it is determined that the definite variation state is to be ended, the definite variation flag is cleared to be in the OFF state, and the definite variation state is ended. In the present embodiment, since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in one of the low probability low base state, the high probability high base state, and the low probability high base state, the time saving flag is on. When the probability change flag is on or off and the time saving flag is off, the probability change flag is off, when the probability change flag is on, the time saving flag is on, and when the probability change flag is off, the time saving flag is on or off In addition, the initial value set in the probability variation counter is smaller than the initial value set in the time reduction counter.

  Subsequent to the process of step S306, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S307). Thereby, the change of the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 12. In the present embodiment, the game state designation command is transmitted even when the game state changes even when the game state changes, but the game state designation command is transmitted only when the game state changes. May be In addition, on the side of the effect control board 12, the current game state is specified from the contents of the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11, but instead, the effect control board is independently operated from the main board 11 side. The current gaming state may be specified by counting the number of times the variable display is performed on the 12 side. In this case, the game state designation command may not be transmitted by the process of step S307 or the like. Thereafter, the special figure process flag is cleared and the value thereof is initialized to "0" (step S308), and the special symbol stop process is ended.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening pre-processing performed in step S114 of FIG. In the big hit opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 21, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit start time flag is on (step S131). Here, the big hit start time flag is set to the on state in response to the big hit flag being on in the special symbol stopping process of step S113 shown in FIG.

  If the big hit start time flag is not on in step S131 (step S131; NO), the special winning opening determination processing is executed (step S220), and the process proceeds to step S137. As described above, by executing the large winning opening determination processing also in the big hit opening pre-processing of step S114 in addition to the big hit opening processing of step S115, it is possible to preferably detect winnings exceeding the winning upper limit judgment value. For example, over winning can be suitably detected during the next open standby. The special winning opening determination processing will be described later.

  If the big hit start time flag is on in step S131 (step S131; YES), it is determined whether or not the big hit start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S132). In the process of step S132, for example, it may be determined whether or not the jackpot start effect waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S299 of the special symbol stop process has timed out.

  If the jackpot start production waiting time has not elapsed (step S132; NO), the jackpot opening pre-processing is ended. If the jackpot start effect waiting time has elapsed (step S132; YES), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag (step S133). Subsequently, the CPU 103 clears the special winning opening open frequency counter (step S134). Specifically, the special winning opening open frequency count value is initialized to "1". Subsequently, the CPU 103 reads the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S135).

  Following the process of step S135, an open control pattern corresponding to the big hit type buffer value read in step S135 is set (step S136). At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 22A, if the big hit type buffer value is “1”, the release control pattern of the release KP1 is set. On the other hand, if the big hit type buffer value is "2", the release control pattern of the release KP2 is set.

  Following the process of step S136 or the process of step S220, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the next open standby is in progress (step S137). That is, it is determined whether it is in the interval period until the big winning opening is opened as the next round. In the process of step S137, for example, it may be determined whether or not the round start waiting time timer in which the timer initial value is set has timed out in step S363 of the big hit open post-processing. If the next open standby (step S137; YES), that is, if the interval period has not ended, the big hit open pre-processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if not waiting for opening next time (step S137; NO), that is, if the interval period has ended, the CPU 103 controls the start of opening of the special winning opening (step S138). For example, the CPU 103 sets an opening time for opening the big winning opening based on the opening control pattern set in step S136 and the count value in the large winning opening opening number counter, and the big winning opening is opened. To set. Specifically, in the process of step S138, the CPU 103 sets the opening control set in step S136 as the timer initial value of the opening time timer value which is the storage value of the opening time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. It is sufficient to set the pattern winning opening opening time. For example, when the release control pattern of the release KP1 shown in FIG. 22B is set, the timer initial value is 29 only when the count value of the special winning opening open number counter is “1” to “6”. When the opening control pattern of the opening KP 2 shown in FIG. 22B is set, for example, the count value of the special winning opening opening number counter is any of “1” to “16”. Also in this case, 29.5 seconds may be set as the timer initial value. Further, in the process of step S138, for example, the solenoid drive signal for the predetermined special winning opening door solenoid is started to be output via a predetermined solenoid circuit, or the like. The mouth door solenoid may be set to the on state.

  Subsequent to the process of step S138, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the special winning opening open notification command to the effect control board 12 (step S139). Subsequently, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special view process flag to “5” which is a value corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S140), and ends the big hit open pre-processing.

  FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit open process executed in step S115 of FIG. In the big hit open process shown in FIG. 23, the CPU 103 first determines whether the big winning opening open upper limit time has elapsed (step S121). If the special winning opening opening upper limit time has not elapsed (step S121; NO), the special winning opening determination processing is executed (step S220). FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of the big winning opening determination process executed in the big hit open process of FIG. 23, the big hit open process of FIG. 25, the big hit open process of FIG. is there.

  In the special winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 first determines whether the detection signal transmitted from the count switch 23 has become on (step S221). When the count switch 23 is not on (step S221; NO), the special winning opening determination processing is ended.

  When count switch 23 is on (step S221; YES), transmission setting of the big winning opening winning notification command for notifying winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening is performed to effect control board 12 (Step S222). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the value of the special view process flag is "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S223). If the value of the special view process flag is not "5" which is a value corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S223; NO), the special winning opening determination processing is ended.

  If the value of the special view process flag is "5" corresponding to the big hit open processing (step S223; YES), the number of winnings which is the storage value of the winning number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 The count value is updated to be incremented by 1 (step S224). Then, the special winning opening determination processing ends. The number-of-winning-pieces count value may indicate the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 23 while one round game is being executed.

  It returns to FIG. Subsequently to the special winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 24, it is determined whether or not the number-of-winning-pieces count value has reached a predetermined winning upper limit determination value (step S122). If the winning upper limit judgment value has not been reached (step S122; NO), the process during the big hit open ends. Here, since the value of the special process process flag is not updated, the process during the big hit open is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  On the other hand, if the large winning opening opening upper limit time has elapsed in step S121 (step S121; YES), or if it is determined in step S122 that the winning upper limit determination value has been reached (step S122; YES), It is determined that the round game is ended, and an open end control is performed to return the large winning opening in the open state to the closed state (step S123). At this time, setting for stopping transmission of the drive signal to the solenoid 82 may be performed.

  Following the process of step S123, the winning number counter is cleared to initialize the winning number count value to "0" (step S124). Then, after updating the value of the special view process flag to “6” corresponding to the big hit open post-processing (step S125), the big hit open processing is ended.

  FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the big hit opening post process executed in step S116 of FIG. In the big hit opening post process shown in FIG. 25, the CPU 103 first executes the special winning opening determination process shown in FIG. 24 (step S220). As described above, in addition to the big hit open process in step S115, the big winning opening determination process is performed also in the big hit open post process in step S116, it is possible to preferably detect a winning that exceeds the winning upper limit judgment value.

  After executing the special winning opening determination processing shown in FIG. 24, the CPU 103 updates the special winning opening opening number count value to be incremented by 1 (step S361). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the updated special winning opening open frequency count value has become the maximum value (step S362).

  The "maximum value" in step S362 is to be compared with the updated number of times of opening of the special winning opening, and the initial value of the number of opening of special winning opening is "1". “Is a number obtained by adding 1 to the upper limit number of rounds. For example, in the case of the first big hit where the upper limit number of rounds is six, the “maximum value” is “7”, and in the case of the second big hit where the upper limit number of rounds is sixteen times, the “maximum value” is “17 ". It should be noted that the "maximum value" may be compared with the number of times of opening the number of times of opening before being updated instead of the number of times of opening the number of times of opening after updating. In this case, the “maximum value” may be set as the upper limit number of rounds.

  If the special winning opening open frequency count value is other than the maximum value (step S362; NO), the round start waiting time is set (step S363). Specifically, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined round start waiting time as a timer initial value of a round start waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the round start waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Just do it. Subsequently, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting a notification command after opening the special winning opening to the effect control board 12 (step S364). After executing the process of step S364, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit opening pre-processing (step S365), and the big hit opening post-process is ended. Thus, the process of steps S114 to S116 shown in FIG. 15 is repeatedly executed until it is determined in the process of step S362 that the updated special winning opening open frequency count value is the maximum value, thereby achieving a big hit gaming state. It is possible to execute a plurality of rounds in which the big winning opening is opened. Further, by setting the round start waiting time in the process of step S 363, the next open standby is performed in the process of step S 114 shown in FIG. 15 until the round start waiting time elapses, so a desired interval period is set. Can start the next round.

  When it is determined in step S362 that the big winning opening open frequency count value is the maximum value (step S362; YES), a jackpot end effect waiting time is set (step S366). Specifically, as a timer initial value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer value which is a stored value of the big hit end presentation waiting time timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, a predetermined big hit end presentation waiting time as a timer initial value Just set it. Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S367). Thereafter, the value of the special view process flag is updated to "7" which is a value corresponding to the big hit end process (step S368), and the big hit open post-processing is finished. In this way, by setting the big hit end presentation waiting time in the process of step S 366, in response to the end of the ending presentation performed on the side of the presentation control board 12 in the process of step 117 shown in FIG. The special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 15 can be executed.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the big hit end process shown in FIG. 26, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end effect waiting time has elapsed (step S321). In the process of step S321, for example, it may be determined whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time timer for which the timer initial value is set in step S366 of the big hit open post-processing has timed out. If the jackpot end effect waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; NO), the jackpot determination processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (step S220), and the jackpot end processing is ended. Thus, in addition to the big hit opening process of step S115, by executing the big winning opening determination process also in the big hit end process of step S117, it is possible to preferably detect a winning that exceeds the winning upper limit determination value.

  If the jackpot end effect waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; YES), setting for starting the probability change control is performed (step S322). Specifically, in the process of step S322, the probability variation flag is set to the on state, and an initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game capable of executing the probability variation control is set in the probability variation number counter.

  Following the processing of step S322, setting for starting the time saving control and the high release control is performed (step S323). Specifically, in the process of step S323, the time saving flag is set to the on state, and an initial value corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game capable of executing the time saving control and the high release control is set in the time saving counter.

  Subsequent to the process of step S323, setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S324). Thereby, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be notified to the side of the effect control board 12. After that, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" (step S325), and the execution of the big hit end process is ended.

  In addition, when the setting for starting high open control is performed by big hit completion processing, the process for performing high open control is performed in the normal symbol process process of step S16 shown in FIG. For example, when the time saving flag is on, the ratio for determining that the common drawing display result is “per common drawing” may be higher than when the time saving flag is not on. As an example, the number of determined values assigned to "per common figure" to be referred to when the time reduction flag is on is the determined value assigned to "per common figure" to be referred to when the short time flag is not on By using the common drawing display result determination table, which is larger than the number of objects, it is determined that the common drawing display result is “per common drawing” when the time saving flag is on than when the time saving flag is not on. Rate may be high. For example, when the time saving flag is on, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be shorter than when the time saving flag is not on. Further, when the time saving flag is on, the tilt control time or the number of tilt controls may be increased more than when the time saving flag is not on.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described.

  In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 27 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122 and set various initial values, and to the effect control board 12 Performs register settings etc. of mounted CTC. Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; NO), the process of step S72 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt generated every time the predetermined time passes. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but interrupts using the CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue prohibited orders. The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, a control signal serving as an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 Capture The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte and the second byte are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on at step S72 (step S72; YES), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main substrate 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  After the command analysis process is performed in step S74, an effect control process process is performed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, the effect With regard to the control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation in the phantom, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the rendering control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11.

  Following the effect control process of step S75, effect random number updating process is executed (step S76), and the effect random number is counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 as various random number values used for effect control. The numerical data representing the is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S72.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S74 of FIG. 21 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 28, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer, etc., whereby the received command from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 is It is determined whether there is any (step S501). At this time, if there is no reception command (step S501; NO), the command analysis process is ended.

  If there is a received command at step S501 (step S501; YES), for example, by checking the MODE data of the received command, it is determined whether or not the received command is the first pending storage count notification command ( Step S502). At this time, if it is determined that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S502; NO), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S503). If it is determined that the command is not the second pending storage number notification command (step S503; NO), it is determined whether or not it is a winning determination result specification command (step S504).

  When it is determined in step S502 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S502; YES), or when it is determined in step S503 that the command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S503; YES) Or, if it is determined in step S504 that it is a winning judgment result specification command (step S504; YES), start winning commands such as the first start winning command buffer 194A and the second starting winning command buffer 194B. After storing the reception command at the top of the free space in any of the buffers (step S505), the process returns to the process of step S501.

  As an example, when the winning judgment result specifying command is received together with the first pending storage number notification command, the first pending storage is stored in the storage area having the smallest buffer number among the free areas in the first start winning command buffer 194A. The number notification command and the winning judgment result specification command are stored in order. On the other hand, when the winning judgment result specifying command is received together with the second pending storage number notification command, the second pending storage number is stored in the storage area having the smallest buffer number among the free areas in the second start winning command buffer 194B. The notification command and the winning judgment result specification command are stored in order.

  When the pending storage number notification command is received together with the change start command, the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning command command buffer. That is, it is only necessary to be able to sequentially store the effect control command received in response to the occurrence of the start winning, from the top of the free space in the start winning received command command buffer.

  The effect control command received from the main substrate 11 when a start winning occurs, such as a pending storage number notification command or a winning determination result specification command, is also referred to as a start winning command. In addition, the 1st pending storage number notification command and the 2nd pending storage number notification command, which are effect control commands to designate the first special view pending storage number and the second special view pending storage number to be recognizable, are pending It is also called notification information. As the suspension notification information, a starting opening winning combination designation command may be provided which can specify which one of the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening the gaming ball has passed. When a start winning is generated, the in-winning determination result designation command, which is an effect control command for designating a determination result based on an extraction value of numerical data indicating a random number MR1, is also referred to as determination result information. When the reception command is sequentially stored from the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer, the reception command is stored without distinction as to whether it is a pending storage number notification command or a winning judgment result specification command. Alternatively, each receive command may be distinguished and stored at the top of the free space in the corresponding storage area. When the reception commands are received separately, the storage area of the dropped reception commands is blank, and only a part of the effect control commands to be received as one set is excessively stored.

  As a specific example, when any one of the first pending storage number notification command and the second pending storage number notification command is received, the elapsed time after reception is measured to receive waiting time for the winning determination result designated command. It is determined whether or not has passed. Then, if the winning judgment result specifying command can be received before the reception waiting time elapses, it can be received within the normal reception period as a command corresponding to the pending storage number notification command, and the starting winning prize has already been received. In association with the pending storage number notification command stored in the command buffer, the received winning time determination result specification command is stored. On the other hand, if the winning determination result specifying command is received after the reception waiting time has elapsed, or if the winning determination result specifying command is received even though the elapsed time has not been measured, the normal reception period It is sufficient to store the received winning-time determination result specifying command in association with a new buffer number in the start-up winning time command buffer, because the reception storage number notification command is not received within the internal storage. .

  If it is determined in step S504 that the received command is not a winning judgment determination result designation command (step S504; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a gaming state designation command (step S506). And, when the reception command is the game state specification command (step S506; YES), for example, by storing the EXT data of the game state specification command in the game state specification buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194 etc. The buffer storage is updated (step S507). After the process of step S507 is performed, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S506 that the received command is not a gaming state designating command (step S506; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a hit start designating command (step S508). Then, when the received command is the hit start designation command (step S508; YES), the hour / minute variation counter is cleared, the count value is initialized to "0" (step S509), and the positive variation variation counter is cleared. Then, the count value is initialized to "0" (step S510). After the process of step S510 is performed, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S508 that the received command is not a hit start designation command (step S508; NO), it is determined whether the received command is a special winning opening winning notice command (step S511). Then, when the received command is a special winning opening winning notification command (step S511; YES), the cumulative winning balls number update process is executed (step S512). In the cumulative award ball number updating process executed in step S512, a process of counting the number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls, etc. is performed in the big hit gaming state controlled during the series of running. Here, the continuous chan is to be repeatedly controlled to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the low probability low base state. After the process of step S512 is performed, the process returns to the process of step S501.

  If it is determined in step S511 that the received command is not a special winning opening winning message notification command (step S511; NO), after setting according to the other received commands (step S513), the process returns to step S501.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S512 in FIG. In the cumulative award ball number updating process shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the big hit type of the current big hit gaming state is It is determined whether it is a "first big hit" (step S151). At this time, if it is determined that the jackpot type is "first jackpot" (step S151; YES), for example, storage of the first jackpot cumulative prize ball counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like The first jackpot cumulative ball number count value which is the value is updated (step S152). The first jackpot cumulative prize ball count value indicates the number of gaming balls paid out as the prize balls in the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot type controlled during the series is the “first jackpot”. In the process of step S152, for example, in the big hit game state where the big hit type is "first big hit", the gaming ball which has passed through the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 to be paid out as a winning ball. The value corresponding to the number may be updated by adding it to the current first jackpot ball count value.

  If the jackpot type is not the "first jackpot" but the "second jackpot" in step S151 (step S151; NO), for example, the second jackpot cumulative prize ball provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 etc. The second jackpot cumulative prize ball count value, which is the stored value of the number counter, is updated (step S153). The second jackpot accumulated prize ball count value indicates the number of gaming balls paid out as the prize balls in the jackpot gaming state in which the jackpot type controlled during the series is "second jackpot". In the process of step S153, for example, in the big hit game state where the big hit type is "second big hit", the gaming ball which has passed through the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23, and the gaming ball is paid out as a winning ball. The value corresponding to the number may be updated by adding it to the current second jackpot ball count value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S152 or the process of step S153, the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, a total big hit cumulative number of balls which is a stored value of a total big hit cumulative ball number counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. The count value is updated (step S154), and the cumulative winning balls number update process is ended. The total jackpot cumulative prize ball count value indicates the number of gaming balls paid out as prize balls in all the jackpot gaming states controlled during the series of chants. In the process of step S153, for example, a value corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be paid out as a winning ball based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed through the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 in the current big hit gaming state is It may be updated by adding to the current total jackpot ball count value. In addition, based on the fact that the game ball which has passed the large winning a prize opening is detected by the count switch 23, the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is the "big hit" or "the second big hit". If there is a difference, the same value as the value added in the process of step S152 or the value added in the process of step S153 may be added.

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 27 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 30, the effect control CPU 120 performs, for example, one of the following steps S170 to S175 depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like. Select and execute.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0". Whether or not this variable display start waiting process starts variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first change start command or the second change start command from the main substrate 11 is received or not. And the like.

  The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". This variable display start setting process is a decorative symbol on image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special drawing game by first special symbol display device 4A or second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of and various other rendering operations, processing for determining a finalized decorative symbol and various rendering control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbol, the type of display result, etc. is included.

  The variable display effect process of step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative symbol It performs various effects control during variable display. After such effect control is performed, for example, the end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read out from the special pattern change effect control pattern, or that the symbol determination command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is received, etc. In response to the, the finalized stop display of the finalized design as the final stop design which is the result of the variable display of the decorative design is displayed completely. When the determined decoration pattern is completely stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3".

  The process for waiting for a special figure in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." In the waiting process for the special drawing, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big hit during the rendering processing. On the other hand, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "lost", and the value of the effect process flag is initialized. Update to the value "0".

  The jackpot inside effect process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". In this big hit, during the effect processing, the CPU for effect control 120 sets, for example, a effect control pattern corresponding to the contents of the effect in the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting contents on the display screen of the image display device 5 Or outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command to the voice control board 13, turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command to the lamp control board 14 And, various effects control in the big hit gaming state is executed. Further, in the big hit internal effect processing, for example, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main substrate 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “5” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing.

  The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the setting content on the display screen of the image display device 5 or Output voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands to the voice control board 13, and turn on / off / flicker the game effect lamp 9 and decoration LED by outputting commands to the lamp control board 14 , Perform various effects control at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0" which is an initial value.

  FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S170 of FIG. 30 as the variable display start waiting process. In the variable display start waiting process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not there is reception of a change start command such as a first change start command or a second change start command (step S181). Whether or not the variation start command has been received corresponds to whether or not a predetermined flag indicating that it is determined in the command analysis process that the first variation start command or the second variation start command has been received is on. As long as it can be determined. The first change start flag and the second change start flag may be provided in advance, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like.

  If the change start command has not been received (step S181; NO), it is determined whether or not effect customization is in progress (step S182). The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with an effect customization function that allows the player to freely set an aspect of a part of effects. Whether or not the effect customization is being performed may be determined according to whether or not the effect customization in progress flag indicating that the effect customization is being performed is on. The effect customization in-progress flag is provided in advance, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, and is set to the on state when the main menu screen of the predetermined effect customize function is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 . On the other hand, when the effect customization function is ended, the effect customization in-progress flag is cleared and turned off. Also, when variable display of a decorative symbol is started corresponding to variable display of a special symbol in the special figure game, the effect customization in-progress flag may be cleared to be in the off state.

  If the effect customization is not in progress (step S182; NO), it is determined whether there is an instruction input for executing the effect customization function (step S183). For example, the effect control CPU 120 has an instruction input for executing the effect customization function when the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B. It may be determined that

  If there is no such instruction input (step S183: NO), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (step S184). The demonstration display flag is provided in advance, for example, in the presentation control flag setting unit 191 or the like, and when a demonstration display presentation is performed by performing a predetermined demonstration display on the screen of the image display device 5, a step described later It is set to the on state in the process of S191. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, the flag under demonstration display may be cleared in the process of step S193 described later to be in the off state.

  If the demonstration display flag is off in step S184 (step S184; NO), it is determined whether the demonstration display start waiting flag is on (step S185). The demonstration display start waiting flag is provided in advance, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, and is set to the on state in the process of step S187 described later when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished. On the other hand, when the demonstration display effect is started, the demonstration display start waiting flag is cleared in the process of step S190 described later, and the display is turned off. Also, even when variable display of decorative symbols is started, the demonstration display start waiting flag may be cleared in the process of step S193 described later to be in the off state.

  If it is determined in step S185 that the demonstration display start waiting flag is off (step S185; NO), a predetermined time predetermined as the demonstration display start waiting time is set (step S186). In addition, after setting the demonstration display start waiting flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like in the on state (step S187), the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S185 that the demonstration display start waiting flag is on (step S185; YES), it is determined whether a demonstration display start waiting time has elapsed (step S188). When the demonstration display start waiting time has not elapsed (step S188; NO), the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S188 that the demonstration display start waiting time has elapsed (step S188; YES), control for starting the execution of the demonstration display effect is performed (step S189). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern for executing the demonstration display effect from the plurality of effect control patterns, and sets it as the use pattern. For example, by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123 based on this effect control pattern, and displaying a predetermined effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, etc. It only needs to be started.

  After the processing of step S189 is executed, the demonstration display start waiting flag is cleared to turn it off (step S190), and the demonstration display flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 etc. is set to the on state. (Step S191), the variable display start waiting process is ended. As the demo display flag is turned on in this way, the demonstration display effect is executed in response to the elapse of the demonstration display start waiting time after the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished and it becomes a standby state. It can be identified to be started.

  If it is determined in step S184 that the demonstration display flag is on (step S184; YES), control for executing the demonstration display effect is performed (step S192), and the variable display start waiting process is ended. For example, the CPU for effect control 120 transmits a predetermined display control instruction to the VDP of the display control unit 123 based on the effect control pattern set in the usage pattern, for example, and the predetermined on the screen of the image display device 5 The demonstration display effect is continuously executed by displaying the effect image or the like. The demonstration display effect may be temporarily ended when a predetermined execution time has elapsed, and may be performed again after a predetermined interval time has elapsed. Alternatively, the demonstration display effect may be continuously performed until the variable display of the decorative pattern is started after the demonstration display start waiting time has elapsed.

  If it is determined in step S181 that a change start command has been received (step S181; YES), control is performed to end execution of a demonstration display effect or the like (step S193). For example, the effect control CPU 120 may transmit a predetermined display control instruction to the VDP of the display control unit 123, and may display an effect image corresponding to the case of starting variable display of the decorative symbol. Thus, the demonstration display effect and the effect customization function being executed may be ended. At this time, if the demonstration display flag is on, the demonstration display flag is cleared to be turned off. Also, if the demonstration display start waiting flag is on, the demonstration display start waiting flag is cleared to be turned off. After the process of step S193 is performed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variable display start setting process (step S194), and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  When the effect customization is in progress in step S182 (step S182; YES), or when there is an instruction input for executing the effect customization function in step S183 (step S183; YES), the effect customization process is executed (step S183) S195).

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect customization process performed in step S195 of FIG. In the effect customization process shown in FIG. 32, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether individual customization is in progress (step S331). In the effect customization function of the present embodiment, it is possible to individually customize a plurality of types of effects such as a mode of continuous channel notification effect, variable sound during variable display of a decorative symbol, and a character appearing in advance effect effect. Whether individual customization is in progress or not, indicates that the continuous channel notification effect customization flag indicating that the continuous channel notification effect is being customized, the fluctuating sound customization flag that indicates that the fluctuation sound is being customized, or that the character is being customized It may be determined depending on whether or not a predetermined individual customizing flag indicating that individual customization is in progress, such as a character customizing flag indicating that the character is in the on state. Here, the continuous channel notification effect is an effect of reporting the number of continuous channels during the probability change control. The individual customization in progress flag is provided in advance, for example, in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like, and is set to the on state when the menu screen of the individual customization function is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the individual customization function is ended, the individual customization in progress flag is cleared and turned off. Also, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game, the flag during individual customization may be cleared to be in the OFF state.

  When individual customization is not in progress in step S331 (step S331; NO), control is performed to display the main menu screen of the effect customization function on the screen of the image display device 5 (step S332). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays, as a main menu screen of the effect customizing function, a plurality of buttons for executing the individual customizing function for a plurality of effects, a button for terminating the execution of the effect customizing function, etc. You just have to display the

  After the process of step S332 is performed, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction input for executing the individual customization function (step S333). For example, based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the controller sensor unit 35A, the effect control CPU 120 detects that the player's operation on the stick controller 31A is detected. Is selected when it is determined that there is an instruction input for selecting any of the above, and the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B. It may be determined that there is an instruction input for executing the individual customization function corresponding to the button.

  If there is no such instruction input (step S333; NO), the effect customization process is ended. Here, since the effect customization in progress flag is on and any of the individual customization in progress flags is off, the control to display the main menu screen of the effect customization function is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs. Ru.

  When there is an instruction input for executing the individual customization function in step S333 (step S333; YES), the instruction input is for executing the continuous change notification customization function for customizing the continuous change notification effect mode. It is determined whether or not there is an instruction input (step S334), and if it is not an instruction input for executing the continuous channel notification customization function (step S334; NO), an individual customization function corresponding to the instruction input is executed (step S335).

  If individual customization is in progress in step S331 (step S331; YES), it is determined whether or not continuous chan notification customization is in progress (step S336), and even if continuous chan notification customization is not in progress (step S336; NO) , The individual customization function being executed (step S335).

  The image display device 5 is in the step S336 when the channel change notification is being customized (step S336; YES), or in the step S334 when it is an instruction input for executing the connection change notification customization function (step S334; YES). Control is performed to display a menu screen of the continuous channel notification customization function on the screen of (step S 337). For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets a button for setting the notification mode of the number of consecutive transfers in the continuous chan notification effect to the individual display mode and the collective display mode as the menu screen of the continuous chan notification customization function. A screen on which a button is displayed may be displayed. Here, the individual display mode of the number of consecutive chases is controlled to the number of the first big hit controlled to the big hit gaming state of the "big hit" of the big hit type and the big hit gaming state of the big hit type of "second big hit". This is an aspect in which the player can display the second jackpot count individually and in a recognizable manner. On the other hand, with the summary display mode of the number of consecutive churns, the number of the first big hit controlled to the big hit gaming state of the big hit type "first big hit" and the type of big hit controlled to the big hit gaming state of "second big hit" By displaying without distinguishing the number of times of the second big hit, it becomes possible to suppress that it becomes difficult to visually recognize other effect display along with the notification display of the number of consecutive breaks, as compared with the individual display mode.

  After the process of step S337 is performed, it is determined whether or not there is an instruction input for setting a notification mode of the number of consecutive moves in the continuous chan notification effect (step S338). For example, when the player's operation on the stick controller 31A is detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the controller sensor unit 35A, the effect control CPU 120 sets a plurality of notification modes of the number of times of consecutive moves. When it is determined that there is an instruction input for selecting any of the buttons, and the player's operation on the push button 31B is detected based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B, the selection is made. It may be determined that there is an instruction input for setting a notification mode of the number of consecutive shots corresponding to the button being pressed.

  If there is no such instruction input (step S 338; NO), the effect customization process is ended. Here, since the effect customization in-progress flag and the in-channel alert presentation in-progress flag are on, the control for displaying the menu screen of the in-transit alert customization function is executed again when the next timer interrupt occurs. .

  When there is an instruction input for setting the notification mode of the number of consecutive times in step S 338 (step S 338; YES), it is determined whether or not the instruction input is for setting an individual display mode ( Step S339), if it is for setting to the individual display mode (step S339; YES), the value of the continuous chan notification flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 etc. is updated to “1” (step S340) ), Finish the effect customization process. As described above, when the continuous chan alerting effect is executed by updating the value of the continuous chan alert flag to “1”, it is indicated that the alert mode of the continuous chan number set by the player is the individual display mode. It can be identified.

  If the instruction input is for setting the display mode in step S339 (step S339; NO), the value of the continuous channel notification flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is updated to "2". (Step S341), the effect customization process ends. As described above, when the continuous chan alerting effect is executed by updating the value of the continuous chan alert flag to “2”, the notification mode of the continuous chan number set by the player is a summary display mode. It can be identified.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 30 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 33, the effect control CPU 120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, and the special view display result is "lost". It is determined whether or not (step S631). At this time, if it is determined that the special view display result is “losing” (step S 631; YES), designation is performed, for example, by reading EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from main substrate 11. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern obtained is the non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" (step S632).

  If it is determined in step S632 that the pattern is the non-reach variation pattern (step S632; YES), a combination of determined decorative symbols to be the final stop design constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S633). As an example, in the process of step S633, first, numerical data indicating a random value for left fixed symbol determination updated by the random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and predetermined data stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like By referring to the left finalized symbol determination table or the like, the left finalized decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed on the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L of the finalized decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Next, numerical data indicating the right determined symbol determination random number value updated by the random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined right determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referenced. Thus, among the determined decorative symbols, the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting or the like in the right determined decorative symbol determination table. Subsequently, numerical value data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol which is updated by the random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in the ROM 121 etc. is referred to By doing this or the like, the determined decoration symbol to be displayed in the stop display on the "in" decoration symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display 5 among the determined decoration symbols is determined.

  If it is determined in step S632 that the pattern is not the non-reach variation pattern (step S632; NO), the combination of the finalized design symbols to be the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination is determined (step S634). As an example, in the process of step S634, first, numerical data representing a random value for determining left and right fixed symbols to be updated by the random counter or the like of effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and predetermined data stored in advance in ROM 121 or the like By referring to the left and right fixed symbol determination table, etc., the symbol numbers of the fixed ornament symbols displayed on the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are stopped and displayed Determine the same decorative pattern. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the middle fixed symbol determined to be updated by the random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined middle fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is referred. In the finalized decorative symbol, the intermediate determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C on the screen of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the determined decoration pattern becomes a big hit combination, as in the case where the symbol number of the middle determined decoration symbol becomes the same as the symbol number of the left determined decoration symbol and the right determined decoration symbol, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting to the symbol number of the inside fixed decoration pattern, etc., the fixed decoration pattern may be a reach combination without being a big hit combination. Alternatively, when the middle fixed decoration pattern is determined, the difference between the left fixed decoration pattern and the symbol number of the right fixed decoration pattern may be determined, and the middle fixed decoration pattern may be set corresponding to the pattern difference.

  When it is determined in step S631 that the special view display result is not a "losing" but a "big hit" (step S631; NO), a combination of finalized decorative symbols to be a final stop design constituting a big hit combination is determined ( Step S635). As an example, in the process of step S635, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a big hit determined to be updated by the random counter or the like of the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big hit finalized symbol determination table, etc., "left", "middle" and "right" are displayed in a stop on the screen of the image display device 5 in a row in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. Decide on a decorative pattern with the same symbol number. At this time, when the jackpot type is "first jackpot", a decorative symbol indicating a number other than "7" is determined as a finalized decorative symbol among a plurality of decorative symbols. Also, when the jackpot type is "second jackpot", among the decorative patterns of a plurality of types, the decorative symbol indicating the number "7" is determined as the finalized decorative symbol.

  After one of the processes in steps S633, S634, and S635 is performed, the probability variation in-progress setting process is performed (step S636). Subsequently, execution setting of the effect during the other variable display is performed (step S637). Thereafter, the effect control pattern is determined to be any of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S638). At this time, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared special pattern fluctuation control patterns and sets it as a usage pattern, corresponding to, for example, the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. In addition, for example, when the setting for executing the number of times of consecutive notices, battle effects, and boss advance effects are made in the definite variation effect setting process of step S636, special effect variation time effect control corresponding to the setting is performed. A pattern is selected.

  After execution of the process of step S638, an initial value of the effect control process timer provided in effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command, for example (step S639) . Then, setting is made to start the variation of the decorative symbol or the like in the image display device 5 (step S640). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special pattern fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S638 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123 or the like. It is only necessary to start the variation of the decorative symbol in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S641), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the probability variation-prone effect setting process executed in step S636 of FIG. The process of determining the effect mode and execution timing of the continuous change number informing effect and the battle effect, and whether or not to execute the boss notice effect, the effect mode and the execution timing are determined It is processing to do. In the effect setting processing during positive variation shown in FIG. 34, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the positive variation control is in progress, for example, by reading the game state designation buffer value from the effect control buffer setting unit 194 etc. Step S141). At this time, if the probability change control is not in progress (step S141; NO), the probability change in-progress effect setting process is ended.

  If the probability variation control is being performed (step S141; YES), the variation count value during probability variation is read (step S142), the continuous chan count value is read (step S143), and the first big hit count value is read (step S144), The second jackpot count value is read (step S145).

  Here, the probability variation variation count value is a stored value of the probability variation variation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and indicates the probability variation remaining number which is the remaining number of variable display executed during the probability variation control. In this embodiment, the probability variation variation count value is set to "100" as the maximum value of the variable indication executed during the probability variation control in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the variable indication result is derived and displayed Every time it is decremented by one, it is cleared and initialized to “0” in response to the start of the jackpot gaming state.

  Further, the continuous change count value is a stored value of the continuous change counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the end condition for ending the counting of the number of establishment of the advantageous condition controlled to the positive change condition as the advantageous condition is When the condition is not satisfied, it indicates the number of times the advantageous condition is counted. Here, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type is controlled to a definite change state after the end of the jackpot gaming state in any of the “first jackpot” and the “second jackpot”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, being controlled to the big hit gaming state is an advantageous condition to be controlled to the probability changing state as the advantageous state. Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous churn ending condition as the ending condition is satisfied by the time-shortening state ending and being controlled to the normal state without the variable display result becoming the “big hit” during the time-saving control. I assume. That is, the continuous change count value indicates the continuous change frequency controlled to the big hit gaming state repeatedly without being controlled to the normal state. In the present embodiment, the continuous chan count value is incremented by one in response to the end of the big hit gaming state, and the variable display result does not become a "big hit" during the time saving control, and the time saving state ends and becomes the normal state. It is cleared and initialized to "0" in response to being controlled.

  Further, the first big hit count value is a stored value of the first big hit counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and is not controlled to the normal state, but is continuously controlled to the big hit gaming state. Among them, the jackpot type indicates the number of times the "first jackpot" was controlled to the jackpot gaming state. In the present embodiment, the first big hit count value is incremented by one in response to the big hit gaming state having the big hit type “first big hit” ending, and the variable display result does not become “big hit” during time saving control. Cleared and initialized to "0" in response to termination of the time saving state and control to the normal state.

  Further, the second big hit count value is a stored value of the second big hit counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193, and the specific advantageous condition that is counted when the above-described consecutive chan end condition is not satisfied. Indicates the number of times the In the present embodiment, it is assumed that a specific advantageous condition is established because the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of “second jackpot”. That is, the second big hit count value is the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the "second big hit" among the number of consecutive chants controlled to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state Show. In the present embodiment, the second big hit count value is incremented by one in response to the big hit gaming state having the big hit type “second big hit” ending, and the variable display result does not become “big hit” during time saving control. Cleared and initialized to "0" in response to termination of the time saving state and control to the normal state.

  After executing the process of step S145, the effect control CPU 120 executes a continuous chan notification effect setting process (step S146).

  FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing an example of the consecutive chan alert effect setting process executed in step S146 of FIG. In the consecutive chan notification effect setting process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the value of the consecutive chan notification flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is “1” ( Step S161).

  If it is determined in step S161 that the value of the link warning flag is "1" (step S161; YES), that is, if the notification mode of the link count in the link notification effect set by the player is the individual display feature The first big hit cumulative winning balls count count value is read (step S162), the second big hitting cumulative winning balls count count value is read (step S163), and the continuous display information pattern of the individual display mode is determined (step S164) , And ends the continuous chan notification effect setting process.

  In the process of step S164, for example, as the continuous-chann notification effect pattern of the individual display mode, the “No. The numerical information on the accumulated number of winning balls acquired in the big hit game state of "one big hit" is displayed, and the big hit type among the number of consecutive chans is an image which can specify the number of times the big hit game state of "second big hit" is controlled. An effect control pattern is determined to display numerical information on the cumulative number of winning balls obtained in the "second big hit" jackpot gaming state. In addition, the number of times that the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the “first big hit” among the number of consecutive breaks is specified by the first big hit count value read in step S144 of FIG. 34, and the “first big hit”. The cumulative number of winning balls acquired in the big hit gaming state of is identified by the first big hit cumulative ball number count value read out in step S162. In addition, the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of “second big hit” among the number of consecutive breaks is specified by the second big hit count value read in step S145 of FIG. 34, and the “second big hit”. The cumulative number of winning balls acquired in the big hit gaming state of is specified by the second big hit cumulative ball number count value read out in step S163.

  If it is determined in step S161 that the value of the link warning flag is "2" (step S161; NO), that is, if the notification mode of the link count in the link notification effect set by the player is the display mode. The total jackpot cumulative award ball number count value is read out (step S165), the continuous channel notification effect pattern of the summary display mode is determined (step S166), and the continuous channel notification effect setting process is ended.

  In the process of step S166, for example, as a continuous-chann notification effect pattern of the summary display mode, effect control that displays numerical information on the cumulative award ball number acquired in the big hit gaming state in the continuous chan with an image that can specify the number of consecutive chans Determine the pattern. The number of consecutive churns is specified by the number of consecutive chum readings read out in step S143 of FIG. 34, and the number of accumulated winning balls obtained in the big hit gaming state in consecutive chings is the total big hit cumulative winnings read out in step S165. It is specified by the ball count value.

  Return to FIG. After executing the processing of step S146, the effect control CPU 120 determines a battle effect pattern (step S147). In the present embodiment, as described above, the battle effect which is the effect during the probability variation is executed in a predetermined period such as a period in which the predetermined number of special drawing games in the probability variation state are executed.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, the enemy character playing the battle against the player character in the battle production is "Miscellaneous fish (half fish)", "Small boss (boy)" and "Medium boss" In the case of “old man”, “large boss (monster)” and “last boss (black)”, the player character is “less competitive” than the enemy character. A plurality of battle effect patterns A1 to A3, B1 to B4, C1 to C4, D1 to D4 and E1 corresponding to the case of "predominance" and the case of "winning" and "losing" E4 is prepared in advance.

  Note that, for example, the battle effect pattern corresponding to the case where the enemy character is “Missho (half fisher)” is referred to as a snail battle effect pattern, and the case corresponding to the case where the enemy character is “small boss (boy)” The battle effect pattern is referred to as a small boss battle effect pattern. The same applies to other battle rendition patterns.

  Also, for example, a battle effect pattern corresponding to the case where the player character is "less advanced" is referred to as a battle effect lesser pattern, and a battle effect pattern corresponding to the case where the own character is "dominant" is a battle effect superior pattern It is called. The same applies to other battle rendition patterns.

  Also, for example, a battle effect pattern corresponding to a case where the enemy character is "Miscious fish (half fish)" and the self character is "less advanced" is referred to as a miscellaneous fish battle production inferiority pattern, and the enemy character is "Mis The battle rendition pattern corresponding to the case where the player character is “dominant” is referred to as a miscellaneous fish battle rendition superiority pattern. The same applies to other battle rendition patterns.

  Here, in the battle production of the battle production inferiority pattern, although the character of the self character is disadvantageous, the production of an aspect in which the outcome is not decided is executed. In addition, in the battle production of the battle production superior pattern, although the character of the player character is advantageous, the production of an aspect in which the outcome is not decided is executed.

  In addition, in the battle production of the battle production victory pattern, production of the aspect where the self character finally wins is executed, but production of the aspect where the character of the self character is advantageous as the aspect of the battle until victory. May be executed, or an effect of an aspect in which the appearance of the own character is disadvantageous may be executed. By enabling execution of the battle production victory pattern of such an aspect, variable display results are derived and displayed even if the battle production of any of the battle production patterns of the battle production inferiority pattern or the battle production superiority pattern is executed. The player's expectation for the player character to finally win can be continued until the In that case, in the battle production of the battle production victory pattern, the ratio in which the performance of the aspect in which the style of the own character is advantageous is executed as the mode of the battle until victory is the aspect in which the style of the own character is disadvantageous It may be set to be higher than the rate at which the rendering is performed. By making the battle effect victory pattern of such an aspect executable, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation that the player character will ultimately win when the effect during battle of the battle effect superiority pattern is executed. It can be done.

  In addition, in the battle production of the battle production defeat pattern, production of the aspect where the self character finally defeats is executed, but production of the aspect where the character of the self character is advantageous as the aspect of the battle until the defeat. May be executed, or an effect of an aspect in which the appearance of the own character is disadvantageous may be executed. By enabling execution of the battle production defeat pattern of such an aspect, variable display results are derived and displayed even if the battle production of any of the battle production patterns of the battle production inferiority pattern or the battle production superiority pattern is executed. It can be made to notice whether or not the self character finally wins. In that case, in the battle production of the battle production defeat pattern, the proportion in which the performance of the aspect in which the character of the own character is disadvantageous is executed is an aspect in which the character of the own character is advantageous as the battle mode until defeat. It may be set to be higher than the rate at which the rendering is performed. By making the battle effect victory pattern of such an aspect executable, the player's expectation for the player character to ultimately win is excessive when the effect during the battle effect of the battle effect inferiority pattern is executed. It is possible to suppress

  For example, in the process of step S147, a battle effect pattern is determined when the consecutive-channel count value read in step S143 is "5" or less, that is, when the consecutive-channel count is 5 or less. As a table for setting, a battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37A is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. The battle effect determination pattern may be determined by referring to the battle effect determination first table 201 based on the random number values thus extracted.

  In the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the probability variation variation count value, that is, according to the probability variation remaining number. There is. Specifically, in the case where the probability variation variation count value is “33” to “11”, it is determined to be one of the miscellaneous fish battle effect patterns A1 to A3. Further, when the probability variation variation count value is “10” to “1”, it is determined to be one of the small boss battle effect patterns B1 to B4.

  In this way, if the number of consecutive changes is 5 or less, if the probability of remaining number of times is 11 or more, such a battle that the player character will play against the enemy character of the miscellaneous fish (half fisherman) The middle effect is performed, and if the probability variation remaining number is 10 or less, the battle effect is performed such that the player character battles against the enemy character of the small boss (boy). That is, when the number of consecutive churns is equal to or less than five consecutive chants, effects during battle with the enemy character of the small boss (boy) are executed as a special effect over a partial period in which the probability of remaining number of times is 10 or less. be able to.

  Further, in the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37A, battle effect patterns are determined at different rates according to the probability variation variation count value and the variable display result. Specifically, if the variable display result is "loss" when the fluctuation count value during definite variation is "33" to "11", the miscellaneous fish battle production inferiority pattern A1 or the miscellaneous fish battle production superiority pattern A2 If the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", it is determined to be the miscellaneous fish battle effect victory pattern A3. In the case where the probability variation variation count value is “10” to “2”, when the variable display result is “loss”, the small boss battle rendering inferior pattern B1 or the small boss battle rendering superior pattern B2 is determined, When the variable display result is "big hit", it is determined to be the small boss battle effect winning pattern B3. If the variable display result is "losing" when the probability variation variation count value is "1", the small boss battle effect defeat pattern B3 is determined, and the variable display result is "big hit". Is determined to be the small boss battle rendition victory pattern B4.

  By doing this, regardless of the probability variation remaining count, when the variable display result is "big hit", it can be definitely notified that the big hit gaming state is controlled by the production mode of the battle effect . In addition, regarding the last variable display of the decorative symbol executed during the probability change control, when the variable display result is "big hit", it is informed that it will be controlled to the big hit gaming state by the production mode of the battle effect When the variable display result is "losing", it is possible to definitively notify that the time reduction state is controlled by the effect mode of the battle effect.

  Further, in the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the battle effect pattern is determined in different proportions according to the probability variation variation count value, the variable display result, and the variation pattern It has become. Specifically, when the variation count value during the definite variation is “33” to “11” and the variable display result is “loss”, “non reach” is the case where the variation pattern is “reach variation pattern” It is easier to be determined as the miscellaneous fish battle rendition dominant pattern A2 than in the case of the variation pattern, and the case where the variation pattern is the "super reach variation pattern" is more than the case where the "reach variation pattern" is It is easy to be determined to the miscellaneous fish battle directing advantage pattern A2. In addition, when the variation count value during the definite variation is “10” to “2” and the variable display result is “loss”, the “non-reach variation pattern” is the one where the variation pattern is the “reach variation pattern”. It is easier to determine the small boss battle rendition dominant pattern B2 than in the case where the small boss battle rendition pattern, and the small boss battle rendition is more effective when the variation pattern is the "super reach variation pattern" than when it is the "reach variation pattern". It is easy to determine the dominant pattern B2.

  By doing this, as described above, in the battle effect of the battle effect victory pattern, the ratio of the effect of executing the aspect in which the character of the own character is advantageous as the aspect of the battle until the victory is If the character appearance of the character is higher than the rate at which the effect of the aspect is performed, the expectation of the variable display result becoming "big hit" may be changed by the effect mode of the battle effect. it can.

  Further, in the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the probability change variation count value, the variable display result, and the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during probability change control are “big hit”. The battle effect pattern is determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the special figure game is on hold and stored, and the in-hold in-game big hit determination result. Specifically, in the case where the probability variation variation count value is “10” to “2” and the variable display result is “loss”, when the probability variation pending inside jackpot determination result is “no inside pending jackpot determination” Is easier to be determined in the small boss battle production inferiority pattern B1 than in the case of "with hold in the big hit determination", and the case in which the result is "with hold in the big hit determination" The smaller boss battle rendition dominant pattern B2 is easier to be determined than in the case of “no pending inner jackpot determination”.

  In this way, when the special view game in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control is "big hit" is not stored on hold, the effect of the aspect in which the character of the own character is disadvantageous In the aspect that when the special view game in which the variable display result is a “big hit” is stored on hold as the variable display suspension storage performed during the probability change control, the character of the player character is advantageous. The effect is likely to be continued, and the effect of winning the self character is executed in the variable display corresponding to the special view game in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control becomes a "big hit". That is, at an early stage of the period during which the battle effect with the enemy character of the small boss (boy) is executed, the special view game in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control becomes "big hit" In this case, the effect of the aspect in which the character of the own character becomes advantageous is executed frequently, and as a result, the effect of the aspect in which the own character wins is executed, and the own character wins Can give the player the impression of On the other hand, at a late stage of the period during which the battle effect with the enemy character of the small boss (boy) is executed, the special view game in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control becomes "big hit" In this case, the effect of the aspect in which the character of the own character becomes disadvantageous is frequently executed, so the effect of the aspect in which the own character wins is executed, and the own character struggles to win Such an impression can be given to the player. That is, in the execution period of the battle effect with the enemy character of the small boss (boy), the special view game in which the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control becomes a "big hit" is reserved and stored. When it is determined that the state becomes the state, it is possible to make the aspect of the battle effect with the enemy character of the small boss (boy) after the determination different according to the timing.

  Also, for example, in the process of step S147, when the consecutive-ch frequency count value read in step S143 is "6" or more and "10 or less", that is, the consecutive-ch frequency is 6 or more continuous chan and 10 or less continuous chan In this case, as a table for determining a battle effect pattern, a battle effect determination first table 202 shown in FIG. 37 (B) is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. The battle effect determination pattern may be determined by referring to the battle effect determination second table 202 based on the random number values thus extracted.

  In the setting of the battle effect determination second table 202 shown in FIG. 37 (B), the battle effect pattern is determined at a different ratio according to the probability variation variation count value, that is, according to the probability variation remaining number. There is. Specifically, in the case where the probability variation variation count value is “33” to “6”, it is determined to be one of the miscellaneous fish battle effect patterns A1 to A3. Further, when the probability variation variation count value is “5” to “1”, it is determined to be one of the middle boss battle effect patterns C1 to C4.

  By doing this, if the number of consecutive breaks is 6 or more and 10 or less, if the probability of remaining number of times is 6 or more, the player character fights against the enemy character of the miscellaneous fish (half fisherman) If such an effect during a battle is performed and the probability variation remaining number is 5 times or less, an effect during a battle is performed such that the player character plays against the enemy character of the middle boss (old man). That is, when the number of consecutive churns is 6 or more and 10 or less, during the battle with the enemy character of the middle boss (old man) as a special effect over a partial period in which the probability number of remaining times is 5 or less. A presentation can be performed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of consecutive breaks is five or less, the period in which the special effect can be performed is longer than the case where the number of consecutive breaks is six or more and ten or less. In other words, the special effect is started earlier in the case where the number of consecutive vibrations is 5 or less than in the case where the number of consecutive vibrations is 6 or more and 10 or less.

  In this way, when the number of consecutive churns is 5 or less, the probability change control corresponding to the period when the special effect may be executed, compared to the case where the number of consecutive churns is 6 or more and 10 or less consecutive chants Since the chance of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" at an early timing in the middle increases, the player can be given an impression that the enemy character of the boss is won at an earlier timing, as the number of consecutive chases is smaller.

  In addition, when the number of consecutive channings is 6 or more and 10 or less consecutive chans, the period in which the special effect can be performed is shorter than in the case where the number of consecutive churns is 5 or less, so the number of consecutive churn increases As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression that it becomes difficult to win against the enemy character of the boss.

  In addition, in the setting of the battle effect determination second table 202 shown in FIG. 37 (B), similar to the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the probability variation variation count value, the variable display result, The battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern and the probability change pending in-class big hit determination result.

  Also, for example, in the process of step S147, if the consecutive-ch frequency count value read in step S143 is "11" or more and the second big hit count value read in step S145 is less than "5", ie, A table for determining a battle effect pattern when the number of consecutive churn is 11 or more and the number of times that the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of “the second big hit” is less than 5 times Then, the battle effect determination third table 203 shown in FIG. 38A is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. The battle effect determination pattern may be determined by referring to the battle effect determination third table 203 based on the random number values thus extracted.

  In the setting of the battle effect determination third table 203 shown in FIG. 38 (A), the battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the probability variation variation count value, that is, according to the probability variation remaining number. There is. Specifically, when the probability variation variation count value is "33" to "4", it is determined to be one of the miscellaneous fish battle effect patterns A1 to A3. Also, when the probability variation variation count value is “3” to “1”, it is determined to be one of the large boss battle effect patterns D1 to D4.

  In this way, if the number of consecutive chants is 11 or more, and the number of times that the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "the second big hit" is less than 5 times, the probability variation remaining number of times If there are four or more times, effects are produced during a battle where the player character fights against the enemy character of the miscellaneous fish (half fisher), and if the number of probability variations is three or less, the player character is a large boss (monster During the battle, the battle character is played against the enemy character of. That is, if the number of consecutive churns is 11 or more and the number of times that the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "second big hit" is less than 5 times, the probability variation remaining number is 3 times or less During the battle with the enemy character of the large boss (monster) as a special effect, it is possible to execute the special effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of consecutive breaks is 6 or more and 10 or less, the period in which the special effect can be performed is longer than the case where the number of consecutive vibrations is 11 or more. In other words, when the number of consecutive churns is 6 or more and 10 or less, the special effect is started earlier than when the number of consecutive chants is 11 or more consecutive chans.

  In this way, when the number of consecutive churns is 6 or more and 10 or less, probability variation control corresponding to a period in which the special effect may be executed, compared to the case where the number of consecutive chants is 11 or more consecutive chants Since the chance of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" at an early timing in the middle increases, the player can be given an impression that the enemy character of the boss is won at an earlier timing, as the number of consecutive chases is smaller.

  In addition, when the number of consecutive channings is 11 consecutive chans or more, since the period in which the special effect can be performed is shorter than when the number of consecutive chantings is 6 or more and 10 or less, the number of consecutive sleepings increases As a result, it is possible to give the player an impression that it becomes difficult to win against the enemy character of the boss.

  Besides, in the setting of the battle effect determination third table 203 shown in FIG. 38 (A), similar to the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the probability variation variation count value, the variable display result, The battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern and the probability change pending in-class big hit determination result.

  Further, for example, in the process of step S147, even if the consecutive-ch frequency count value read in step S143 is "11" or more, the second big hit count value read in step S145 is "5" or more That is, even if the number of consecutive churns is 11 or more, if the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "second big hit" is 5 times or more, the battle effect pattern is determined A battle effect determination fourth table 204 shown in FIG. 38 (B) is set as a table for performing the process.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. The battle effect determination pattern may be determined by referring to the battle effect determination fourth table 204 based on the random number values thus extracted.

  In the setting of the battle effect determination fourth table 204 shown in FIG. 38 (B), the battle effect pattern is determined at a different ratio according to the probability variation variation count value, that is, according to the probability variation remaining number. There is. Specifically, when the probability variation variation count value is "33" to "4", it is determined to be one of the miscellaneous fish battle effect patterns A1 to A3. In addition, when the probability variation variation count value is “3” to “1”, it is determined to be one of the Las Boss battle effect patterns E1 to E4.

  In this way, if the number of consecutive chants is 11 or more, and the number of times that the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "the second big hit" is 5 times or more, the probability variation remaining number of times If four or more times, the self-character is in the battle to play against the enemy character of the miscellaneous fish (half fish person) is performed, if the number of probability variation remaining is three times or less, the own character is Lassboss (black) During the battle, the player is directed to battle against the enemy character of. That is, even if the number of consecutive churns is 11 or more, if the number of times that the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "the second big hit" is 5 times or more, the probability variation remaining number is 3 times During a part of the following period, it is possible to execute an in-game battle with the enemy character of Lass Boss (black) as a special effect of the specific aspect.

  Thus, even if the number of consecutive villas is 11 or more consecutive chans, among the specific embodiments of the specific mode that can not be viewed unless the number of times the jackpot type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of "second big hit" is five or more As a special effect, it is possible to execute during the battle with the enemy character of Lass boss (black), as a specific advantageous condition, against being controlled to the jackpot gaming state of the "second jackpot" jackpot type , The player can have a sense of expectation.

  Besides, in the setting of the battle effect determination fourth table 204 shown in FIG. 38 (B), similar to the setting of the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37 (A), the probability variation variation count value, the variable display result, The battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern and the probability change pending in-class big hit determination result.

  After executing the process of step S147, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the battle effect pattern determined in step S147 is a miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern (step S148). At this time, if it is determined that it is not a miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern (step S148; NO), the probability change effect effect setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S148 that the mixed fish battle effect pattern is determined (step S148; YES), the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11 is read, for example. It is determined whether the figure display result is "loss" (step S149). At this time, when it is determined that the special view display result is not a "losing" but a "big hit" (step S149; NO), the in-progressive effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S149 that the special view display result is "loss" (step S149; YES), whether or not to execute the boss notice effect, and the boss notice effect pattern to be executed are determined. Then (step S150), the process of setting the effect during positive variation ends. Here, the boss advance notice effect is a special effect before a battle effect with the enemy character of the boss is started as a special effect, that is, in a period in which a battle effect with the enemy character of miscellaneous fish is executed. It is an effect that predicts that an effect during battle with an enemy character of a boss is to be executed.

  Here, in the process of determining the presence or absence of the boss notice effect in step S150 and the boss notice effect pattern in the case of executing the boss notice effect, it is determined in step S149 that the special view display result is "loss". Will only be executed if By doing this, the boss notice effect is produced despite the fact that the probability change state is ended and the big hit gaming state is controlled without the effect being produced during the battle of the small boss battle effect pattern being executed as the special effect. Inconsistencies between the effects can be prevented from occurring, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, a plurality of boss notice effects patterns YP1 to YP4 are prepared in advance.

  Here, in the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP2, it is announced by displaying a message such as “It is a boss soon!” That the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed as the special effect. In addition, in the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP3, the boss notice effect pattern YP2 boss notice such as “The boss is close!” That the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed as a special effect. Notice by displaying a message of nuance that is stronger than the effect. In addition, in the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP4, the boss notice effect pattern YP3 boss notice such as “A boss comes !!!” that the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed as a special effect. Notice by displaying a message of nuance that is stronger than the effect. On the other hand, in the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP1, the boss notice effect pattern YP2, "Boss's sign is ..." that the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed as a special effect. The notice is given by displaying an ambiguous nuance message that can be either strong or weak, as compared to the nuances of the YP3 boss notice effect.

  For example, in the process of step S150, if the consecutive-ch frequency count value read out in step S143 is "5" or less, that is, if the consecutive-ch frequency is equal to or less than 5 consecutive ch And as a table for determining a boss | announced notice production | presentation pattern in the case of performing, the boss | advised announcement production determination 1st table 301 shown to FIG. 40 (A) is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. Based on the random number value extracted in this manner, the boss notice effect determination first table 301 may be referenced to determine the presence or absence of the boss notice effect and the boss notice effect pattern for execution.

  In the setting of the first notice of boss presentation effect determination first table 301 shown in FIG. 40 (A), the variable display result of the variable display which can be executed during the probability variation control according to the probability variation middle variation count value, The boss advance presentation effect pattern is determined at different rates depending on whether or not the special figure game to be the "big hit" is on hold and stored, and the in-hold big hit determination result. Specifically, if the probability variation variation count value is “33” to “15”, the percentage determined not to execute the boss advance presentation effect is 100%. On the other hand, if the probability variation variation count value is "14", it may be determined to execute the boss advance notice effect, and if the probability variation variation count value is "13" to "11" , Be sure to be determined to perform the boss notice effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, during the small boss battle as the special production, the battle production of the staging pattern in the small boss battle is executed as the number of times of probability variation remaining becomes 10 times. Therefore, when the number of consecutive churns is equal to or less than 5 consecutive chases, variable display in which a battle is produced during a battle with a small boss battle effect pattern as a special effect corresponding to the probability variation remaining number being 14 times Rather, in response to the fourth variable display being executed, a boss advance notice effect can be executed.

  Further, in the setting of the first notice of bosses presentation effect determination table 301 shown in FIG. 40A, when the variation count value during the probability change is “14”, the bosses not notice effect is not executed, and the bosses announcement effect pattern YP1. If it is determined to be one of the boss notice effects in the case, and the probability change variation count value is "13", either the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP1 or the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP2 It is supposed to be decided.

  By doing this, in response to the probability change residual number having become 14 times, although the boss advance presentation is executed, the boss corresponding to the fact that the probability change residual number has become 13 times, It is possible to prevent a situation in which the advance notice effect is not performed and prevent the player from feeling distrust.

  Further, in the setting of the first notice of boss presentation effect determination table 301 shown in FIG. 40A, when the variation count value during the probability change is “12”, any of the boss announcement effects of the boss announcement effect pattern YP1 to YP3. In the case where the probability variation variation count value is “11”, it is determined to be one of boss notice effects of boss notice effects patterns YP1, YP3, and YP4.

  In this way, although the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP3 is executed corresponding to the probability change remaining number becoming 12 times, the probability change remaining number becomes 11 times In response to the above, the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP2 of which the nuance of the message is weaker than that of the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP3 is prevented from being executed. You can try not to hold it.

  Here, in the case where the special view game in which the variable display result is the "big hit" is suspended and stored when the definite variation variation count value is "14" to "11", during the battle of the miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern The variable display result is "big hit" during the execution of the effect, there is a possibility that the probability change state is ended and the jackpot gaming state is controlled without the effect being produced during the battle of the small boss battle effect pattern being performed as a special effect .

  Therefore, in the setting of the boss notice effect determination first table 301 shown in FIG. 40 (A), the special display game in which the variable display result is “big hit” is suspended when the probability variation change count value is “14”. The boss notice effect is better when the in-hold big hit determination result of whether or not it is stored is “with in-hold big hit determination” than in the case where the in-hold big hit determination result is “no in-hold big hit determination” It is easy to decide not to execute.

  By doing this, the boss notice effect is produced despite the fact that the probability change state is ended and the big hit gaming state is controlled without the effect being produced during the battle of the small boss battle effect pattern being executed as the special effect. Can be prevented from occurring frequently, and the player can be prevented from being distrusted.

  In addition, in the setting of the first notice of boss presentation effect determination first table 301 shown in FIG. 40 (A), the variable display result is “big hit” when the change count value during the probability change is “13” or “12”. If the on-hold jackpot determination result as to whether or not the figure game is on-hold is stored, the percentage determined as the on-the-boss announcement effect of the on-the-boss announcement effect pattern YP1 is 100%.

  By doing in this way, a special effect is not performed during a battle with a small boss battle effect pattern as a special effect, and even though the definite change state is ended and the situation is controlled to the big hit gaming state, strong nuance It is possible to prevent the boss notice effect for displaying a message from being executed, and to prevent the player from feeling distrust. Moreover, in response to the probability change remaining number of times becoming 14 times, although the boss notification effect is executed, the boss notification effect is not executed in response to the probability change remaining number becoming 13 times , Etc. can be prevented, and the player can be prevented from being distrusted.

  Here, as described above, in the process of determining the presence or absence of the boss notice effect in step S150 and the boss notice effect pattern in the case of executing the boss notice effect, the special view display result is "missing" in step S149. It is executed only when it is determined that the Therefore, when the boss advance notice effect is executed in the variable display where the number of probability change remaining times is 11 times, the variable display result becomes “lost”, and the small boss battle in-progress pattern as a special effect corresponding to the next variable display. Production during the battle will always be executed.

  Therefore, in the setting of the first notice of boss presentation effect determination table 301 shown in FIG. 40 (A), if the probability variation variation count value is “11”, the percentage determined to be the boss announcement notice of boss announcement effect pattern YP4 Is 100%.

  In this way, in the variable display where the probability of remaining number of times is 11 times, it is possible to execute the boss notice effect displaying the message of the strongest nuance, and the special effect during the small boss battle during the battle It can improve the interest in being implemented.

  Also, for example, in the process of step S150, when the consecutive-ch frequency count value read in step S143 is "6" or more and "10 or less", that is, the consecutive-ch frequency is 6 or more and 10 or less consecutive chan In the case, as a table for determining the presence or absence of the boss notice effect and the boss notice effect pattern to be executed, the boss notice effect determination second table 302 shown in FIG. 40 (B) is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. Based on the random number value thus extracted, the presence / absence notice of boss notice effect and the boss notice effect pattern for execution may be determined by referring to the boss notice effect determination second table 302.

  In addition, in the setting of the boss advance notice effect determination second table 302 shown in FIG. 40 (B), like the setting of the boss notice effect decision first table 301 shown in FIG. The battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the jackpot determination result.

  Also, for example, in the process of step S150, if the consecutive-ch frequency count value read out in step S143 is "10" or more, that is, if the consecutive-ch frequency is 11 consecutive chans or more, As a table for determining the presence or absence and the boss notice effect pattern in the case of execution, a boss notice effect determination third table 303 shown in FIG. 40C is set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value for battle effect determination, which is updated by, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193. Based on the random number value thus extracted, the presence or absence of the boss notice effect and the boss notice effect pattern to be executed may be determined by referring to the boss notice effect determination third table 303.

  In addition, in the setting of the boss notice effect determination third table 303 shown in FIG. 40 (C), like the setting of the boss notice effect determination first table 301 shown in FIG. The battle effect pattern is determined at different rates according to the jackpot determination result.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 30 as the variable-display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 41, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value or the like (step S661). ). As an example, in the process of step S661, the effect control process timer value is updated, and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect control process timer value after the update, the variable display time elapses It may be determined that the

  If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S661 (step S661; NO), it is determined whether or not it is a continuous chan notification effect execution period for executing the continuous chan notification effect (step S662). The continuous chan notification effect execution period may be determined in advance by, for example, a continuous chan notification effect control pattern corresponding to the continuous chan notification effect, or a special view fluctuation effect control pattern or the like.

  If it is determined in step S662 that the connected chan alert effect execution period is in progress (step S662; YES), effect operation control for executing the linked chan alert effect is performed (step S663). As an example, in the process of step S663, the display of the effect image or the output of the sound effect, the lighting of the lamp, the effect according to the effect control execution data read out from the continuous channel notification effect control pattern or the special image variation effect control pattern etc. In order to perform a predetermined effect operation including a part or all of the operation of the movable member for this purpose, various commands are created and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14 and the like You should do it. In particular, in the continuous channel notification effect image display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, display operation control for displaying an image corresponding to the continuous channel notification effect may be performed.

  When it is not the consecutive chan information effect execution period in step S661 (step S662; NO) or after the process of step S663 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a battle effect execution period for executing battle effect (Step S664). The battle effect execution period may be determined in advance by, for example, a battle effect control pattern corresponding to the battle effect, a special image fluctuation effect control pattern, or the like. When a battle result notification effect for notifying the result of the battle according to the transition of the game state is executed, the execution period may be included in the battle effect execution period.

  If it is determined in step S664 that the battle effect execution period is in progress (step S664; YES), effect operation control for executing battle effect is performed (step S665). As an example, in the process of step S665, the display of the effect image, the output of the sound effect, the lighting of the lamp, the effect for the effect according to the effect control execution data read from the battle effect control pattern or the special image variation effect control pattern etc. In order to perform a predetermined effect operation including part or all of the operation of the movable member, various commands are created and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14 and the like. Just do it. In particular, in the battle effect image display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, display operation control for displaying an image corresponding to the battle effect may be performed.

  When it is not the battle effect execution period in step S664 (step S664; NO) or after the process of step S665 is executed, it is determined whether or not it is a boss notification effect execution period for executing a boss notification effect. (Step S666). The boss notice effect execution period may be determined in advance by, for example, a boss notice effect control pattern corresponding to a boss notice effect, a special view fluctuation effect control pattern, or the like.

  If it is determined in step S666 that the boss notice effect execution period is in progress (step S666; YES), effect operation control for executing the boss notice effect is performed (step S667). As an example, in the process of step S667, the display of the effect image and the output of the sound effect, the lighting of the lamp, and the effect according to the effect control execution data read out from the boss announcement effect control pattern or the special image variation effect control pattern etc. In order to perform a predetermined effect operation including part or all of the operation of the movable member, various commands are created and transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the lamp control board 14 and the like. Just do it. In particular, in the boss notice effect image display area provided on the screen of the image display device 5, display operation control for displaying an image corresponding to the boss notice effect may be performed.

  When it is not the boss announcement effect execution period in step S666 (step S666; NO) or after the process of step S667 is performed, for example, based on the setting in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern, etc. After performing other rendering operation control (step S668), the variable display effect processing ends.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S661 (step S661; YES), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S669). At this time, if the symbol determination designating command is not received (step S669; NO), the variable display effect processing is ended and the process waits. It should be noted that, after the variable display time has elapsed, when the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol determination specification command, a predetermined error process is performed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol determination specification command. May be performed.

  If the symbol determination designating command is received in step S669 (step S669; YES), variable display of decorative symbols, for example, transmitting a predetermined display control command to VDP of display control unit 123, etc. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol to be the display result in step S670.

  After executing the process of step S669, the CPU for effect control 120 determines whether or not the probability change control is in progress by reading out the game state designation buffer value from, for example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like (step S671). At this time, if the probability change control is being performed (step S 671; YES), the probability change variation count value is updated so as to be decremented by one in response to the variable display being executed during the probability change control (step S 672) ). Thus, the count value after update indicating the remaining number of times of the variable display performed during the probability variation control is stored in the probability variation middle variation counter.

  If the probability change control is not in progress in step 671 (step S671; NO), or after the processing in step S672 is executed, time reduction control is being performed, for example, by reading the game state designation buffer value from the effect control buffer setting unit 194 or the like. It is determined whether or not (step S673). At this time, if the time saving control is being performed (step S 673; YES), the time change record count value is updated so as to be decremented by 1 in response to the variable display being executed during the time saving control (step S 674). ). In this way, the updated count value indicating the remaining number of times of the variable display performed during the time saving control is stored in the time saving / mid-hour fluctuation counter.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the updated hour and week variation count value has become “0” (step S 675). If the updated hour and hour change count value is “0” (step S 675; YES), the special view display result is “for example, by reading the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 11. It is determined whether or not there is a loss (step S 676). At this time, if it is determined that the special view display result is “lost” (step S 676; YES), the continuous counter, the first big hit counter, the second big hit counter, the first big hit cumulative winning balls number The counter, the second jackpot cumulative winning number counter, and the total jackpot cumulative winning number counter are cleared, and the count value is initialized to "0" (step S677).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the variable display result of the variable display does not become a "big hit" in the short time state, and the count value of the number of consecutive times or the number of consecutive times corresponds to the end of the short state. Among them, the count value of the number of times the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "second jackpot" is cleared.

  If the time saving control is not in progress in step S673 (step S673; NO), if the hour / hour variation count value after updating in step S675 is other than “0” (step S675; NO), the process in step S676 If it is determined that the special map display result is not a “losing” but a “big hit” (step S 676; NO), or after the processing of step S 677 is performed, it is determined in advance as a hit start designation command reception waiting time. The set constant time is set (step S678). Then, after the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the special-image-per-wait process (step S 679), the variable-display effect process is ended.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in step 175 of FIG. 30 as the ending effect processing. In the ending effect process shown in FIG. 42, the effect control CPU 120 first determines, for example, whether the ending effect in progress flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191 or the like is on (step S681). Here, the ending effect in-progress flag is set to the on state by the processing of step S684 described later, corresponding to the execution of the ending effect.

  When the ending effecting flag is off at step S681 (step S681; NO), a fixed time set as the ending effecting time is set (step S682). Subsequently, for example, setting is made to start a rendering operation to be an ending rendering, such as selecting a rendering control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state as a usage pattern (step S683). Thereafter, the ending effecting flag is set to the on state (step S684), and the ending effect process is ended.

  When the ending effecting flag is on at step S681 (step S681), it is determined whether the ending effecting time has elapsed (step S685). If the ending effecting time has not elapsed (step S685; NO), the ending effect processing is ended after control of the effect operation to be the ending effect (step S686).

  If the ending effecting time has elapsed in step S685 (step S685; YES), the ending effecting flag is cleared to turn off (step S687).

  After execution of the process of step S687, for example, "100" is set as the count initial value corresponding to the number of times of the variable display for executing the time reduction control in the time reduction variation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like. (Step S688) For example, "33" is set as a count initial value corresponding to the number of times of variable display for executing the probability change control in the probability change middle variation counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like (step S689).

  After execution of the process of step S689, for example, the connected chan count value, which is the stored value of the connected channel counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like, is updated to add 1 (step S690). Note that the process in step S690 is not limited to the addition of one consecutive chan count value when the big hit gaming state ends, for example, even when the consecutive start count command is received, the consecutive chan count value is updated. Good.

  After execution of the process of step S690, it is determined whether or not the big hit type is "second big hit", for example, by reading the EXT data in the hit end designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 (step S691) .

  If it is determined in step S691 that the big hit type is "first big hit" (step S691; NO), for example, the stored value of the first big hit counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like A certain first jackpot count value is updated so as to add one (step S692). In addition, it is not limited to what adds 1st big hit count value when the big hit gaming state ends by the process of step S692, for example, when the hit start designation command is received, the big hit type is "first big hit". If so, the first jackpot count value may be updated.

  If it is determined in step S691 that the big hit type is "second big hit" (step S691; YES), for example, the stored value of the second big hit counter provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 or the like A certain second jackpot count value is updated so as to add one (step S693). Note that the processing in step S693 is not limited to the addition of the second jackpot count value when the jackpot gaming state ends, for example, when a jackpot start command is received, the jackpot type is "second jackpot". If so, the second jackpot count value may be updated.

  After executing the processing of step S692 or step S693, the effect process flag is cleared, and the value thereof is initialized to "0" (step S694), and the ending effect processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 43, a display operation example and the like of the effect customization function will be described.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the effect customization function that allows the player to freely set the aspect of a part of the effect. When the effect customization function is executed, a plurality of buttons for executing the individual customization function and a button for ending the execution of the effect customization function are displayed as main menu screens of the effect customization function. Screen is displayed.

  FIG. 43 (A) shows an example of a main menu screen of the effect customization function. In the example of the main menu screen shown in FIG. 43 (A), a button 5BA for executing a continuous chan notification customization function for customizing a continuous chan notification effect mode, and a variation for customizing variable sound during variable display of a decorative symbol A button 5BB for executing a sound customization function, a button 5BC for executing a character customization function for customizing a character appearing in a notice effect, a button 5BD for executing other effect customization functions, and a effect customization function And a button 5BE for ending the button are displayed.

  FIG. 43 (B) shows an example of a menu screen of the continuous channel notification customization function. In the example of the menu screen shown in FIG. 43 (B), a button 5BF for setting the notification mode of the number of consecutive runs in the continuous chan notification effect to the individual display mode, and a button 5BG for setting the summary display mode. A button 5BH for ending the continuous channel notification customization function is displayed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44 to FIG. 48, an example operation of the battle effect and the like will be described.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the battle effect is performed in response to the control in the positive variation state. In the battle production, first, during the battle production of the miscellaneous fish battle production pattern of a mode in which the player character plays against the enemy character of the miscellaneous fish (half fisher), then the battle with the enemy character of the boss is performed as a special production. The middle effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, according to the number of consecutive moves, the in-game effect of the miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern ends, and the timing of transitioning to the in- battle effect with the enemy character of the boss as the special effect differs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the number of consecutive changes is 5 or less, the variable display for 10 times is performed corresponding to the probability change remaining number becoming 10 times, As a special effect, an effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the number of consecutive changes is six or more and ten or less, the variable display for five times is performed corresponding to the probability change remaining number becoming five times, As a special effect, an effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 44C and 44D, when the number of consecutive changes is 11 or more, the variable display for 3 times is performed corresponding to the probability change remaining number becoming 3 times. As a special effect, an effect during a battle with the enemy character of the boss is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the special effect is performed as the number of consecutive times is reduced by varying the timing at which the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is performed as the special effect according to the number of consecutive times. Since the chance of the variable display result becoming a "big hit" at an early timing during the probability change control corresponding to the possible period is increased, it is possible to give the player an impression of winning the enemy character of the boss at an early timing. Further, as the number of times of continuous shooting increases, the period in which the special effect can be performed becomes shorter, so it is possible to give the player an impression that it is difficult to win against the enemy character of the boss.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a battle with the enemy character of the boss as a special effect is performed according to the number of consecutive changes and the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of “second big hit” among the number of consecutive shots. The middle stage is different. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), FIGS. 45 (A1), and (A2), when the number of consecutive churns is five or less, the jackpot gaming state of the jackpot type “second jackpot” Regardless of the number of times controlled, the special effects are performed during the battle of the small boss battle effect pattern in such a manner that the own character CHZ plays against the enemy character CHB of the small boss (boy). Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), FIG. 45 (B1) and (B2), when the number of consecutive churns is 6 or more and 10 or less, the big hit gaming state of the big hit type “second big hit” Regardless of the number of times the game is controlled to, as a special effect, during the battle production of the middle boss battle effect pattern in a manner such that the own character CHZ to play against the middle boss (old man) enemy character CHC. In addition, as shown in FIG. 44C, FIGS. 45C1 and C2, less than 5 times in which the number of consecutive churns is 11 or more and the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of “second big hit” In this case, as a special effect, an effect during battle of a large boss battle effect pattern is executed such that the own character CHZ plays against the enemy character CHD of the large boss (monster). Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), FIG. 45 (D1), and (D2), the number of consecutive chases is 11 or more, and the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of “second jackpot” five times or more In this case, as a special effect, an effect during battle of the boss boss battle effect pattern is executed such that the own character CHZ plays against the enemy character CHE of the boss boss (black).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, among the number of consecutive chants and the number of consecutive chases, according to the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of “second big hit”, with the enemy character of the boss as a special effect By making the production mode of the production during battle different, the special production is not monotonous and the interest can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, in the case where control is performed in the positive variation state, a character for notifying the remaining number in the positive variation remaining number display area 5Z provided on the screen of the image display device 5 The display operation control for displaying is performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, an image which can specify the number of times of run in the run notification information image display area 5A provided on the screen of the image display device 5 as the run warning information effect or The display operation control is performed to display numerical information on the cumulative number of winning balls.

  45 (A1), (B1), (C1), and (D1) show display operation examples of the continuous chan alert effect of the individual display mode. For example, to describe the display operation example shown in FIG. 45 (A1) as a representative, it is specified that the number of times the jackpot type is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of "first jackpot" among the number of consecutive chants is two times. The numerical information "1800 pt" concerning the accumulated number of prize balls acquired in the big hit gaming state of the "first big hit" is displayed together with the image "☆ × 2" to be obtained, and the big hit type of the second hit is "second big hit" The numerical information "2400 pt" concerning the accumulated winning balls number acquired in the big hit gaming state of the "second big hit" is displayed together with the image "★ x 1" which can specify that the number of times controlled to the gaming state is one. ing.

  By doing this, it is possible to make it possible to recognize for each jackpot type the cumulative number of winning prizes obtained during consecutive runs. In addition, it is possible to associate the number of consecutive chan- nels with the special effects, and to be aware of the number of consecutive chan- nels.

  45 (A2), (B2), (C2) and (D2) show display operation examples of the continuous chan alert effect of the summary display mode. For example, to describe the display operation example shown in FIG. 45 (A2) as a representative, the jackpot gaming state in the consecutive chan with the image "image imitating a crown x 3" which can specify that the number of consecutive churns is three. Information "4200 pt" concerning the accumulated winning number acquired in is displayed.

  By doing this, the area in which the image or numerical information is displayed can be made smaller in the continuous chan notification effect image display area 5A, compared with the continuous chan notification effect of the individual display mode, and the other effect display can be performed. It is possible to report the number of consecutive churns and the number of accumulated winning balls without lowering the visibility.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 44A to 44D, the boss from the variable display 4 times before the variable display in which the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is started as the special effect. It is possible to perform advance notice production.

  FIG. 46 shows an example of the effect operation in the case where the boss advance notification effect is executed when the number of consecutive vibrations is five or less.

  If the number of consecutive changes is five or less, as shown in FIG. 46A, after the variable display having the probability change residual count of 15 is performed, the variable display having the probability change residual count of 14 is performed. In response to the event, the boss notice effect can be executed.

  In this example of the rendering operation, an example is shown in which the boss advance notice effect is executed over the period from the variable display in which the probability variation residual number is 14 times to the variable display in which the probability variation residual number is 11 times. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the boss notice effect of boss notice effect pattern YP1 is executed corresponding to the variable display where the probability variation residual number is 14 times, and is shown in FIG. 46 (C). Thus, in response to the variable display in which the probability of remaining variable number is 13 times, the boss notification effect of the boss informing effect pattern YP2 is executed, and as shown in FIG. In response to the display, the boss notice effect of the boss notice effect pattern YP3 is executed, and as shown in FIG. 46 (E), the boss notice effect pattern YP4 of the boss notice effect pattern YP4 corresponding to the variable display having 11 times of probability variation remaining number. Boss notice effect is being performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 46F, in response to the variable display in which the probability variation residual count is 10 times, the special effect is transferred to an effect during battle with the enemy character CHB of the small boss (boy).

  As in this production operation example, as the number of variable displays before transitioning to a staging effect with a small boss (boy) enemy character CHB as a special staging decreases, it is gradually stronger that the special representation is executed Noticing a notice with a nuance can not only inform the player that a special effect is to be executed, but also can improve the interest for the special effect.

  FIG. 47 shows that the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control at the start of the battle effect with the enemy character CHB of the small boss (boy) executed as a special effect when the number of consecutive vibrations is 5 or less An example of rendering operation in the case where a special drawing game to be a "big hit" is stored on hold is shown. FIG. 48 shows that, at the start of a battle effect with a small boss (boy) enemy character CHB to be executed as a special effect when there are no more than 5 consecutive changes, the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control is A variable that may be executed during probability change control while a special figure game to be a "big hit" has not been reserved and stored, but a battle effect with a small boss (boy) enemy character CHB is being executed as a special effect The presentation operation example in case the special drawing game by which a display result becomes a "big hit" is pending-stored is shown.

  47 and 48, the enemy character of the boss is executed as a special effect according to the timing when the special view game for which the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control is a "big hit" is stored on hold. It demonstrates that the production | presentation aspect of battle production of is different. In FIG. 47 and FIG. 48, among the circles indicating the pending storage display displayed in the start winning storage display area 5H, the pending display of the special figure game in which the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control is "big hit" Hatching is applied to the circle indicating the display.

  The variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control is "big hit" at the start of the battle effect with the enemy character CHB of the small boss (boy) to be executed as a special effect when the number of consecutive changes is 5 or less. When the special figure game to be stored is on hold, according to the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37A, which is referred to in the process of step S147 in the effect variation setting process shown in FIG. If the display result is "loss", the small boss battle rendition dominant pattern B2 is determined at a higher rate than the proportion determined to the small boss battle retribution inferiority pattern B1.

  As a result, in the special effect executed corresponding to the variable display in which the variable display result is “losing”, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), rather than the effect of the aspect in which the shape of the own character CHZ is disadvantageous. As a result of the effects of the aspect in which the self character CHZ is advantageous as shown in FIGS. 47 (A) and (C) is frequently executed, the variable display result is “big hit as shown in FIG. 47 (D) In response to the variable display of “”, an effect is executed such that the player character CHZ wins. In FIGS. 47 (C) to 47 (D), in the battle effect of the battle effect victory pattern, an effect in which the own character CHZ finally wins is executed, but as an aspect of the battle until it is won An example is shown in which an effect of an aspect in which the self character CHZ is advantageous is executed.

  As in this production operation example, the special display in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control becomes "big hit" at an early stage of the period during which the battle production with the enemy character of the boss is executed as the special production. When the game is on hold, as an effect of the aspect in which the character of the own character CHZ becomes advantageous is frequently executed, an effect of an aspect in which the own character wins is executed, It is possible to give the player an impression that the character CHZ wins well.

  On the other hand, at the start of the battle effect with the enemy character CHB of the small boss (boy) to be executed as a special effect when the number of consecutive churns is 5 times or less, the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control is “big hit If the special view game to be “is not stored on hold, the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37A is referred to in the process of step S 147 in the probability change effect setting process shown in FIG. For example, if the variable display result is "losing", the small boss battle staging inferiority pattern B1 is determined at a rate higher than the percentage determined for the small boss battle directing superiority pattern B2.

  As a result, in the special effect executed corresponding to the variable display in which the variable display result is “losing”, the form of the own character CHZ becomes disadvantageous as shown in FIGS. 48 (A) and (B). The production is performed frequently.

  Then, while the battle effect with the enemy character CHB of the small boss (boy) is being executed as the special effect, the special drawing game in which the variable display result that can be executed during the probability change control is “big hit” is stored on hold In this case, according to the battle effect determination first table 201 shown in FIG. 37A, which is referred to in the process of step S147 in the probability variation effect setting process shown in FIG. The small boss battle rendition dominant pattern B2 is determined at a rate higher than the proportion determined for the small boss battle rendition inferiority pattern B1.

  As a result, in the special effect executed in response to the variable display in which the variable display result is “losing”, the form of the own character CHZ becomes disadvantageous as shown in FIGS. 48 (D) and (E). As shown in FIG. 48 (H), as a result of the execution of an aspect in which the self character CHZ has an advantage as shown in FIGS. 48 (C), (F) and (G) is executed more frequently than the effect. Then, in response to the variable display in which the variable display result is a "big hit", an effect is executed such that the own character CHZ wins. In FIGS. 48 (G) to 48 (H), in the battle effect of the battle effect victory pattern, an effect in which the own character CHZ finally wins is executed, but as an aspect of the battle until it is won An example is shown in which an effect of an aspect in which the self character CHZ is advantageous is executed.

  As in this production operation example, the special display in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control becomes "big hit" at a late stage of the period during which the battle production with the enemy character of the boss is executed as the special production. When a game is stored on hold, as an effect of an aspect in which the character of the own character CHZ becomes disadvantageous is frequently executed, an effect of an aspect in which the own character CHZ wins is executed. The player can be given an impression that the character struggles and wins.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and some of the technical features described in the above embodiment can be solved so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a configuration.

  (Modification 1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to a definite change state in which probability change control is performed after the big hit gaming state based on the change display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol becoming "big hit" is finished It is not limited to the thing of game nature.

  Next, the playability of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification will be described based on FIG.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example, a first ordinary winning ball device capable of winning a game ball hit in the left gaming area and an ordinary prize winning a game ball hit in the right gaming region can be won It is assumed that a ball device is provided.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example is provided with a passing gate through which the game ball hit in the right game area can pass and a normal variable winning ball device in which the game ball hit in the right game area can win It shall be. And, above the second ordinary winning ball device, the passing gate and the ordinary variable winning ball device, a sorting device for distributing the gaming ball to the second ordinary winning ball device and the passing gate and the ordinary variable winning ball device Shall be provided.

  Further, it is assumed that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modified example is provided with a special variable winning ball device capable of winning a game ball hit in the right game area. Then, in the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device, the first count switch for detecting the gaming ball by passing the gaming ball, and the point after the gaming ball having passed the first count switch flowed down It is assumed that a second count switch for detecting game balls by passing the game balls is provided on one of the branch roads.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification, a countdown display device is provided above the image display device 5. As an example, the countdown display device is composed of 7 segments, LEDs of dot matrix, etc., and in the high base state described later, the remaining from the start of variable display of the first special symbol to the high base end effect start timing The period can be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification, first, in the low base state, the first starting winning opening formed in the first ordinary winning ball device by striking the gaming ball in the left gaming area The variable display of the first special symbol is executed by winning a. In the low base state, variable display of the first effect pattern corresponding to the first special symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. When the variable display result is "losing" in the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol and the first effect symbol is repeated by further winning the game ball in the first start winning opening. To be executed.

  And, when it becomes "big hit" as a variable display result of the first special symbol, and the big hit type of "big hit" is "big hit A", the high base control is started after the big hit game is over and rushes into the chance time Do. On the other hand, when the jackpot type of the "big hit" is "big hit B" as the variable display result of the first special symbol, and the big hit type of "big hit" is "big hit B", the gaming state is controlled to the low base state again after the big hit game The variable display of the first special symbol is executed by winning the gaming ball in the first starting winning opening.

  The chance time is a period in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed once with a variation pattern with a longer special pattern variation time than when the gaming state is in the low base state, and the gaming state is in the high base state It refers to the period from being controlled to the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

  In the high base state, the game ball is launched to the right game area. At this time, part of the game balls hit in the right game area is distributed to the second ordinary winning ball device side, the passing gate, and the normal variable winning ball device side by entering the allocating device. In this case, the first special view reserve memory is generated by the game ball entering the second ordinary winning ball device at this time, so the first special figure reserve memory is controlled to the high base state in the state of 0 Even if there is, the variable display of the first special symbol can be performed.

  Then, when the game ball passes through the pass gate, the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. In the high base state, variable display of the second effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is executed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the image display device 5. When the variable display result is "losing" in the variable display of the normal symbol, the game ball passes through the passage gate to repeat the variable display of the normal symbol and the second effect symbol.

  In the case of "hit" as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the game ball is in a state where the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device. Then, when a part of the game balls distributed to the passing gate and the normally variable winning ball device side by the distribution device wins the second start winning opening, the second special view reserve storage occurs.

  After one variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state ends, the gaming state is controlled to the low base state. Then, if the number of second special symbol holding memories generated during the chance time is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed by striking out the gaming ball on the left gaming area again. In addition, when the number of 2nd special view reservation memories generated during the chance time is 1 or more, the variable display of the 2nd special symbols for the 2nd special view reserve storage numbers generated during the chance time is executed and the big hit Plunge into the rush zone to repeat the game.

  Specifically, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C", the big hit game of big hit C is executed. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the variable display result is "small hit", the opening of the big winning opening is repeated as a small hit game. When the game ball is detected by the second count switch by hitting the game ball in the right game area while the big winning opening is open, a big hit game according to the small hit type is executed.

  Since the big hit C to big hit E is always controlled to the high base state after the big hit game is over, if the number of the second special view reservation memory number is 0 after the big hit game is over, the chance time is entered again. Thereafter, when the second special map reserve storage number occurs during the chance time, the chance time and the rush zone are repeatedly executed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 50 (A) and FIG. 50 (B), the big hit A, big hit C, big hit D, and big hit E is controlled to the high base state with the first special view reservation memory at the end of the big hit game. If it is, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol is started in the lower left part of the image display device 5, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The display of the initial stop symbol is started. Furthermore, in the countdown display device, the countdown to the high base end time effect start timing according to the special figure fluctuation time of the first special symbol is started.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 52C and FIG. 52D, the big hit A, big hit C, big hit D, and big hit E at the end of the big hit game is controlled to the high base state without the first special view reserve memory. If it is, the stop symbol of the first effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol is displayed in the lower left part of the image display device 5, and the second effect symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The display of the initial stop symbol is started. Moreover, the display to the effect that variable display of the 1st special symbol in the high base state is not started yet is started on the image display device 5, and blinks all segments as a 1st special symbol variation start waiting effect in the countdown display device. Is executed.

  When the game ball enters the first start winning opening after being controlled to the high base state without the first special symbol holding memory as described above, as shown in FIG. 50 (E), the image display device In the lower left portion of 5, the variable display of the first effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol is started, and the display that the variable display of the first special symbol in the high base state is not started yet is ended. Then, the countdown to the high base end time effect start timing according to the special figure fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the countdown display device is started.

  (Modification 2) In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the modification 1, the special rendition and the continuous churn notification effect as in the above embodiment are executed over a partial period such as the last 120 seconds of the chance time. You may do so. In that case, special effects in different modes may be made executable according to the number of times the "big hit" of the big hit type is made to enter the chance time by starting high base control after the end of the big hit game. As a result, even in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the gaming nature as in the first modification, the special effects are not monotonous and the interest can be improved.

  (Modification 3) The production mode of the special production in the battle production is not limited to the one determined in accordance with the probability variation variation count value, the variable display result, the variation pattern, and the probability variation middle pending inner jackpot determination. For example, when the special view game in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the probability change control is "big hit" is on hold storage, it is determined whether or not the special effect is being executed, and the special effect is executed. If it is medium, the number of times of execution of the variable display until the variable display result becomes “big hit” may be calculated, and the effect mode of the special effect may be made different according to the calculated number of times of execution. In that case, for example, as the calculated number of times of execution is smaller, the effect of the aspect in which the character of the own character becomes advantageous is frequently executed, and the effect of the aspect in which the own character wins is executed and calculated. As the number of executions increases, the effect of the aspect in which the character of the own character becomes disadvantageous is frequently executed, and as a result, the effect of the aspect in which the own character wins may be executed.

  (Modification 4) In the above embodiment, when the variable display result is "big hit" during the period during the battle effect of the miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern, the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss as a special effect Was described as not being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and, for example, when a special drawing game in which the variable display result of the variable display that can be executed during the execution period of the battle effect of the miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern is "big hit" In order to avoid the special effects during the battle with the miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern, the special effects may be transferred to effects during battle with the enemy character of the boss. As a result, not only the execution frequency of the special effect increases, but also the timing at which the special effect is performed can be made to have unexpectedness. In addition, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation for the special rendering to be performed, and to improve the interest.

  (Modification 5) In the above embodiment, after the boss advance notice effect is executed during the execution of the miscellaneous fish battle effect pattern during the battle, the effect during the battle with the boss enemy character is always executed as the special effect. explained. However, in the battle effect which is the effect during the definite change, the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss may not be executed as the special effect. In that case, even when the effect during the battle with the enemy character of the boss is not executed as the special effect, the boss advance notice effect which is a gap may be executed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of special effects and boss advance effects.

  (Modification 6) In the above embodiment, when displaying the numerical information on the cumulative winnings number, for example, in the normal mode such as "black", when the cumulative winnings number is equal to or more than the specific number, for example It may be displayed in a specific mode such as "golden". In that case, it may be possible to display in the specific mode only the display of the cumulative number of prize balls in the continuous channel notification effect of the summary display mode, or the cumulative number of balls corresponding to a specific jackpot type in the continuous channel notification effect of the individual display mode It may be possible to display in a specific manner only for the display of. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  (Modification 7) In the above-mentioned embodiment, for example, during the execution of the specific effect with a relatively high effect, such as the reach effect of the super reach, the continuous chan alert effect may not be performed. Here, specific effects with high effect effects include, for example, effects with a high proportion of being controlled to a big hit gaming state when the effects are executed, that is, effects with a high hit probability and the like. In addition, even while the specific effect is being executed, when executing the continuous chan alert effect, the continuous chan alert effect image display area 5A is made smaller or the continuous chan alert effect is displayed in a semitransparent manner. By lowering the visibility of the informing effect, the visibility of the specific effect may not be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

  (Modification 8) In the above-described embodiment, when recovery is performed after a power failure or the like occurs while in a definite change state, the continuous channel notification effect may not be performed. Alternatively, even when recovery is performed after a power failure or the like occurs while in a definite change state, when performing continuous chan alerting effect, it is performed in a special mode that can not specify the continuous chan number or cumulative award ball number You should do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent false display of the number of consecutive churns and the number of accumulated winning balls due to the restoration of the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the definite variation state.

  (Modification 9) In the embodiment described above, the over winning can be suitably detected on the main substrate 11 side, and the accumulated winning number of balls is also paid out as a winning ball in response to the over winning. It has been described that the value corresponding to the number of balls is displayed. However, the number of gaming balls counted as the cumulative winning balls is not limited to this. For example, the value displayed as the cumulative number of winning balls may not include the number of gaming balls paid out as the winning balls in response to the over winning. As a result, the present invention can be applied to a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not detect over winning. Alternatively, the cumulative number of winning balls may be displayed so as to be separately recognizable as the number of gaming balls paid out as winning balls in response to over winning. This can enhance the feeling of exhilaration.

  (Modification 10) In the above embodiment, a value corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls is determined as the cumulative winning ball number based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 It explained as what to display. However, the number of gaming balls counted as the cumulative winning balls is not limited to this. For example, the value displayed as the number of accumulated winning balls is a value corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be paid out as winning balls based on the fact that the gaming ball that has passed through the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 The value corresponding to the number of gaming balls to be paid out as the winning balls may be added based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed through the winning opening is detected by the predetermined general winning ball switch. In that case, the cumulative number of winning balls for winning in the special winning opening and the cumulative number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening may be displayed so as to be separately recognizable. In addition, the number of winning balls for winning in the general winning opening that occurred in the definite variation state may be included. This can enhance the feeling of exhilaration.

  (Modification 11) In the above embodiment, the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the "first big hit" among the number of consecutive shots as the continuous chan alert effect of the individual display mode, and the "first big hit" Cumulative number of balls won in the big hit gaming state, the number of times the big hit type is controlled to the big hit gaming state of the "second big hit", and the cumulative number of winning balls obtained in the big hit gaming state of the "second big hit" In the above, it has been described that the player individually and separately displays them. However, the individual display mode of the continuous chan alert effect is not limited to this. For example, every time the jackpot gaming state is controlled, numerical information on the accumulated number of winning balls acquired in the jackpot gaming state may be displayed together with an image capable of specifying the jackpot type. In that case, the continuous warning notification effect of the individual display mode in the above embodiment may be regarded as the continuous change notification effect of the summary display mode. As a result, it is possible to grasp the cumulative number of winning balls obtained for each big hit gaming state.

  (Modification 12) In an embodiment such as modification 11, each time the number of times the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled during the consecutive chases reaches a specific number, a specific number of images corresponding to the specific number of jackpot gaming states May be displayed together in one image. As a result, as the number of consecutive shots increases, it is possible to suppress the visibility of other effects from being significantly impaired.

  (Modification 13) In the embodiment described above, it is assumed that an image capable of specifying the number of consecutive passages and numerical information on the cumulative number of winning balls obtained during the consecutive passages are displayed side by side in the consecutive chan alert effect. did. However, the display mode of the continuous chan alert effect is not limited to this. For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a first area in which an image capable of specifying the number of consecutive runs is displayed, and a second area in which numerical information on the cumulative number of winning balls obtained during the series are displayed It may be separated. In that case, in the continuous display of the individual display mode, among the images displayed in the first area, which image corresponds to which big hit type and the numerical value displayed in the second area It is sufficient for the player to be displayed so as to be able to recognize which numerical information among the information corresponds to which jackpot type. In addition, if the image display device on which a plurality of image display devices are provided and an image capable of specifying the number of consecutive breaks is displayed is different from the image display device on which numerical information on the cumulative award ball number acquired during the consecutive passages is displayed. You may Thereby, in view of the display position and display mode of other effects, it is possible to execute the continuous chan alert effect at a suitable position that does not impair the visibility of the other effects.

  (Modification 14) In the above embodiment, in the variable display start waiting process of step S170 shown in FIG. 30, in other words, the effect customization function can be executed in a period when the variable display of the decorative symbol is not executed. It explained as a thing. However, the executable timing of the presentation customization is not limited to this. For example, the effect customization function can be executed at a predetermined timing such as during variable display, during execution of fanfare effect, or during ending effect. In that case, depending on the timing at which the presentation customization function is executed, the executable individual customization functions may be made different. For example, since the continuous change notification effect is executed in the definite change state, when the effect customization function is executed during the ending effect or in the positive change condition, the effect mode of the continuous change notification effect can be customized. do it. In that case, the effect customization function is executed in response to the detection of an operation on a predetermined operation means such as the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B only while the display is in the positive change state or during the variable display. You may As a result, when different effects are executed according to the number of consecutive breaks in the definite change state, the continuous change notification if the visibility of the effects in the positive change state is not impaired or if the visibility may be impaired If the aspect of the effect is set to the individual display mode and the visibility of the effect in the definite variation state is impaired, or if it is not desired to impair the visibility of the effect in the definite variation state, the mode of continuous chan alert effect is summarized According to other effects, such as setting to, it is possible to customize the effects at suitable timing.

  (Modification 15) In the above embodiment, by executing the effect customization function, it has been described that the effect mode of the continuous chan alert effect can be set to either "individual display" or "collective display". . However, the effect mode of the continuous chan alert effect that can be set by the effect customization function is not limited to this. For example, a setting may be made to hide the continuous channel notification effect. As a result, it is possible not only to cope with a player who does not need notification of the number of consecutive moves or the cumulative number of award balls, but also to prevent the visibility of other effects from being disturbed.

  In the above embodiment, the special figure game using the first special figure is executed based on the detection of the gaming ball having passed through the first start winning opening, and the first based on the detection of the gaming ball having passed through the second starting winning opening. 2 The special drawing game using the special drawing has been described as being executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special figure game using a common special symbol is executed regardless of which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball passes through. It may be.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, CPU120 for presentation control of the presentation control board 12 demonstrated as what determines the control content of various presentation operation | movement. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a plurality of CPUs or the like mounted respectively on a plurality of control boards provided to control a rendering operation share control contents of various rendering operations and determine them. You may

  In the above embodiment, one fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted when the fluctuation is started, in order to notify the CPU for effect control 120 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode such as the fluctuation time and the type of reach effect. The variation pattern may be notified to the CPU 120 for effect control by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 100 for game control indicates the fluctuation time or fluctuation mode before reaching the reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo ream, presence or absence of slip effect, in the first command. The command may be transmitted, and the second command may transmit a command indicating a fluctuation time or fluctuation mode after reaching the reach, such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 may perform effect control in the variable display based on the change time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control CPU 120 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending the first command, send the second command after a predetermined period has elapsed. You may do so. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. In this way, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

  In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 which emits the game ball to be the game medium to the game area and variably displays the special symbol or the decorative symbol, the predetermined image of the different aspect according to the aspect after the change of the movable member. The configuration and the like that can execute the predetermined effect to be displayed has been described as being provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration or function characterizing the present invention can be applied to other gaming machines such as slot machines.

  In addition, the device configuration and data configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the processing shown in the flowchart, and various rendering operations including the display operation of the rendering image in the display area of the image display device 5 deviate from the spirit of the present invention. As long as it does not, it is possible to change and modify arbitrarily. In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of winning balls in response to detection of winning balls, but encloses the gaming balls and responds to detection of winning balls It can apply also to the enclosed type game machine which gives a score.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

  Further, in the above embodiment, “the proportions are different” is not limited to the ones having different proportions such as A: B = 70%: 30% and A: B = 30%: 70%, but It is a concept that also includes different proportions such as B: 100%: 0%.

  Also, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine is shown to be controlled to a definite change state after the end of the big hit game, based on the fact that there is a definite variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit classification and a definite variation big hit as a big hit classification. It is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, the game machine has a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined random variable area provided therein, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed through the random variable area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game. The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a definite change state after completion.

  In the above embodiment, for example, the case of variably displaying a plurality of types of special symbols or decorative symbols of “1” to “8” and deriving and displaying the display result is shown, but the variable display is such an aspect It is not limited. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived need not necessarily be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

  The random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  In the above embodiment, the main substrate 11 stores the determination table for the random number value, and the main substrate 11 determines the random number value determination table based on the random number value extracted in the main substrate 11 at the start winning prize. Although the random number value determination process is executed with reference to it, the effect control board 12 receives the determination result determined in the main board 11 and executes the pre-reading advance notice effect based on the received determination result. The implementation mode of the pre-reading advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the table for determination of the random number is stored in the effect control board 12, and the effect control board 12 receives the random number itself extracted in the main board 11 from the main board 11, and based on the received random number The random number value determination process may be executed with reference to the random number value determination table, and the prefetching notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 12. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12. For example, the effect control board 12 may receive a part of random number values and execute the determination process of the random number values, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 11. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 12 receives a random number value and performs determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and when it is a big hit, performs determination of the type of big hit, and based on the random value, the main board 11 The determination result of the variation pattern type determined in step S may be received. That is, the effect control board 12 can execute the advance reading notice effect based on the determination result determined by itself and the determination result determined by the main substrate 11.

  In the above embodiment, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. explained. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an interrupt request for receiving the effect control command may be generated in response to an interrupt request due to the first bit of serial communication.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs variable display (for example, variable display of special symbol or decorative symbol) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. And a gaming machine (eg, such as a probability change state, chance time, etc.) that can be controlled to a special state (eg, probability change state, chance time, etc.) that is more advantageous than the normal state (eg, low probability low base state etc.) Pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like), when the gaming state is a special state, display means (for example, effect control CPU 120 can display the specific image that can be specified about the number of times controlled to the advantageous state) Specify the number of images that can be specified for the number of times the "first big hit" was controlled to the big hit gaming state "☆ × number of times", and the number of times the big hit type was controlled to the big hit gaming state of "2nd big hit" An image that simulates a crown that can be identified for the number of times the big hit gaming state has been controlled regardless of whether the obtained image is “★ × number of times” or the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit” And the like), and the display means can display numerical information on the game value obtained in the advantageous state along with the specific image corresponding to the Numeric information "○○○○ pt" is displayed along with the number of times the jackpot gaming state has been controlled, etc.). This makes it possible to grasp not only the number of times controlled to the advantageous state but also the game value obtained corresponding to the advantageous state.

  The display means can display numerical information on the game value in a specific manner when the game value is equal to or more than the specific number (for example, in displaying the numerical information on the cumulative award ball number, it is usually "black", for example) In the normal mode, when the cumulative number of winning balls is equal to or more than the specific number, for example, it may be displayed in a specific mode such as "gold". This makes it possible to improve the player's interest.

  Accumulating means that accumulates game value until predetermined end conditions are satisfied (for example, counting the number of game balls paid out as prize balls in all the big hit gaming states controlled during consecutive chans, etc. The display unit may be capable of displaying numerical information on the game value accumulated by the accumulation unit (for example, executing a continuous channel notification effect in a summary display mode). This can give the player a feeling of excitement.

  The display means can display one specific image which can be identified regardless of the type of the advantageous state about the number of times controlled to the advantageous state (for example, whether the jackpot type is "first jackpot" or "second jackpot" It is also possible to display an image “image imitating a crown × number of times” which can be specified for the number of times of being controlled to the big hit gaming state regardless of whether or not “). As a result, the number of times controlled in the advantageous state can be displayed in a recognizable manner without disturbing the display other than the specific image.

  The receiving unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120 receives the selection of the player as to whether the display mode of the specific image is a mode of displaying a plurality of types of specific images or a mode of displaying one specific image. As the effect customization function, it is further possible to set whether it is possible to set the continuous-chann notification effect mode as the individual display mode or the summary display mode, etc.), and the display means corresponds to the mode accepted by the accepting means It is also possible to display a specific image (for example, processing in accordance with the value of the consecutive chan notification flag is executed in the consecutive chan notification effect setting process shown in FIG. 35). Thereby, the specific image can be displayed in a mode according to the player's preference.

  The specific effect execution means for executing the specific effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a relatively high effect such as a reach effect of super reach, etc.), and the display means has the specific effect Limiting the display of specific images in response to being executed (for example, during execution of a specific effect with a relatively high rendering effect such as a reach effect of super reach, a continuous channel notification effect may not be performed or Even when the specific effect is being executed, when the continuous channel notification effect is executed, the continuous channel notification effect image display area 5A may be made smaller, or the continuous channel notification effect may be displayed semi-transparently, etc.) It is also good. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the effect of the specific effect from being reduced.

  The display means is capable of restricting the display of the specific image when the power of the gaming machine is restored when the gaming state is the special state (for example, when it is restored after a power failure or the like occurs in the probability change state) Even if recovery is performed after a power failure or the like occurs when continuous chan alert effect is not performed or if continuous chan alert effect is performed, specify the number of consecutive chan or accumulative prize ball number It may be made to carry out in the special mode which can not be obtained. As a result, a false display is made about the number of times controlled in the advantageous state and the gaming value obtained in the advantageous state due to restoration of the power of the gaming machine when the gaming state is the special state. Can be prevented.

  The present invention is not limited to the one described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions within the scope of the present invention in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

  In addition, all or a part of the configurations shown in the embodiment and the modifications described above, and the configurations shown in the later-described form examples and the modifications may be arbitrarily combined.

  It should be understood that the above-described embodiment disclosed this time and the form described below are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description and the following description but by the claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

  As the gaming machine of the present invention, other variable display (for example, variable display of special symbol or decorative symbol etc.) can be performed, and control can be made to an advantageous state (for example, big hit gaming state etc.) advantageous to the player. A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine) that can control the gaming state after the end of the advantageous state to a special state (e.g., a probability change state, a chance time, etc.) more advantageous than a normal state (e.g., a low probability low base state). A display unit (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can display a specific image that can be specified for the number of times controlled to the advantageous state when the gaming state is the special state). Specify the number of images controlled by the number of times the type was controlled to the big hit gaming state "first big hit" ☆ "number of times the big hit", and the number of times the big hit type was controlled to the big hit gaming state of "second big hit" An image that simulates a crown that can be identified for the number of times the big hit gaming state has been controlled regardless of whether the obtained image is “★ × number of times” or the big hit type is “first big hit” or “second big hit” And the like), and the display means can display numerical information on the game value obtained in the advantageous state together with a specific image corresponding to the advantageous state (eg, cumulative prize ball) Numeric information "○○○○ pt" related to the number is displayed along with the number of times the jackpot gaming state is controlled, etc.), and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera, etc., and a specific display corresponding to the detection means (for example, small buttons (white) shown in FIGS. 75 and 82 to 88 Specific display execution means for performing 901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. (For example, button development effect processing (S90529), effect processing during variable display (S90172), etc.), and the specific display execution means performs the first specific display (for example, small button (white) as the specific display. D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 57) expectation, usually big hit and probability variation big hit if there is a big hit Second specific display with a high degree of expectation (for example, when the first specific display is a small button (white) D901, the second specific display is a large button (White) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, stick D904, etc., the first When the specific display is the large button (red) D 903, the second specific display can display the stick D 904 or the like, and the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). In ~ T11, etc., after displaying the first specific display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, a small button (white) D 901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 82C). Later, the small button (white) D901 is changed to a large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 83 (G), and the large button (white) D902 is further shown as a large button (red) as shown in FIG. ) And the second specific display (for example, FIG. 83 (J) or the diagram after the change) in the effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88). As shown in 83 (K), an operation effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (K)), an operation is prompted using a large button (red) D 903 or a large button (red) D 903 U, etc. As shown, there is a gaming machine in which an effect of notifying the result is executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp not only the number of times controlled to the advantageous state but also the game value obtained corresponding to the advantageous state. Also, the rendering effect is improved.

  Further, in the above-described gaming machine, a relationship may be given to the displayed numerical information or the specific image, and the specific display or the operation effect. For example, the display mode of the first specific display or the second specific display may be different depending on the displayed numerical information or the content of the specific image, or the first specific display or the second specific display may be displayed. Rate may be different. According to such a configuration, attention can be given to numerical information and a specific image, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, not only the number of times controlled to the advantageous state, but also the game value obtained corresponding to the advantageous state can be grasped, and a game is played as an example of the form of the gaming machine in which the rendering effect is improved. Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, touch sensor, infrared sensor, camera etc.) And specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button shown in FIG. 75, FIG. (White) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. The button development effect process (S90529), the variable in-display effect process (S90172), etc.), and the specific display execution means performs the first specific display (eg, small button (white) D901 etc.) as the specific display. The player's degree of advantage over the first specific display (for example, an expectation for a big hit expectation, an expectation for a 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 57), an expectation for a probability variation big hit when there is a normal big hit and a definite variation big hit) The second specific display is a large specific button (white) D902, a large specific button (red) D903, a stick D904, etc. When the specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display is the large button (red) D903. In this case, the second specific display can display the stick D904 or the like, and the first specific display can be performed during the ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). After the display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 82C), the small button (white) D901 is displayed. The large button (white) D 902 is changed as shown in 83 (G), and the large button (white) D 902 is changed as shown in FIG. 83 (I) to the large button (red) D 903) In the effective period of detection (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88), the second specific display after change (eg, as shown in FIG. 83 (J) or FIG. 83 (K) Button (red) D 903 or A motion effect using large button (red) D903U or the like (for example, an effect of prompting an operation as shown in FIG. 83 (K) and notifying a result as shown in FIG. 83 (L)) is executed A game machine is mentioned. Below, an example of this embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other embodiments)
Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. Note that this other embodiment may be referred to as an "embodiment". FIG. 51 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 901 according to another embodiment, showing a layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 902 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (underframe) 903 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 902. In the game board 902, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a normal winning ball device 906A and a normal variable winning ball device 906B are provided. The regular winning ball device 906A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) which is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normally variable winning ball device 906B has a pair of movable winglets that changes between a normally open state in a vertical position and an enlarged open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 9081 for a normal electric symbol shown in FIG. A tulip type character (normal motorized character) is provided, and a start area (second start area) forms a second start winning opening. When the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as "starting winning opening".

  The gaming ball having passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the regular winning ball device 906A is detected by, for example, a first starting opening switch 9022A shown in FIG. The game ball which has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B is detected by, for example, a second starting opening switch 9022B shown in FIG.

  In addition, the game ball which has passed (entered) a winning opening such as a starting winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) or a large winning opening (described later) is provided corresponding to each winning opening. What is detected by the switches (a first start opening switch 9022A, a second start opening switch 9022B, and a count switch 9023 (described later)) is referred to as "winning". Among the "winning", winning to the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening) is referred to as "starting winning", and in particular, winning to the first starting winning opening is referred to as first starting winning. The winning of the second starting winning opening is referred to as a second starting winning.

  While a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the first start winning (the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 9022A), the first special view reserve memory number (described later ) Is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”), the first special figure game executed on the first special symbol display device 904A (described later) or the decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A first start condition (also referred to as a first execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established.

  A predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the second start winning (the detection of the game ball by the second start opening switch 9022 B), and the second special view reserve memory number (described later) Is a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") or less, a second special figure game (described later) executed on the second special symbol display device 904B or a decorative symbol executed on the image display device 905 (described later) A second start condition (also referred to as a second execution condition) for executing a variable display game such as a variable display of is established. Note that the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the first start winning and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the second starting win may be the same or different from each other. Good.

  The first special view reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the first start winning) that are not executed immediately when the first start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. The occurrence of the first start prize even when the first start condition for executing a variable display game such as a first special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize. If the first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in an execution waiting state). That is, the number of first special view pending storages is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the first start winning that is in the execution waiting state. Each time the first start condition is satisfied, the number of first to-be-stored storages decreases by one.

  In addition, although the 1st starting condition by a certain 1st starting prize is satisfied, the 1st starting condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 1st starting winning is not satisfied Variable indication corresponding to the 1st starting winning concerned Is stored (held) as hold data (first special-image hold information) until a first start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game by the first start winning is satisfied. In other words, the suspended first special-pattern suspension information is digested one by one each time the first start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the digested first-special-pattern suspension information is executed.

  The second special drawing reserve memory number is the number of variable display games (variable display games due to the occurrence of the second start winning) that are not executed immediately when the second start winning occurs and are temporarily suspended. Even if the second start condition for executing a variable display game such as a second special view game (described later) or a variable display of a decorative symbol is satisfied by the occurrence of the second start prize, the second start prize is generated If the second start condition for allowing the start of the variable display game described above is not satisfied (for example, the variable display game based on the first start condition or the second start condition established earlier is being When the gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state), the execution of the variable display game is suspended (the variable display game is in an execution waiting state). In other words, the second special drawing reserve storage number is the number of games of the variable display game due to the occurrence of the second start winning that is in the execution waiting state. The number of second special map reservations is decreased by one each time one second start condition is satisfied.

  In addition, although the 2nd start condition by a certain 2nd start winning is satisfied, the variable display corresponding to the 2nd start winning concerned with which the 2nd start condition which permits the start of the variable display game by the 2nd starting winning combination is not satisfied Is stored (held) as hold data (second special-image hold information) until a second start condition for permitting the start of the variable display game by the second start winning is satisfied. In other words, the held second special-image hold information is digested one by one each time the second start condition is satisfied, and the variable display game based on the second special-character hold information to be digested is executed.

  The number of pending storages obtained by adding the number of first special view pending storages and the number of second special view pending storages is referred to as “total pending storage number”. In the case where the first special map reservation number, the second special image reservation number, and the total reservation number are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “the number of special image reservations” or “the number of reservation memories”. That is, when simply referred to as "the number of special map holding storage" or "the number of holding storage", one or two of the first special drawing holding storage number, the second special drawing holding storage number, and the total holding storage number Or it may refer to three. Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as "start conditions" or "execution conditions". Further, when the first start condition and the second start condition are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “start conditions”. In addition, the first special view hold information and the second special view hold information are also simply referred to as "special view hold information" unless they are distinguished from each other.

  In the lower part of the game area of the game board 902, a special variable winning ball device 907 is provided. The special variable winning ball device 907 forms a big winning opening that changes to a closed state in which the game ball can not pass (enter) and an open state in which the game ball can pass (enter). Specifically, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 has a special winning opening door which is opened and closed by a solenoid 9082 for a special winning opening door shown in FIG. 52, for example, and the state of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door. Change (open, closed).

  As an example, the special variable winning prize ball device 907 closes the special winning opening door when the solenoid 9082 is in the OFF state and closes the special winning opening, and opens the special winning hole door when the solenoid 9082 is in the ON state. The big winning opening is open. The game ball which has passed (entered) the big winning opening in the open state is detected by, for example, a count switch 9023 shown in FIG. That is, by opening the special winning opening, winning to the special winning opening occurs.

  A predetermined number (for example, 12) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the occurrence of the winning on the big winning opening (detection of the game ball by the count switch 9023). The number of prize balls (for example, 12) to be paid out based on the occurrence of the prize in the big prize winning opening is the number of prize balls to be paid out (for example, 3) based on the occurrence of the first start prize, The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the occurrence of (for example, three) is greater. That is, the state of the special winning opening (opened state, closed state) greatly influences whether or not the player has an advantage.

  A first special symbol display device 904A and a second special symbol display device 904B are provided on the right side of the game area in the game board 902. The first special symbol display device 904A is composed of, for example, LEDs (light emitting diodes) of 7 segments or dot matrix. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. The first special symbol display device 904A variably displays (variable display) special symbols (also referred to as "special images") that are plural types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each. The same applies to the second special symbol display device 904B. In addition, the special symbol (special figure) variably displayed in the first special symbol display device 904A is also referred to as "the first special figure" or "special figure 1", and the special symbol variably displayed in the second special symbol display device 904B (Special figure) is also referred to as "second special figure" or "special figure 2". Also, a game to be executed with variable display of identification information (or variable display of identification information itself) is referred to as a variable display game. In particular, a variable display game executed by the first special symbol display device 904A (a variable display game in which the first special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a first special symbol game, and a variable display game executed by the second special symbol display device 904B. (A variable display game in which the second special view is variably displayed) is also referred to as a second special view game. Moreover, when not distinguishing the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game, it is also only called a "special figure game".

  The first special symbol display device 904A (same for the second special symbol display device 904B) is a special figure game, and includes a plurality of types including numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-", etc. The special symbol is displayed variably. Each special symbol is assigned a symbol number corresponding to each.

  A first hold indicator 9025A and a second hold indicator 9025B are provided on the right side of the game area on the game board 902 (the top of the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B) . The first hold indicator 9025A is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the number of first special view hold memories (the number of first special view game holds) based on the hold data (first special view hold information) A first pending display is made to display possible. The second hold indicator 9025B is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and specifies the second special view hold storage number (the number of pending for the second special view game) based on the hold data (second special view hold information) A second pending display is made to display possible.

  When the first hold display and the second hold display are not particularly distinguished from each other, they are also simply referred to as “hold display”. Moreover, the expression "hold display" may refer to the display itself (display by LED) as well as the operation (lighting control of the LED by the first hold indicator 9025A and the second hold indicator 9025B) . For example, the pending display in the case of saying that the pending display is newly added indicates the newly added display itself. The same applies to the "hold display" in the start winning storage display area 905H (described later) and the "active display" (described later) in the active display area AHA '(described later).

  On the left side portion of the game area in the game board 902, a pass gate 9041, a normal symbol display 9020, and a general drawing reserve display 9025C are provided. The gaming ball having passed through the passing gate 9041 is detected by, for example, a gate switch 9021 shown in FIG. If the common drawing reserve memory number (described later) is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) based on the fact that the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021, the normal symbol display 9020 A common drawing start condition for executing a common drawing game (described later) to be executed in is established.

  The normal symbol display 9020 is constituted by LEDs of 7 segments, a dot matrix, etc. in the same manner as the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B. The normal symbol display 9020 variably displays (variable display) an ordinary symbol (also referred to as “common figure” or “ordinary drawing”) which is a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbol. Note that a variable display game in which an ordinary symbol is variably displayed is also referred to as a common drawing game (or “normal drawing game”). In addition, the information regarding the common drawing game in which the common drawing start condition is satisfied but the common drawing start condition (described later) is not satisfied is stored (held) as holding data (general drawing holding information).

  The common drawing hold display 9025C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays, for example, the common drawing hold storage number based on the held data (general drawing hold information) by the number of LEDs to be lit. The common drawing reserve memory number is the number of common drawing games whose execution is temporarily suspended without being executed immediately when the gaming ball having passed the passing gate 9041 is detected by the gate switch 9021. That is, the common drawing reserve memory number is the number of games of the common drawing game which is in the state of waiting for execution. The common drawing reserve storage number decreases by one each time one common drawing start condition is satisfied.

  Near the center of the game area on the game board 902, an image display device 905 is provided. The image display device 905 is formed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images.

  In the display area of the image display device 905, decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C and 905R are arranged. In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, decorative symbols, which are a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each, are variably displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R, the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started in conjunction (correspondence) with the special symbol game, and the finalized decorative symbol (also referred to as the final stop symbol) is stopped and displayed. . The decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905L is also referred to as a left symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905C is referred to as a middle symbol, and the decorative symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol display area 905R is also referred to as a right symbol. The variable display of the decorative design is also included in the variable display game.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, a start winning storage display area 905H is disposed. In the start winning storage display area 905H, a hold display corresponding to the hold information is performed. In the start winning combination storage display area 905H, for example, the hold display may be performed left-justified. That is, when the number of reservations for a special drawing game increases due to the establishment of a new start condition, a new reservation is made so that it is sequentially digested from the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H (closest side of the active display area AHA '). You may add a display. When the number of reservations for a special drawing game decreases due to the establishment of a new start condition, the reservation display (the display from the oldest display) displayed at the left end of the start winning game storage display area 905H is deleted. When there is another hold indication, the other hold indication (each hold indication when there are a plurality of other and hold indications) is shifted to the left.

  Further, in the display area of the image display device 905, an active display area (also referred to as a current display area, an active hold display area, a display time display area, etc.) AHA 'is disposed. In the active display area, an active display (also referred to as a display at the time of digestion, a display this time, etc.) is performed based on elimination of the hold display from the start winning storage display area 905H when the start condition is satisfied. That is, the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H is shifted (shifted) to the active display area AHA 'and the active display is displayed when the start condition is satisfied. Hereinafter, the active indication displayed based on the certain pending indication M being erased may also be referred to as the active indication corresponding to the pending indication M.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, the active display area AHA ′ is disposed on the left side of the start winning storage display area 905H, but the active display area AHA ′ is any of the display areas of the image display device 905. It should just be arrange | positioned in the position of.

  An upper tray and a lower tray are provided at predetermined positions of the gaming machine frame 903 below the gaming area. Attached to the member forming the lower tray is, for example, a stick controller 9031A which can be held and tilted by the player at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). There is. The member forming the upper tray is, for example, a push button 9031 B which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position (for example, above the stick controller 9031 A) on the front side of the upper surface It is provided.

  A sound output member is provided in the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the speakers 908UL and 908UR are installed at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903, and the speakers 908LL and 908LR are installed at the lower left and right lower portions of the upper plate (the lower left and right oblique upper portions). It has been installed. Hereinafter, when the speakers 908UL, 908UR, 908LL, and 908LR are not particularly distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as the speaker 908.

  Inside and around the gaming area of the gaming machine frame 903 are provided movable movable objects (movable bodies) that operate as effects or decorations. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the first position (the initial position shown in FIG. 51) to the second position (the lower position; for example, the position of the front surface of the display area of the image display device 905) at the upper position of the image display device 905. A movable movable object 9017 is provided.

  In the inside and the periphery of the game area of the gaming machine frame 903, light emitting members (light emitters) for emitting light as effects or decorations are provided. In the example shown in FIG. 51, the light emitting member 909 CC is installed on the movable part 9017, and the light emitting member 909 CL and the light emitting member 909 CR are installed on the left and right positions of the image display device 905. A light emitting member 909 SL and a light emitting member 909 SR are installed at the left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 903 U. Hereinafter, the light emitting members 909CC, 909CL, 909CR, 909U, 909SL, and 909SR are simply referred to as lamps 909, unless otherwise distinguished.

  Although the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, and the movable role object 9017 described above are effect devices for executing effects, the game machine 901 is, for example, a device having a vibrating portion, other effects such as a device having a blower portion A device may be provided.

  Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be schematically described.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, based on the fact that the normal drawing start condition is satisfied after the normal drawing start condition is satisfied, the normal drawing game by the normal symbol display device 9020 is started. In the regular game, after starting the variable display of the normal symbol (after starting the variation of the normal symbol), when the predetermined time which becomes the common drawing variation time passes, the determined normal symbol which becomes the variable display result of the normal symbol Stop display (derivative display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (common symbol per symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the determined normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per common symbol (per normal symbol)" It becomes ". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed symbol, for example, a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", the variable display result of the normal symbol is "general symbol lost (normal Design loss)). In response to the variable display result of the normal symbol being "per common figure", the enlargement and release control (tilting control) in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip forming the variable winning ball device 906B is tilted is performed The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, the first special view game is started based on the establishment of the first start condition after the establishment of the first start condition, and the second start condition is established after the formation of the second start condition The second special drawing game is started based on the above. In the special figure game, after the start of the variable display of the special symbol (after the start of the variation of the special symbol), when the variable display time as the special figure fluctuation time passes, the finalized variable result of the special symbol is determined Derivate and display the symbol (special drawing display result). At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol. It is a loss. In addition, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol) different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be a "small hit" as a predetermined display result.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the present embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “3”, “5”, and “7” is a big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the symbol “-” is a lost symbol. Note that different special symbols may be used as big hit symbols in the first special figure game and the second special figure game.

  After the variable display result in the special view game becomes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to the big hit gaming state which is the specific gaming state. The pachinko gaming machine 901 controls the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning prize ball device 907 to the open state in the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state in which the big winning opening is controlled to the open state is an example of the advantageous state advantageous to the player. In addition, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", the pachinko gaming machine 901 is controlled to a small hit gaming state which is a special gaming state different from the big hit gaming state.

  Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 901 determines a round (also referred to as a “round game”) advantageous to the player in the big hit gaming state after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”. Execute the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). The round is the opening cycle of the big winning opening. The pachinko gaming machine 901 changes the state (opened state, closed state) of the special winning opening by opening and closing the special winning opening door of the special variable winning prize ball device 907 in each round (each round). For example, the pachinko game machine 901 opens the big winning opening door at the start of the round, changes the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, maintains the big winning opening in the open state, and then closes the big winning opening door. The big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, and one round is ended. Whether a predetermined winning opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening opens the special winning opening in the round, or a predetermined number (for example, nine) of winnings occur to the special winning opening The open state is maintained until one of the conditions is satisfied.

  The pachinko gaming machine 901 repeatedly executes the round in the big hit gaming state until the number of times of execution of the round reaches a predetermined upper limit number. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, even if the number of round executions has reached the predetermined upper limit number, the execution of the round is performed by the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the game ball does not win at the big winning opening). You may complete the The predetermined upper limit number of times is two types (eight times corresponding to 8R, 16 times corresponding to 16R in this embodiment), but may be one type or three or more types. May be

  In the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R arranged in the display area of the image display device 905, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the start of the special drawing game. In addition, a reach state may be reached in a period from when variable display of the decorative symbol is started to when the variable display is ended by stop display of the finalized decorative symbol. With the reach state, a decorative symbol (also referred to as a "reach variation symbol") that has not been stopped yet is displayed when the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 constitutes part of a big hit combination Is a display state in which the fluctuation continues, or a display state in which all or some of the decorative symbols are fluctuated synchronously while constituting all or a part of the big hit combination. The effect in the reach state is called reach effect.

  As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, depending on the rendering pattern, the possibility that the big hit combination and the like will be finally stopped and displayed after the reach effect may be made different (also referred to as “big hit expectation” or “big hit reliability”).

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree by a certain production is, for example, (probability that the production will be executed at the big hit) × (probability of becoming the big hit) / {(probability of the presentation being performed at the big hit) × (probability of the big hit) It is calculated by + (probability that the effect is executed other than the big hit time) × (probability of not becoming a big hit). In addition, when a certain effect is executed, when it always becomes a "big hit", the big hit expectation degree of the effect is "1". The same is true for the super reach expectation degree by a certain effect.

  The reach production is a production that gives notice to the player that the big hit expectation is high, etc., but suggests the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the player that the big hit expectation is high in addition to the reach production, It is possible to execute suggested effects (e.g., hold effects, pseudo linked effects, etc.). In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 901 can execute an effect (for example, a hold effect, a slip effect, etc.) for giving a notice to the player that any reach effect or a certain reach effect will be executed. Hereinafter, a player may be notified of an indication that any reach effect or a certain reach effect may be executed, that the jackpot expectation is high, etc.

  In addition, the notification (prediction, suggestion) by the advance presentation effect may be performed before the player recognizes whether the notification content is realized. For example, the advance notice effect notifying the possibility of reaching the reach state may be performed as long as it is performed before the reach state (or the non-reach state). In addition, the notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" may be performed as long as it is performed before the finalized decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Among the advance notice effects, it is sufficient that what is to be the advance read notice effect (also referred to as “pre-decision notice effect”) is included. Prior read advance notice effect determines whether the variable display result is "big hit" based on the hold information etc. of the special drawing game before starting the variable display to be the advance notice target. (Pre-reading), it is the announcement production which is executed on the basis of the decision result. In the following description, the pending information targeted for the pre-reading preview effect is referred to as pending information of the target, the pending display corresponding to the pending information of the target is referred to as pending display of the target, and the variable display corresponding to the pending information of the target It is also called variable target display. In addition, the active display (active display displayed during the variable display of a target) corresponding to the pending display of a target is also called the active display of a target.

  In addition, the display mode of the active display may be determined at the time of winning, or may be determined at the time of the pending display (before the active display is made yet), or when it is the active display (at the time of the change start) You may decide to Further, the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the active corresponding to the hold display (active display displayed by erasing the hold display) may be the same (or substantially the same), They may be related to each other. The display mode being the same (or substantially the same) means that, for example, an active display of the same or substantially the same display mode as the display mode of the hold display before the deletion is displayed.

  When the display modes are related to each other, there are, for example, three types of display modes (expected degrees of display mode a> expected degrees of display mode b> expected degrees of display mode c) as display modes of pending display. 3 types of display modes having different jackpot expectations as display modes of active display (expected degree of display mode s> expected degree of display mode t> expected degree of display mode u. However, display mode s is display mode a, display mode a, Unlike in any of b and c, the display mode t is different from any of the display modes a, b and c, and the display mode u is different from any of the display modes a, b and c). When the hold display is erased, the active display of the display mode s is displayed. When the hold display of the display mode b is erased, the active display of the display mode t is displayed. When the hold display of the display mode c is erased, the display It is that the active display of like u is displayed. In addition, when an active display effect at the time of addition described later is executed, when the pending display of the display mode a is erased, the active display of the display mode t or the display mode u is displayed, and the pending display of the display mode b is erased When it is turned on, the active display of the display mode u is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, as the pre-reading advance notice effect, the hold effect by the display mode of the hold display in the start winning game storage display area 905H can be executed. In the hold effect, for example, an effect (hold at the time of addition hold) to display a hold display to be added to the start winning memory display area 905H in a notice mode (blue or red in this embodiment) different from the normal mode (white in this embodiment) An effect (hold change effect) or the like for changing the already displayed hold display to a notice mode (including a change from one notice mode to another notice mode) is included.

  Further, in the present embodiment, it is an effect to be executed when changing the hold display to the notice mode as the pre-reading preview effect, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to directly display the hold display. It is possible to execute an effect to be operated indirectly (hold action effect. It may be referred to as “hold action success effect” in distinction from “hold action failure effect” described later). In addition, an effect (hold operation failure effect) that is executed when the hold display is not changed to the advance notice mode may be executable.

  Further, in the present embodiment, active display effect by the display mode of the active display in the active display area AHA ′ may be executable as the advance effect (or the advance notice effect). In the active display effect, for example, an effect that displays the active display to be added to the active display area AHA ′ when the pending display at the time of erasing is the normal mode in the notice mode (active display effect at the time of addition) An effect (active display change effect) or the like for changing the displayed active display into a notice mode (including a change from a certain notice mode to another notice mode) is included. In the case where the on-hold change effect and the active display change effect are not particularly distinguished, they may be referred to as “on-hold change effect and the like”.

  Further, when the active display effect is executable, the hold action success effect is executed when the active display is changed to the notice mode, and a character or the like is displayed in the display area of the image display device 905 to display the active display. It may be an effect to act directly or indirectly. Similarly, the pending action failure presentation may be presentation performed when the active display is not changed to the notice mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a concealment effect that conceals the pending display in the start winning combination memory display area 905H can be executed. Note that the concealment effect is an effect that makes it difficult to view at least a part of the hold display. For example, in the concealment effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the hold display at a position where even the number of the hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H can not be recognized at all (for example, an image for the cover is displayed on the front (upper layer) And it looks like a silhouette on the whole and is difficult to view, an image for concealment is displayed on the front, it is partially disturbed to make it difficult to see, and the holding display itself becomes hard to see (smaller, translucent) It may be an effect that makes it difficult or not (for example, an image for concealment is displayed on the front surface and is completely invisible, completely invisible by transparency or non-display). Also, the number of pending displays displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the display modes of those that are somehow recognizable (for example, recognizable by a silhouette). . Moreover, although the display mode is recognizable, it may be an effect that makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the number. For example, the presence or absence of a pending display (for example, a red pending display) of a certain display mode may be notified. Also, in the case of a hold display in which the notice mode is expressed not in the whole but in a part (for example, the upper part), the concealment effect makes it difficult to visually recognize the upper part of each hold display displayed in the start winning memory display area 905H. Or it may be an effect that makes it impossible.

  Also, the concealment effect may hide the active display in the active display area AHA 'instead of or in addition to the hold display in the start winning combination memory display area 905H.

  In the present embodiment, as a determined special symbol in the special figure game, among the special symbols (special symbols indicating the numbers “3”, “5” and “7”) that become the big hit symbol, the special symbol indicating the number “3” When the special symbol indicating the symbol or the number of "5" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "8R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". Also, when the special symbol indicating the number of "7" is stopped and displayed, it becomes "16R probability variation big hit" which is one aspect of "big hit". After the end of the 16R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit, probability variation control (probability fluctuation control) is performed together with time saving control (time shortening control).

  By performing the probability change control, the probability that the variable display result will be a "big hit" in the special figure game each time is improved to be higher than when the probability change control is not performed. The probability change control is one of the conditions when the special figure game of a predetermined number of STs (also referred to as the number of probability changes) is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, and when the variable display result is "big hit". End when it is first established. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become "big hit" when the probability change control is being performed, the probability change control finish. The predetermined number of times of ST is, for example, 70 times.

  Further, by performing the time reduction control, the variable display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the case where the time reduction control is not performed. In the time-saving control, after the big hit gaming state is over, when a predetermined time-saving number of special drawing games are executed and the variable display result is a "big hit", either condition is established first. To finish. Therefore, even if the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the time-saving control is being performed, the time-saving control ends when the predetermined number of time-saving special drawing games have been consumed. Note that the predetermined time reduction number is, for example, 70 times.

  When time saving control is performed, the control for shortening the variation time of the normal symbol in the regular drawing game by the regular symbol display 9020 (general drawing variation time) is shorter than that when the time reducing control is not performed, or Control to improve the probability that the variable display result of the symbol is "per common drawing" than when time saving control is not performed, the variable display result is "per common drawing" in the normal variable winning ball device 906B based on The game ball has a second start winning game such as control to make tilt control time to perform tilt control of the movable wing piece longer than when time reduction control is not performed, and control to increase the number of tilts than when time reduction control is not performed. A control that is advantageous to the player is performed by making it easy to pass through (enter) the mouth and increasing the possibility that the second start condition is established. As described above, the control that facilitates the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening with the time saving control and is advantageous for the player is also referred to as high open control. As high open control, any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed.

  By performing the high open control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening is in the wide open state is increased more than when the high open control is not performed. Therefore, the second start condition for executing the second special figure game by the second special symbol display device 904B is likely to be satisfied, and the second special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the next variable display result The time until the "big hit" is reduced. The period during which the high release control can be performed is also referred to as a high release control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the time saving control is performed.

  The gaming state in which both time saving control and high opening control are performed is also referred to as a time saving state or a high base state. In addition, the gaming state in which the probability change control is performed is also referred to as a high probability state or a probability change state. The short time state (high base state) and the high certainty state (probable state) are examples of advantageous states advantageous to the player.

  A game state in which time reduction control and high opening control are performed together with probability change control, that is, a game state in a high probability state (probability state) and also in a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability high base state or time reduction probability state Also called. The game state in which only time change control is performed and time reduction control and high opening control are not performed, that is, the game state which is a high probability state (probability state) but not a high base state (time reduction state) is a high probability low base state It is also referred to as a timeless nondeterministic state. In addition, only the high certainty high base state (time reduction attached definite change state) may be called "probable change state". A gaming state in which time reduction control or high opening control is performed without probability change control being performed, that is, a gaming state in which the high base state (time reduction state) is not a high probability state (probability state), is also referred to as a low probability high base state Be done. The game state in which time change control is not performed and time saving control or high opening control is not performed, that is, the game state in neither high probability state (probability state) nor high base state (time reduction state) is also referred to as low probability low base state Be done. The low probability low base state is a normal state in which neither probability change control nor short time control nor high open control is performed. Therefore, the low probability low base state is distinguished from high probability high base status, high probability low base status, low probability high base status, etc. It may be called "normal state". The initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 (for example, the state after the initialization processing is performed after the power is turned on as in the case where the system reset is performed) is the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, even when the variable display result does not become a "big hit" when the probability variation control is being performed, if the special figure game of the predetermined ST number (number of probability variations) is digested. Although the probability change control is ended, the probability change control may not be ended until the variable display result becomes “big hit” without providing the ST number (number of probability changes). That is, a probability variation big hit may be provided to continue the probability variation control until the next big hit. When providing a positive variation big hit that continues the positive variation control until the next big hit, a normal big hit may not be provided after the termination.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 901, various control boards such as a main board 9011 as shown in FIG. 52, an effect control board 9012, a voice control board 9013, and a lamp control board 9014 are mounted. The pachinko gaming machine 901 also includes a relay substrate 9015 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. Besides, various substrates such as a payout control substrate, an information terminal substrate, a launch control substrate, an interface substrate and the like are arranged on the back of the gaming board 902 etc. in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

  The main board 9011 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 are mounted. The main board 9011 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board consisting of a function for setting random numbers used in the special view game, a function for inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 9012 or the like. And a function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer. In addition, the main board 9011 performs lighting / extinguishing control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B to perform the first special figure or the second special figure. The variable display of predetermined identification information, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 9020 or controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 9020 by performing the on / off / coloring control of the normal symbol display 9020 It also has a function to control.

  The main circuit 9011 includes, for example, a microcomputer 90100 for game control, a switch circuit 90110 for capturing detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmitting the detection signals to the microcomputer 90100 for game control, and a microcomputer 90100 for game control A solenoid circuit 90111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 9081 and 9082 is mounted.

  The effect control board 9012 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 9011, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 9011 via the relay board 9015, and receives the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp Various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the 909 and the movable part 9017 are mounted.

  The sound control board 9013 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on a command or control data from the effect control board 9012, causes the speaker 908 to output sound. The processing circuit etc. which perform audio signal processing are mounted. The lamp control board 9014 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and based on the command and control data from the effect control board 9012, the light on / off drive in the lamp 909 etc. The lamp driver circuit etc. to be carried are mounted. The character and article control board 9016 is a control board for character and article movement control provided separately from the effect control board 9012, and drives the movable character 9017 based on commands and control data from the effect control board 9012 and the like. A circuit or the like that outputs a drive signal is mounted on an actuator (not shown).

  As shown in FIG. 52, the main substrate 9011 is connected to a wire for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 9021, the first start port switch 9022A, the second start port switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023. The gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023 have an arbitrary configuration capable of detecting a game ball as a game medium, such as one called a sensor. If it is In addition to the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, the second start opening switch 9022B, and the count switch 9023, the game machine 901 is another switch (for example, a glass door (not shown) similarly connected to the main substrate 9011). A switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board, a switch for detecting the open / close state of the game board 902 itself, a switch for detecting an illegal vibration, or a switch for detecting an illegal electromagnetic wave. In addition, the main substrate 9011 includes a first special symbol display device 904A, a second special symbol display device 904B, a normal symbol display 9020, a first hold indicator 9025A, a second hold indicator 9025B, and a common view hold indicator 9025C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  The control signal transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 is relayed by the relay substrate 9015. The control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 via the relay substrate 9015 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal.

  FIG. 53 (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (classification of command), and the second byte indicates EXT (type of command). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". The command form shown in FIG. 53A is an example, and another command form may be used. Further, in this example, the effect control command is configured by two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the effect control command may be one or more than three. Good.

  In addition, the information which comprises each production control command may be memorize | stored in the command table in ROM90101, for example. When transmitting a certain effect control command to the effect control board 12, as a setting for transmitting the effect control command, the storage address of the effect control command in the command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer It may be stored in the buffer area that has been Thereafter, the command control process (step S9017) of the game control timer interrupt process (FIG. 61) is executed, and the effect control command set as described above is transmitted from the main board 9011 to the effect control board 9012. Is transmitted.

  A part of FIG. 53 (A) will be described. For example, the command 8001H is a first change start command that specifies the start of the first special view game. The command 8002H is a second variation start command that designates the start of the second special figure game. The command 81XXH is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a decorative symbol variably displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of an instruction by the effect control command. In the fluctuation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the fluctuation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for notifying a variable display result. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is “loss”, “16R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, or the type Different EXT data are set according to the determination result of.

  The command B100H is a first starting opening prize notification command for notifying that the first starting condition is established (may also be referred to as a first starting opening prize designation command and a first starting opening winning command). Command B200H is a second starting opening prize notification command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the second special figure game by second special symbol display device 904B is established (second starting opening winning combination designated command , Sometimes referred to as the second start opening winning combination command).

  The command C1XXH is a first pending storage number notification command for reporting the first special view pending storage number. The command C2XXH is a second pending storage number notification command for reporting the second special view pending storage number. For example, when the first start winning combination occurs (when the number of first special drawing reservations is increased), the first reservation number of prizes notification command is transmitted together with the first starting opening prize notification command. Further, when the second start winning combination occurs (when the number of the second special view pending storage increases), the second pending storage number notification command is transmitted together with the second starting opening winning notification command.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (determination result specification command at the time of winning) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. The command C4XXH is a symbol designating command indicating the determination result of the big hit type as a determination result of whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” as the winning determination result. The command C6XXH is a variation category designation command (also referred to as a "variation category command") indicating the determination result of the variation category (also referred to as "variation pattern type") as the determination result at the time of winning. The variation category is a name when the variation pattern of the decorative pattern is classified (aggregated) according to the type. In other words, the variation category is a group name of each group including variation patterns of one or more decorative symbols categorized into a common group.

  In this embodiment, at the time of winning random number value determination processing (FIG. 65), the variation category except for some cases (for example, when there is the first starting winning in the high base state etc.) when the starting winning occurs. The variation category is determined based on the random number value MR3 'for determination. Then, a value corresponding to the determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control board 9012 is performed. The effect control CPU 90120 mounted on the effect control board 9012 super-reaches the variable display based on the start winning based on the value set in the change category command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 when the start winning occurs. It can be recognized whether or not.

  The game control microcomputer 90100 mounted on the main substrate 9011 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and a ROM (Read Only Memory) 90101 for storing a program for game control, fixed data and the like, and a work for game control A RAM (Random Access Memory) 90102 for providing an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 90103 for executing a control operation by executing a program for game control, and an update of numerical data indicating a random number independently of the CPU 90103 A random number circuit 90104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 90105 are provided.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory view exemplifying a random value counted (updated) on the main substrate 9011 side. As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 9011, a random number MR1 'for determining a special display result, a random number MR2' for determining a big hit type, and a random value MR3 'for determining a variation category. The numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR4 'for determining the common pattern display result and the random number value MR5' for determining the variation pattern is controlled so as to be able to be counted. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of such a game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

  The random number circuit 90104 may be any one as long as it counts numerical data indicating a part or all of the random number values MR1 ′ to MR5 ′. For example, the CPU 90103 updates various numerical value data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 90104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154 shown in FIG. The numerical data representing a part of .about.MR5 'may be counted.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a variation category and a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In FIG. 55, the fluctuation category “PA1 ′” is a shortening / non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern “PA1′-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PA1 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA2 ′” is a non-reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA2'-1" and "PA2'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA2 '". The fluctuation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" and "PA3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PA3 '". The fluctuation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PA4′-1” to “PA4′-3” belong to the variation category “PA4 ′”. The fluctuation category “PA5 ′” is a super reach β (loss) fluctuation category. The fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1" to "PA5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PA5 '". The variation category “PB1 ′” is a shortening / reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern “PB1′-1” belongs to the fluctuation category “PB1 ′”. The variation category “PB3 ′” is a normal reach (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation pattern "PB3'-1" and "PB3'-2" belong to the fluctuation category "PB3 '". The fluctuation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation category. The variation patterns “PB4′-1” to “PB4′-3” belong to the variation category “PB4 ′”. The variation category “PB5 ′” is a super reach β (big hit) variation category. The fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1" to "PB5'-3" belong to the fluctuation category "PB5 '".

  A part of FIG. 55 will be described. For example, the variation pattern “PA3′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA3 ′” is a normal reach (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. Further, the fluctuation pattern “PA3′-2” is a normal reach (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The variation pattern “PA4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PA4 ′” is a super reach α (loss) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-2” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PA4′-3” is a super reach α (loss) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice. The variation pattern “PB3′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB3 ′” is a normal reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. In addition, the fluctuation pattern “PB3′-2” is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is performed once. The variation pattern "PB1'-1" belonging to the variation category "PB1 '" is a shortened / reach (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the variation pattern "PB3'-1". The variation pattern “PB4′-1” belonging to the variation category “PB4 ′” is a super reach α (big hit) variation pattern in which the special figure variation time is a normal length. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-2” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed once. The fluctuation pattern “PB4′-3” is a super reach α (big hit) fluctuation pattern in which the pseudo continuous fluctuation (effect) is executed twice.

  FIG. 56 shows a configuration example of a display result determination table stored in the ROM 90101. In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 56, before the variable display result (special view display result) of the special view game is derived and displayed, the special view display result is a random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result. Is a table referenced to make a decision based on In the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 56, according to the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901, the determination values (special map display result determination) assigned to the respective special view display results (“big hit”, “lost”) The number of numerical values to be compared with the random number value MR1 'of. According to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 56, when the gaming state is in the high certainty state, more determination values are allocated to the “big hit” than in the low certainty state. That is, in the high certainty state, the probability of being a "big hit" is made higher than in the low certainty state.

  FIG. 57 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 90131 stored in the ROM 90101. When the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 57 determines that the special figure display result is to be controlled to the big hit gaming state as “big hit”, it is for the big hit classification determination whether to set the big hit classification to any of plural types. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random value MR2 '. In the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 57, depending on whether the variation special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing (that is, whether the first special drawing game is to be executed or the second special drawing game) Of the number of judgment values (numeric values to be compared with the random value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type) assigned to each jackpot type ("16R probability variation jackpot", "8R probability variation jackpot") It is different. According to the big hit classification determination table 90131 shown in FIG. 57, when the variation special figure is the second special figure (when the second special figure game is executed), it is more than when the variation special figure is the first special figure A lot of judgment values are assigned to "16R probability variation big hit" (than when the first special view game is executed). That is, in the second special view game, the probability of becoming the “16R probability variation big hit” is increased when the “big hit” is obtained compared to the first special view game.

  In addition, the ROM 90101 includes a variation category determination table to be referred to in order to determine the variation category to any of a plurality of types, and a variation pattern to be referred to in order to determine a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types. A decision table is stored.

  The RAM 90102 holds various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The RAM 90102 is a backup RAM in which part or all of the data to be held is backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply substrate.

  FIG. 58 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a game control data holding area provided in the RAM 90102. In the RAM 90102, a game control data holding area 90150 as shown in FIG. 58, for example, is provided as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901 and the like. The game control data holding area 90150 shown in FIG. 58 includes a first special view reserve storage unit 90151A, a second special view reserve storage unit 90151B, a reserve specific information storage unit 90151C, a common drawing reserve storage unit 90151D, and a game. A control flag setting unit 90152, a game control timer setting unit 90153, a game control counter setting unit 90154, and a game control buffer setting unit 90155 are provided.

  The first special figure holding storage unit 90151A stores holding data (first holding information) of the first special figure game. As an example, the first special view reserve storage unit 90151A is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of the game balls) to the first start winning opening, and the random number is made by the CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the game balls With the numerical value data (for example, the numerical value data indicating random number values MR1 'to MR3') indicating the random number value extracted from the circuit 90104 or the like as pending data, the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example "4") I remember until.

  The second special view reserve storage unit 90151B stores reserve data (second reserve information) of the second special view game. As an example, second special view reserve storage unit 90151 B is associated with the reserve number in the winning order (the order of detection of gaming balls) to the second start winning opening, and random number is generated by CPU 90103 based on the passage (enter) of the gaming balls Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4") by using as numerical data (eg, numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 'to MR3') indicating random numbers extracted from the circuit 90104 etc. Remember.

  The hold specification information storage unit 90151C is a winning order of the entire hold data including the hold data stored in the first special view hold storage unit 90151A and the hold data stored in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B. Hold data (first hold information) based on the occurrence of the first start winning, or hold data based on the occurrence of the second start win (second hold information) Stores information indicating whether the In the suspension specifying information storage unit 90151C shown in FIG. 64, “first” indicates that the information is the first suspension information, and “second” indicates that the information is the second suspension information.

  The common drawing reservation storage unit 90151D stores holding information of the common drawing game. For example, the common drawing reserve storage unit 90151D determines the common drawing display result extracted from the random number circuit 90104 or the like by the CPU 90103 based on the passage of the gaming ball in correspondence with the holding number in the order that the gaming ball passed the passing gate 9041 Numeric data indicating a random number value MR4 'for use is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

  The game control flag setting unit 90152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags capable of updating the state according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 90152 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The game control timer setting unit 90153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control timer setting unit 90153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit 90154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count value used to control the progression of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154, the first hold storage number count value, which is the storage value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the first special view hold storage number, Second pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the second pending storage number counter for counting, total pending storage number count value which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number It is memorized.

  The game control buffer setting unit 90155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 90155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The I / O 90105 provided in the gaming control microcomputer 90100 shown in FIG. 52 has an input port for capturing various signals transmitted to the gaming control microcomputer 90100, and various signals to the outside of the gaming control microcomputer 90100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 52, the effect control board 9012 is provided with a CPU for effect control 90120 that performs control operation according to a program, a ROM 90121 for storing a program for effect control, fixed data, etc., and a work area for the CPU 90120 for effect control. RAM 90122, a display control unit 90123 for executing processing for determining control contents of display operation in the image display device 905, etc., and a random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently for the effect control CPU 90120. A circuit 90124, an I / O 90125, and an RTC (real time clock) circuit 90126 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 90120, the ROM 90121, and the RAM 90122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 9012.

  A wiring for transmitting an information signal (video signal) indicating a rendering image to the image display device 905, and a information signal (rendering sound signal) indicating a command to the audio control substrate 9013 are transmitted to the rendering control substrate 9012. Wiring, wiring for transmitting an information signal (electric decoration signal) indicating a command to the lamp control board 9014, and the like are connected. Furthermore, in the effect control board 9012, a wiring for transmitting from the controller sensor unit 9035A an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that the player's operation on the stick controller 9031A has been detected, or a game for the push button 9031B. Wiring for transmitting an information signal (operation detection signal) indicating that a user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 9035B is also connected.

  In the effect control board 9012, numerical data representing various random number values used to control the effect operation is countably updated, for example, by the random number circuit 90124 or the like. The random number used to control such a rendering operation is also referred to as a rendering random number.

  In the ROM 90121 mounted on the effect control board 9012 shown in FIG. 52, in addition to the program for effect control, various data used to control the effect operation are stored. For example, the ROM 90121 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90120 for effect control to make various determinations, determinations and settings.

  The ROM 90121 also includes a plurality of effect control patterns used by the effect control CPU 90120 to control the effect operation of various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable object 9017, etc.) Data to be configured is stored. Each effect control pattern is composed of data indicating control contents of various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901. That is, various rendering operations are realized by setting a rendering control pattern. For example, the variable display operation of the decorative symbol corresponding to each fluctuation pattern is realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The hold control, the active display effect, the fanfare effect, the effect during the round game (the effect during opening and the effect during closing), the ending effect and the like are also realized by setting the effect control pattern corresponding to each effect.

  FIG. 59A shows a configuration example of the effect control pattern. The effect control pattern is, for example, control for controlling various effect operations such as effect control process timer determination value, display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, movable combination control data, end code, etc. It may be configured from data, and the contents of various effect control, switching timing of effect control, and the like may be set in time series. In addition to the above, the effect control pattern may include, for example, movable member control data for specifying the content of operation control in a movable member provided inside or outside the game area. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with the value (effect control process timer value) of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the effect control RAM built in the effect control microcomputer. That is, determination values corresponding to the execution time (rendering time) of each rendering operation are set in advance. Note that, instead of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command has been received from the main substrate 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling an effect operation in the effect control microcomputer. Data indicating the switching timing or the like of effect control may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes, for example, data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data for specifying the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 905. The voice control data includes, for example, data indicating a voice output mode from the speaker 908, such as data indicating an output mode such as a rendering sound interlocked with the variable display operation of the decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the voice control data is data designating a voice output operation from the speaker 908. The lamp control data includes, for example, data indicating a light emission operation mode of the lamp 909. That is, the lamp control data is data for specifying the light emitting operation of the lamp 909. The operation detection control data includes, for example, a period in which an operation on the operation unit such as the push button 9031 B is effectively detected, and data indicating the control content of the rendering operation in the case where the operation is effectively detected. That is, the operation detection control data is data for specifying a rendering operation according to the operation on the operation unit. The movable part control data includes, for example, data indicating an operation mode of the movable part 9017. That is, the movable part control data is data for specifying the operation of the movable part 9017. Note that these control data do not have to be included in all of the effect control patterns, but are effect control patterns configured to include a part of control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be.

  FIG. 59 (B) is a diagram for describing various effect operations performed in accordance with the content of the effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 90120 determines control content of the effect operation according to various control data included in the effect control pattern. For example, when the effect control process timer value matches any of the effect control process timer determination values, the decorative symbol is displayed in a mode specified by the display control data associated with the effect control process timer determination values, and the character Control for displaying an effect image such as an image or a background image on the screen of the image display device 905 is performed. Further, control is performed to output sound from the speaker 908 in a mode specified by the voice control data, and control is performed to cause the lamp 909 to emit light in a mode specified by the lamp control data, and an operation specified by the operation detection control data An operation to the stick controller 9031A or the push button 9031B is received in a valid period (which may be simply referred to as a valid period) to perform control to determine the contents of the effect. In addition, dummy data (data for which control is not specified) may be set as data corresponding to a rendering device that is not to be controlled even though it corresponds to the rendering control process timer determination value.

  Although the rendering operation shown in FIG. 59 (B) corresponds to the entire period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the final stop, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. An effect control pattern may be provided to execute the effect operation in response to a partial period (e.g., a period in which the advance effect is performed). Alternatively, to perform the rendering operation in accordance with a predetermined period other than during variable display of the decorative symbol (for example, a period in which a round is being executed in the big hit gaming state, a period in which an ending effect is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, etc.) An effect control pattern of may be provided.

  When setting the effect control pattern, pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read out from the ROM 90121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122 or pattern data of the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern The storage address in the ROM 90121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 90122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 90121 may be designated. After that, every time the effect control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not any of the effect control process timer determination values match, and if it matches, the effect operation according to the corresponding various control data Control the As described above, the effect control CPU 90120 follows the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern, and the effect device (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, and the lamp). 909, advance the control of the movable part 9017 and the like). In each of the process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n associated with the effect control process timer determination values # 1 to #n, voice control data # 1 to voice control Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n, movable combination control data # 1 to movable combination control data #n are respectively effects The control content of the rendering operation in the device is shown, and rendering control execution data # 1 to rendering control execution data #n for specifying the execution of rendering control are configured.

  The instruction according to the effect control pattern set in this manner is output from the effect control CPU 90120 to the display control unit 90123, the sound control board 9013, the lamp control board 9014, the feature control board 9016 and the like. For example, in the display control unit 90123 that has received an instruction from the effect control CPU 90120, a predetermined VDP, for example, reads out the image data indicated by the instruction from the image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily stores it in VRAM. Let Further, in the voice control board 9013 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 90120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and expands it by temporarily storing it in voice RAM or the like .

  FIG. 60A is a block diagram and the like showing a configuration example of the effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 90122. In the RAM 90122, as an area for holding various data used to control the rendering operation in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a presentation control data holding area 90190 as shown in FIG. 60A is provided. The effect control data holding area 90190 shown in FIG. 60A includes an effect control flag setting unit 90191, an effect control timer setting unit 90192, an effect control counter setting unit 90193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 90194. There is.

  For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 can update the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 905, the effect control command transmitted from the main substrate 9011, etc. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 90191 stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state.

  The effect control timer setting unit 90192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of effect images on the screen of the image display device 905, for example. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 90192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 90193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 90193 stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 90194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 90194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  In the present embodiment, data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A as shown in FIG. 60 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. In the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A, storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to the maximum value (for example, “8”) of the total pending storage number are provided. When there is a start winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (the first starting opening winning designation command or the second starting opening winning designation command), the symbol specifying command, the variation category command The four commands of the pending storage number notification command (the first pending storage number notification command or the second pending storage number notification command) are set as one, and transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012. A storage area is secured in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A so that the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol specification command, the variation category command, and the pending storage number notification command can be stored in association with each other.

  The effect control CPU 90120 stores the commands from the top of the free area of the start winning reception command buffer 90194A in the order received at the start winning. At the start winning game, command transmission is performed in the order of a start opening winning combination designation command, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a pending storage number notification command. Therefore, if command reception is properly performed, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), in the storage area corresponding to each of the buffer numbers “1” to “8”, the start opening winning combination designation command, the symbol designation command, and the variation The category command and the pending storage number notification command are stored in this order. The command stored in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A shown in FIG. 60 (B) is the first storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number "1" every time variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Are deleted from the ones stored in, and subsequent storage contents are shifted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, data constituting the prefetch notice buffer 90194 B as shown in FIG. 60C is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 194. Storage areas (areas corresponding to buffer numbers “1” to “8”) corresponding to respective data constituting the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194A are provided in the prefetch notice buffer 90194B. That is, in the prefetch notice buffer 90194 B, the contents of the determination regarding the prefetch notice effect relating to the respective hold information determined by the effect control CPU 90120 etc. are stored in association with the buffer numbers “1” to “8”. . For example, when pending data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is deleted in start prize winning reception command buffer 90194A due to start of variable display of decorative design, etc. The content associated with the buffer number is also deleted. In addition, when the hold data (one set of commands) associated with a certain buffer number is shifted to another buffer number in the start-up winning reception command buffer 90194A due to the start of variable display of decorative symbols, etc. In the read preview buffer 90194B, the contents associated with the buffer number are also shifted to the other buffer numbers.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 901 in the present embodiment will be described.

  On the main substrate 9011, when power supply from a predetermined power supply substrate is started, the game control microcomputer 90100 is activated, and the CPU 90103 executes a predetermined process to be a game control main process. When the game control main processing is started, the CPU 90103 sets the interrupt prohibition and then performs necessary initialization. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 90102 is cleared. Further, the register setting of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 90100 is performed. As a result, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 90103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 90103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When initialization is complete, after enabling the interrupt, it enters loop processing. In the game control main process, the loop process may be performed after the process for restoring the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop is performed.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 90103 which has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 61 is started, the CPU 90103 first executes a predetermined switch process to make the gate switch 9021, the first start opening switch 9022A, and the second start opening via the switch circuit 90110. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the switch 9022B and the count switch 9023 is determined (step S9011). Subsequently, by performing predetermined main-side error processing (including sensor error notification processing), abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 901 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S9012).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S9012, the CPU 90103 executes predetermined information output processing to, for example, the jackpot information, start information, probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 901 And other data are output (step S9013).

  Following the information output process of step S9013, the CPU 90103 executes a game random number update process (step S9014). In the gaming random number updating process of step S 9014, for example, at least a part of gaming random numbers (for example, random number values MR 1 ′ to MR 5 ′ and the like) used on the main substrate 9011 side is updated by software. As one example, the CPU 90103 may use software to update numerical data indicating game random numbers counted by the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the game random number updating process of step S9014, the CPU 90103 executes a special symbol process process (step S9015). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special drawing process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901, and the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the display device 904B, opening / closing operation setting of the special winning opening in the special variable winning prize ball device 907, and the like in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes the normal symbol process processing (step S9016). The normal symbol process processing is executed to control the display operation (for example, lighting and extinguishing of segment LED, etc.) in the normal symbol display 9020, and the variable display of the normal symbol and the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 906B. Enables tilting operation setting and so on.

  Following the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 executes a command control process to transmit a control command from the main substrate 9011 to a sub-side control substrate such as the effect control substrate 9012 (step S9017). As an example, in the command control process, among the output ports included in I / O 90105, corresponding to the settings in the command transmission table designated by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in game control buffer setting unit 90155, effect control After setting control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the substrate 9012, predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By setting the switch to the off state, transmission of effect control commands based on settings in the command transmission table is enabled. After executing the command control process, the game control timer interrupt process is ended after setting to the interrupt enabled state.

  FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process process executed in step S9015 of the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 90103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S90101). FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S90101 of the special symbol process process (step S9015) shown in FIG.

  In the start winning determination process (step S90101) shown in FIG. 63, the CPU 90103 first detects the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9022A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 906A. Based on the determination, it is determined whether the first start port switch 9022A is on (step S90201). If it is determined in step S90201 that the first starting opening switch 9022A is on (step S90201; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the first special view reservation storage number (the first special view game suspension number) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90202). The CPU 90103 may identify the first special-image storage number by reading the first-storage number count value which is the storage value of the first-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90202 that the first special map storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90202; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer storage value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "1" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90207). Following the process of step S90207, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 64) (step S90208), and sets (clears) "0" to the start hole buffer value (step S90209).

  If it is determined in step S90201 that the first start port switch 9022A is not on (step S90201 (NO)), or if it is determined in step S90202 that the number of first special view storage locations has reached the upper limit (Step S90202 (YES)) After executing the processing of step S90209, the CPU 90103 receives a command from the second starting opening switch 9022B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 906B. It is determined based on the detection signal whether or not the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203). If it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is on (step S90203; YES), the CPU 90103 determines that the second special view reserve storage number (the number of reserve for the second special view game) is predetermined. It is determined whether the upper limit value (for example, “4” as the upper limit storage number) has been reached (step S90204). The CPU 90103 may specify the second special-image storage number by reading the second-storage number count, which is the storage value of the second-storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, for example.

  If it is determined in step S90204 that the second special figure storage number is not the upper limit value (step S90204; NO), the CPU 90103 stores the starting opening buffer stored value provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 (starting value "2" is set to the mouth buffer value) (step S90210). Subsequent to the process of step S90210, the CPU 90103 executes the start winning process (FIG. 64) (step S90211), sets (clears) "0" to the start port buffer value (step S90212), and determines the start winning process. Finish.

  When it is determined in step S90203 that the second start port switch 9022B is not on (step S90203 (NO)), or when it is determined in step S90204 that the number of second special view storage locations has reached the upper limit value. (Step S90204 (YES)), the processing of steps S90210, S90211 and S90212 is not performed, and the start winning determination processing is ended.

  According to the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 63, even if the first start opening switch 9022A and the second start opening switch 9022B simultaneously detect the start winning of the game ball, the processing based on the respective detections Can be completed.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211). In the start winning process shown in FIG. 64, the CPU 90103 first updates the number of to-be-stored special map storages according to the start opening buffer value to be incremented by 1 (step S90215). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the first pending storage number count value is incremented by one, while when the starting opening buffer value is “2”, the second pending storage number count value is incremented by one. Thus, the first reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the gaming ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. Further, the second reserved memory number count value is updated so as to increase by one when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. Following the process of step S90215, the total number of pending storages is updated so as to add one (step S90216). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the storage value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 90154, may be updated so as to add one.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90216, the CPU 90103 determines a special figure display result determination random value MR1 ', a big hit type among the numerical data updated by the random counter of the random number circuit 90104 and the game control counter setting unit 90154. The numerical value data indicating the random number value MR2 'for random number and the random number value MR3' for variable category determination are extracted (step S90217). Numeric data representing each random number value extracted in this manner is stored at the head of the empty entry in the special view storage section 90151 according to the starting opening buffer value by being set as storage information (step S90218). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ is set in the first special image storage section 90151A, while the starting port buffer value is “2”. At the same time, numerical data representing random number values MR1 'to MR3' is set in second special image storage section 90151B. In addition, information according to the starting opening buffer value is stored in the hold specification information storage unit 90151C.

  Following the process of step S90218, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a starting opening winning notice command according to the starting opening buffer value to the effect control board 9012 (step S90219). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first starting opening winning notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second starting opening winning notification command is performed. The start-up winning combination notification command set in step S90219 is mainly executed by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 61, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90219, the CPU 90103 executes a winning-time random number value determination process (step S90220). Thereafter, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting the pending storage number notification command (step S90221). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the first pending storage number notification command is performed. When the starting opening buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the second holding storage number notification command is performed. Then, the start winning process ends. In addition, for example, the command control process (step S9017) of the timer control process for game control shown in FIG. 61 is executed after the special symbol process process is ended, for example, the pending storage number notification command set in step S90221 is executed. The main substrate 9011 transmits the effect control substrate 9012.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart etc. which show an example of random number value determination processing at the time of a prize (step S90220). In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 65A, the CPU 90103 first specifies the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 901 (step S90401). In the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not the big hit gaming state is confirmed by checking the state of the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is on, and identifies the big hit gaming state when the big hit flag is not on (when it is off). Further, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state or the low base state by confirming the state of the high base flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high base state when the high base flag is in the on state, and identifies the low base state when the high base flag is not in the on state (when in the off state). . Also, in the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state or the low probability state by confirming the state of the high probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 or the like. Good. Specifically, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state when the high probability flag is on, and identifies the low probability state when the high probability flag is not on (when it is off). May be

  Note that the CPU 90103 sets the high base flag in the on state in the big hit end process (step S90117). The CPU 90103 also clears the high base flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process (step S90113). For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the number of time reductions in the big hit end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter if it becomes lost in special symbol stop processing. At the same time, the high base flag is cleared to the off state when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the number of time savings. The CPU 90103 also sets the high probability flag to the on state in the big hit end process. In addition, the CPU 90103 clears the high probability flag to the off state in the special symbol stop process. For example, the CPU 90103 sets an initial value of zero to the fluctuation number counter to be compared with the ST count in the big hit end processing, and updates (counts up) the value of the fluctuation number counter when it becomes lost in the special symbol stop processing. At the same time, when the value of the fluctuation number counter reaches the high probability number, the high probability flag is cleared to the off state. The value of the fluctuation number counter is stored, for example, in the game control counter setting unit 90154.

  Following the process of step S90401, the CPU 90103 determines whether or not a big hit gaming state is currently in progress (step S90402). That is, it is determined whether or not it is specified in the process of step S90401 that the jackpot gaming state. If it is determined in step S90402 that the player is not in the big hit gaming state (step S90402; NO), the CPU 90103 determines whether it is in the high base state (step S90403). In other words, it is determined whether or not the high base state is identified in the process of step S90401.

  If it is determined in step S90402 that a big hit gaming state is determined (step S90402; YES), or if it is determined in step S90403 that a high base state is found (step S90403; YES), the CPU 90103 indicates the starting opening buffer value. Is "2" (step S90404). That is, it is determined whether or not it is the second start winning combination (the start winning combination where the variation special figure is the second special figure). When it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is not "2" (step S90404; NO), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90403 that the high base state is not set (step S90403 (NO)) or if it is determined in step S90404 that the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step S90404 (YES)), The CPU 90103 sets (selects) the special view display result determination table according to the current gaming state (step S90405). Specifically, when the CPU 90103 is not in the high certainty state, according to the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 56, the table data for the low certainty state (the value of the range from “8000” to “8329” is “big hit” The table data allocated to the special view display result is set, and when it is in the high probability state, from the display result determination table 90130 shown in FIG. 56, the table data for high probability state (“8000” to “8818” The table data assigned to the special view display result whose range value is “big hit” is set In addition, when the high probability flag is in the on state, the CPU 90103 identifies the high probability state and the high probability flag If it is not in the on state (when it is in the off state), it may be specified as the low certainty state, and the first special figure and the second special figure are different. When the display result determination table (first special view display result determination table, second special view display result determination table) is used, the first special view display result determination table is displayed when the starting opening buffer value is “1”. If it is used and the start port buffer value is "2", the second special view display result determination table may be used.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90405, the CPU 90103 indicates that the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S90406). For example, the CPU 90103 shows numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'and individual determination values assigned to the "big hit" special figure display result in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405. The comparison is performed to determine the presence or absence of a determination value that matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 '. Alternatively, CPU 90103 is the minimum value of the judgment value assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special figure display result determination table data set in step S90405 and the numerical data indicating random number value MR1 ′ (lower limit The value) may be compared with the maximum value (upper limit value) to determine whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 'is within the range between the minimum value and the maximum value of the determination value.

  If it is determined in step S90406 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S90406; YES), the random number value MR2 'for jackpot type determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning process shown in FIG. Based on the numerical data shown, it is determined the jackpot type (step S90407). Specifically, first, CPU 90103 responds to the fluctuation special figure ("first special figure" corresponding to "1" or "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified by the starting opening buffer value. Set (select) the big hit classification decision table. Specifically, the CPU 90103 sets table data according to the variation special figure from the big hit type determination table 90131 shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103, for example, compares the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 'for determining the jackpot type with the judgment value of each jackpot type in the jackpot type determination table data set according to the variation special chart etc. Then, the jackpot type matching the numerical data indicating the random value MR2 'may be determined.

  Following the process of step S90407, the CPU 90103 performs setting for transmitting a symbol designation command according to the determination result of the process of step S90407 to the effect control board 9012 (step S90408). On the other hand, when it is determined in step S90406 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S90406; NO), setting for transmitting the symbol designation command according to the loss to the effect control board 9012 is performed (step S90409). In addition, the symbol designation command set in step S90409 is mainly executed by executing the command control process (step S9017) of the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 61, for example, after the special symbol process process is completed. The signal is transmitted from the substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012.

  After executing the process of step S90408 or the process of step S90409, the CPU 90103 determines whether the high base state is set (step S90410). If it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is not set (step S90410; NO), that is, if the scene 1 or the scene 3 described above, the CPU 90103 is for the low base state according to the special view display result. A variation category determination table is set (selected) (step S90411). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S90410 that the high base state is present (step S90410; YES), that is, if the scene 2 or the scene 4 is present, the CPU 90103 selects the high base state according to the special view display result. Set (select) a variation category determination table for (step S90412).

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of selection of the variation category determination table. FIG. 66A shows a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among a plurality of variation category determination tables when in the low base state. According to FIG. 66 (A), when the special figure display result is "loss" in the low base state, three types of variation category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are shown according to the number of pending storages). One of the variation category determination tables is selected from-TBL2 and "C-TBL3". Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66A, when the number of pending storages is 0 or 1, the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" is selected, and when the number of pending storages is 2 or 3, When the variation category determination table "C-TBL2" is selected, and the number of pending storages is four or more, the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" is selected. Further, according to FIG. 66 (A), when the special figure display result is set as the "big hit" in the low base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL4" in the figure, regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 66B is a selection example of selecting any of the variation category determination tables from among the plurality of variation category determination tables when in the high base state. According to FIG. 66 (B), when the special figure display result is "loss" in the high base state, two types of variation category determination tables ("C-TBL1" and "C" in the figure are shown according to the number of pending storages). One of the variation category determination tables is selected from -TBL3 "). Also, according to FIG. 66 (B), when the special view display result is set to "big hit" in the high base state, one type of variation category determination table ("C-TBL5" in the figure is used regardless of the number of pending storages). Is selected.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the variation category determination table. FIG. 67A shows a variation category determination table "C-TBL1" shown in FIG. 66A or 66B. FIG. 67 (A) shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL1” (FIG. 67 (B) shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL2”, FIG. 67 (C) shows a variation category determination table “C-TBL3”, The same applies to the variation category determination table “C-TBL4” of (D) and the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” of FIG. 67 (E)) to be compared with the random value MR3 ′ for variation category determination (determination Values) are assigned to multiple types of variation categories.

  For example, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 67A, 0 out of 100 (values in the range of “0” to “99”) of the determined values of the random value MR3 ′ Are assigned to the variation category "PA1 '", 70 (values in the range of "0" to "69") are assigned to the variation category "PA2'", and 27 (in the range of "70" to "96" Value) is assigned to the variation category "PA3 '", two (values in the range of "97" to "98") are assigned to the variation category "PA4'", and one (value "99") is the variation category It is assigned to "PA5 '". That is, in the setting example of the variation category determination table “C-TBL1” in FIG. 67A, the variation category “PA1 ′” is 0% (0 (100) and the variation category “PA2 ′” is 70% (70% 100). ), The fluctuation category "PA3 '" is 27% (27 ÷ 100), the fluctuation category "PA4'" is 2% (2 ÷ 100), and the fluctuation category "PA5 '" is 1% (1 ÷ 100). Be done.

  The variation category determination table "C-TBL2" shown in FIG. 67 (B), the variation category determination table "C-TBL3" shown in FIG. 67 (C), the variation category determination table "C" shown in FIG. 67 (D) The same applies to the variation category determination table “C-TBL5” shown in FIG.

  It returns to FIG. 65 (A). In the process of step S90411 executed when it is determined that the high base state is not set in step S90410, the CPU 90103 determines that the special view display result is "big hit" in step S90406, the variation category determination table The table data making up "C-TBL4" is set, and it is determined that the special map display result is "lost", the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" to the variation category determination according to the number of pending storages The table data constituting one of the tables "C-TBL3" is set. Also, in the process of step S90412 executed when it is determined in step S90410 that it is in the high base state, the CPU 90103 changes the category if it is determined in step S90406 that the special view display result is "big hit". The table data constituting the determination table "C-TBL5" is set, and it is determined that the special map display result is "loss", the variation category determination table "C-TBL1" or the variation according to the number of pending storages Table data constituting one of the category determination tables "C-TBL3" is set.

  After executing the process of step S90411 or the process of step S90412, the CPU 90103 determines (determines) a variation category based on numerical data indicating a random value MR3 'for determining a variation category (step S90413). Specifically, CPU 90103 sets numerical data indicating random number value MR3 'for change category determination extracted in step S90217 of the start winning processing shown in FIG. 64 and the change set in step S90411 or step S90412. It is only necessary to determine which of the determination values matches the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 'by comparing the determination values assigned to the respective variation categories in the table data of the category determination table. Following the process of step S90413, the CPU 90103 transmits one of the variation category commands shown in FIG. 65B to the effect control board 9012 according to the determination result (determination result) by the process of step S90413. After setting for setting (step S90414), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

  Subsequent to the start winning determination process (step S90101), the CPU 90103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S90110 to S90117 according to the value of the special view process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 (See Figure 62).

  The special symbol normal processing in step S90110 is processing to be executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "0". The special symbol normal processing includes processing of determining (predetermining) whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is to be “big hit” before the variable display result is derived and displayed. In the special symbol normal processing, when the variable display result is determined in advance, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "1".

  The variation pattern setting process of step S90111 is a process that is executed when the value of the special process process flag is "1". The fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a fluctuation pattern, a setting process for transmitting a fluctuation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, a first fluctuation start command (or a second fluctuation start command), and the like. There is. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "2".

  The special symbol variation process of step S90112 is a process executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "2". The special symbol variation process is a process of causing the special symbol to be varied (variable display) in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B, and an elapsed time after the start of variation is a special figure variation time (FIG. 55) It includes the process of determining whether or not it has reached. In the special symbol variation processing, when the elapsed time after the start of variation reaches the special figure variation time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3".

  The special symbol stopping process in step S90113 is a process that is executed when the value of the special drawing process flag is "3". In the special symbol stop process, the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, and the process of stopping (deriving) the confirmed special symbol is displayed or the big hit flag is turned off. A process for transitioning the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as a process to be executed in the case where the game is executed (when it is determined in advance that the variable display result in the special symbol normal process (step S90110) is "miss") As a process to be executed when is in the on state (if the variable display result is determined to be "big hit" in advance, it includes a setting process etc. for sending a hit start designation command (fanfare command) . In the special symbol stop process, when the big hit flag is off, the value of the special process process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the big hit flag is on, the special process process flag Update the value of to "4".

  The big hit opening pre-processing of step S90114 is processing to be executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “4”. The big hit opening pre-processing is a process that performs setting for opening the big winning opening (for example, setting of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 9082 for the big winning opening door for opening the big winning opening, etc.) , And a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command and the like. In the big hit opening pre-processing, the value of the special drawing process flag is updated to "5".

  The big hit open processing in step S90115 is a processing that is executed when the value of the special processing process flag is “5”. The big hit opening process is large based on whether the elapsed time after opening the big winning opening has passed a predetermined time or whether the number of gaming balls detected by the count switch 9023 has reached a predetermined number, etc. A process of determining the timing for returning the winning opening from the open state to the closing state, and setting for closing the big winning opening (for example, for the solenoid 9082 for the winning opening door for closing the big winning opening It includes a process of setting a solenoid drive signal and the like, a setting process of transmitting a notification command and the like after opening the special winning opening, and the like. In the big hit open processing, the value of the special processing process flag is updated to "6".

  The big hit opening post process of step S90116 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is “6”. The big hit opening post-processing is processing to determine whether or not the number of executions of the round with the big winning opening opened has reached the maximum winning opening opening number of times, or when the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value has not been reached The process to be executed includes a setting process for transmitting a special winning opening open notification command, and a setting process for transmitting a hit ending designation command as a process to be executed when the special winning opening opening frequency reaches the maximum value. It is. In the big hit opening post processing, when the number of rounds execution has not reached the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and when reaching the maximum winning opening opening number maximum value Update the value of the special drawing process flag to "7".

  The big hit end process of step S90117 is a process executed when the value of the special process process flag is "7". The big hit end process is a process of determining whether or not the big hit end production waiting time (waiting time corresponding to the execution period of the ending production) has elapsed, or a process to be executed when the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed It includes a process of setting the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 to a high probability high base state, a process of setting the number of times of ST, and the number of times of time saving. In the big hit end process, when the waiting time corresponding to the execution period of ending effect has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0” which is the initial value.

  In the big hit open process (step S90115), the big hit open post process (step S90116), the big hit open pre process (step S90114), the big hit end process (step S90117), when the count switch 9023 is turned on, the big win The transmission setting for transmitting a mouth winning notice command is included.

  FIG. 68 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol normal processing (step S90110). In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 68, the CPU 90103 first determines whether the total number of pending storages is "0" (step S90230). For example, in the process of step S90230, the total suspension storage number count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 90154 may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is "0".

  When the total number of pending storages is other than “0” in step S 90230 (step S 90230; NO), it is determined whether the pending data to be digested first (the pending data winning first) is the second pending information. It determines (step S90231). For example, in the process of step S90231, whether or not the information stored corresponding to the hold number “1” in the hold specific information storage unit 90151C is information indicating that it is the second hold information. It may be determined.

  When the hold data to be first digested in step S90231 is the second hold information (step S90231; YES), the hold stored in the second special view hold storage unit 90151B corresponding to the hold number "1". As data, a random number value MR1 'for determining the special view display result and a random number value MR2' for determining the big hit type are read out (step S90232). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S90232, for example, the second special storage storage count is updated by subtracting 1 by subtracting the second storage storage count value by one, and the second special storage storage is updated. Holding data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to holding numbers “2” to “4”) in part 90151B is one entry at a time (Step S90233). Further, in the process of step S90233, the information stored in the entry lower than the hold number “1” in the hold specification information storage unit 90151C is shifted upward by one entry. In addition, in the process of step S90233, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter to be decremented by one. Following the process of step S90233, the variation special figure designation buffer value which is the stored value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to "2" (step S90234).

  When the suspension data to be first digested in step S90231 is not the second suspension information (step S90231; NO), the suspension data stored corresponding to the suspension number "1" in the first special map suspension storage unit 90151A Then, the special figure display result determination random number value MR1 'and the big hit type random number value MR2' are read out (step S90236). The numerical data read out at this time may be stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation, and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of step S90236, the first TOC pending memory number is updated to be decremented by 1, for example, by subtracting and updating the first pending memory number count value, etc. Holding data indicating random number values MR1 ′ to MR3 ′ stored in entries lower than the holding number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to holding numbers “2” to “4”) in part 90151A is one entry at a time (Step S90237). Further, in the process of step S90237, the information stored in the entry lower than the pending number "1" in the pending specific information storage unit 90151C is shifted upward by one entry. Further, in the process of step S90237, the game control counter setting unit 90154 updates the total suspension storage count count value stored in the total suspension storage count counter to be decremented by one. Following the process of step S90237, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S90238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S90234 and S90238, the CPU 90103 sets (selects) a special figure display result determination table corresponding to the current gaming state (step S90239). For example, the CPU 90103 may set the special view display result determination table, as in step S90405 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. Subsequently, the CPU 90103 executes the special drawing based on the numerical data indicating the special drawing display result determination random number value MR1 'stored in the random number buffer for variation and the special drawing display result determination table set in step S90239. The display result is determined (step S90240). In the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 sets the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 'and the value set in step S90239 as in step S90406 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. The special chart display result (“big hit” or “miss”) is made by comparing each determination value individually assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” in the special chart display result determination table data. What should I decide?

  Following the process of step S90240, the CPU 90103 determines whether the special-image display result determined in step S90240 is a "big hit" (step S90241). If it is determined in step S90241 that the game is a "big hit" (step S90241; YES), the CPU 90103 sets the big hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 90152 to the on state (step S90242). The big hit flag is cleared (reset) to the off state in the big hit end process of step S90117. Following the process of step S90242, the CPU 90103 executes a big hit type determination process (S90244). The big hit type determination process of step S90244 is the same as the big hit type determination process executed in step S90407 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. Following the jackpot type determination process of step S90244, the CPU 90103 is, for example, a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 90155 corresponding to the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S90244. A big hit type buffer value is set (step S90245). That is, it stores what the jackpot type determined in the jackpot type determination process of step S 90244 is. As an example, the CPU 90103 sets "1" in the big hit type buffer value if the big hit type determined in the big hit type determination process of step S90244 is "16R positive variation big hit", and if "8R positive variation big hit", the big hit type Set "2" to the buffer value.

  If it is determined in step S90241 that "big hit" is not made (step S90241 (NO)) or after the process of step S90245 is executed, the CPU 90103 displays the special figure display result determined in the process of step S90240, or In the case of a big hit, a determined special symbol is set corresponding to the big hit type determined in the process of step S90244 (step S90248). After setting the finalized special symbol in step S90248, the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" which is a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S90249), and the special symbol normal processing is ended. .

  When the total number of pending storages is "0" at step S90230 (step S90230; YES), the demonstration display setting (step S90250) is executed, and the special symbol normal processing is ended. In the demonstration display setting of step S90250, for example, a customer waiting demonstration specification command for specifying a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image or the like on the image display device 905 is from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 It is determined whether or not it has been sent. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if not sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demonstration display setting is ended.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table referred to in the variation pattern setting process (step S90111). In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 90103 determines a variation category as in the process of step S90413 of the winning random number value determination process (step S90220) shown in FIG. 65A, and a variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation category A determination table is selected (set), and a variation pattern is determined using the selected variation pattern determination table. For example, when the CPU 90103 determines the fluctuation category "PA2 '", the CPU 90103 selects the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category "PA2'" shown in FIG. When the numerical data indicating MR5 'is in the range of "0" to "39", the variation pattern "PA2'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "40" to "99", the variation pattern "PA2'-" Decide 2 ". Further, for example, when the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation category “PA3 ′”, the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern determination table corresponding to the fluctuation category “PA3 ′” shown in FIG. When the numerical data representing the numerical value MR5 'is in the range of "0" to "79", the fluctuation pattern "PA3'-1" is determined, and when it is in the range of "80" to "99", the fluctuation pattern "PA3' -2 "is determined. The same applies to the case where other variation categories are determined.

  According to FIG. 55, FIG. 56, FIG. 66, FIG. 67 and FIG. 69 etc., the relationship between the normal reach and the jackpot expected degree of super reach is super reach β> super reach α> normal reach. Also, in the normal reach, the probability of big hit is higher in the case with the pseudo-series fluctuation than in the case without the pseudo-series fluctuation. In Super Reach α (as well as Super Reach β), the probability of big hit is higher in the case with pseudo-stationary fluctuation than in the case without pseudo-stationary fluctuation, and when the number of pseudo-stations is two, it is one Expectations are higher than in the case.

  The random number value MR5 'for determining the variation pattern may be extracted at the time of execution of the process, or in the start winning process (steps S90208 and S90211) as in the case of the random number value MR3' for variation category determination. It may be extracted in step S90217 and used as reserve data, and may be read out in step S90232 (or step S90236) of the special symbol processing (step S90110).

  In the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (the number of definite variations) and the set value of the number of time reductions of 70 are the same value (both 70 times). The number of times may be different from the setting value of 70 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit and the set value of the number of STs (number of probability variation) in the 16R probability variation big hit are the same value However, the setting value of the number of ST (number of probability variations) in the case of 8R probability variation big hit may be different from the set value of the number of ST (number of probability variation) in 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the present embodiment, the setting value of the number of time reductions in the case of the 8R probability variation big hit and the setting value of the time reduction number in the case of the 16R probability variation bigness are made the same value (both 70 times). The set value of the number of time savings may be different from the set value of the number of times reduced for the 16R probability variation big hit.

  Next, the operation of the effect control board 9012 will be described.

  FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process. In the effect control board 9012, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 90120 is activated to execute an effect control main process as shown in FIG. 70.

  In the effect control main process shown in FIG. 70, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S9071), clears the RAM 90122, sets various initial values, and loads the effect control board 9012 Performs register settings and the like for the CTC (counter / timer circuit). Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state each time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the register setting of CTC. If it is determined that the timer interrupt flag is not in the on state (step S9072; NO), the process of step S9072 is repeatedly performed and the process waits.

  Further, on the side of the effect control board 9012, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command or the like from the main board 9011 occurs separately from the timer interrupt. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 9011 is turned on. If an interrupt occurs because the effect control INT signal is turned on, the effect control CPU 90120 automatically sets the interrupt disable state, but an interrupt occurs when using a CPU that does not automatically cause the interrupt disable state. It is desirable to issue a prohibited instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 90120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt processing, among the input ports included in I / O 90125, control to be an effect control command or the like from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from main substrate 9011 via relay substrate 9015. Capture the signal.

  The effect control command fetched at this time is stored, for example, in a effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 90194. As an example, when the effect control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the effect control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the interrupt permission and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

  When it is determined in step S9072 that the timer interrupt flag is in the on state (step S9072; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 clears the timer interrupt flag to be in the off state (step S9073), The command analysis processing is executed (step S9074). In the command analysis process executed in step S9074, for example, the various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 90100 of the main substrate 9011 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer are read and then read. Settings, control, and the like corresponding to the output control command issued are performed.

  Following the command analysis process of step S9074, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an error notification process (step S9075). In the error notification processing in step S 9075, for example, an error notification corresponding to the magnetic abnormality notification designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 is performed for an act of causing the game ball to be illegally guided to the winning opening using a magnet.

  Following the error notification process of step S 9075, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control process process (step S 9076). In the effect control process of step S 9076, various effect devices (for example, the image display device 905, the speaker 908, the lamp 909, the movable role object 9017, etc.) are used based on the effect control command etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011. Judgment, determination, setting, and the like related to the rendering operation are performed.

  Following the effect control process of step S9076, the effect control CPU 90120 executes effect random number updating process (step S9077). In the effect random number updating process of step S9077, for example, at least a part of effect random numbers used on the side of the effect control board 9012 is updated by software. As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 may use software to update numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 90193. Thereafter, the process returns to the process of step S9072.

  Note that, on the side of the effect control board 9012, the interrupt for receiving the effect control command and the like from the main board 9011 has been described as an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 9011 is turned on. However, the method of generating an interrupt for receiving the effect control command or the like is not limited to the above. For example, an interrupt for receiving a rendering control command or the like may be generated in response to an interrupt request by the first bit of serial communication.

  FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S9074). In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 71, the effect control CPU 90120 first receives the command from the main substrate 9011 transmitted via the relay substrate 9015 by confirming the storage content of the effect control command reception buffer or the like. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90501). If it is determined that there is no reception command (step S90501; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 ends the command analysis process.

  If it is determined in step S90501 that there is a reception command (step S90501; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502). . Note that the effect control CPU 90120 may check, for example, MODE data of the received command and specify the type of the received command (see FIG. 53).

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the command is the first starting opening winning notice command (step S90502; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a first hold storage number notification waiting time (step S90503). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set an initial timer value predetermined as the reception waiting time of the first hold storage number notification command in the command reception control timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 90192.

  If it is determined in step S90502 that the received command is not the first starting opening winning notification command (step S90502; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the second starting opening winning notification command. Step S90504. If it is determined in step S90504 that the command is the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets a second pending storage number notification waiting time (step S90505). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 may set, in the command reception control timer, a timer initial value predetermined as a reception waiting time of the second hold storage number notification command.

  If it is determined in step S90504 that the received command is not the second starting opening winning notification command (step S90504; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step S90506). ). If it is determined in step S90506 that the received command is not a symbol designation command (step S90506; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is a variation category command (step S90507). If it is determined in step S90507 that the received command is not a change category command (step S90507; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the received command is the first pending storage count notification command (step S90508). ). If it is determined in step S90508 that the command is the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; YES), the first pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90509).

  If it is determined in step S90508 that the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command (step S90508; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is the second pending storage number notification command. (Step S90510). If it is determined in step S90510 that the command is the second pending storage number notification command (step S90510; YES), the second pending storage number notification waiting time, for example, by initializing the clock operation by the command reception control timer. Is cleared (step S90511).

  When it is determined in step S90506 that it is a symbol designation command (step S90506 (YES)), or when it is determined in step S90507 that it is a variation category command (step S90507 (YES)), step S90503, step S90505, After executing any of the processes of steps S90509 and S90511, the effect control CPU 90120 stores the received command at the top of the free space in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A (step S90512). Following the process of step S90512, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90510 that the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command (step S90510; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether the reception command is a fluctuation pattern specification command. (Step S90513). When it is determined that it is a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; YES), the CPU for effect control 90201 stores the fluctuation pattern designation command in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90515). . Following the process of step S90515, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  If it is determined in step S90513 that the received command is not a fluctuation pattern designation command (step S90513; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 performs setting or the like according to other respective received commands (step S90518). For example, when the reception command is a gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 may analyze the gaming state designation command to specify the current gaming state. Following the process of step S90518, the process returns to the process of step S90501.

  FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S9076). In the effect control process shown in FIG. 72, the effect control CPU 90120 first executes an effect determination process at the time of winning (step S90150). In the prize effect determination process, the effect control CPU 90120 checks the contents stored in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A, and determines whether the start opening prize notification command is received as a reception command or A process of determining various effects is executed.

  Following the effect determination process for winning (step S90150), the effect control CPU 90120 selects one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191 or the like. And run.

  The variable display start waiting process of step S90170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” which is the initial value. The variable display start waiting process displays an image based on whether or not the first variation start command (or the second variation start command), the variation pattern designation command, the variable display result notification command, etc. transmitted from the main substrate 9011 are received. It includes a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of the decorative design in the device 905. In the variable display start waiting process, when it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol is to be started (that is, when the fluctuation pattern designation command or the like is received), the value of the rendering process flag is updated to "1".

  The variable display start setting process of step S 90171 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. The variable display start setting process is a setting for performing variable display of the decorative symbol in the image display device 905 corresponding to variable display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 904A or the second special symbol display device 904B (for example, , Setting for performing display operation such as holding display, active display, etc. (for example, processing of performing effect control pattern corresponding to fluctuation pattern (special figure fluctuation time), setting of value of fluctuation time timer, etc.) And the like, etc. are included. In the variable display start setting process, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

  The variable display effect process of step S90172 is a process performed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". During the variable display effect processing, whether or not the variable time timer set in the variable display start setting processing (step S90171) has timed out (the elapsed time after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 905 special figure fluctuation time Processing to determine whether or not In the variable display effect process, when the fluctuation time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The process for waiting for a special drawing in step S90173 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "3." Special processing per wait processing is the processing to be executed when the finalized decoration symbol is "missing" When the variation gaming state setting process to set the gaming state of the pachinko machine 901, or when the finalized ornament symbol is "big hit" The processing to be performed includes processing for performing setting for performing fanfare production (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to the fanfare production, etc.). In the waiting process per special drawing, when the finalized decoration symbol is "loss", the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value, and when the finalized ornament pattern is "big hit", Update the value to "4".

  The big hit start process of step S90174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "4". The jackpot start process is a process of determining whether or not the big winning opening open notification command has been received, or a process being executed when the large winning opening open notification command is received, an effect being released (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to an effect being released, etc.) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the open state. In the big hit start process, when the big winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”.

  The process in round of step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "5". Processing during the round is processing to determine whether or not the notification command after the big winning a prize opening has been received, and the processing being executed when the notification command after the big winning a prize opening is received is closed effect (special variable winning in each round It includes a process for setting (for example, setting of an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect being closed) for performing an effect to be performed when the ball device 907 is in the closed state. In the process during the round, when the notification command after the opening of the special winning opening is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “6”.

  The post-round process in step S90176 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". The round post-processing performs processing during open processing as processing to determine whether or not the special winning opening open notification command or hit termination designation command has been received, or processing to be executed when the special winning opening opening notification command is received. Processing for performing setting (for example, setting of a production control pattern corresponding to an effect during opening) or setting for performing ending effect as processing to be executed when a hit end designation command is received (for example, for ending effect) It includes the process of setting the value of the corresponding effect control pattern, the value of the ending effect execution time timer, and the like. In the round post process, when the special winning opening open notification command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", and when the hit end designation command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "7" Do.

  The jackpot end post-processing in step S90177 is processing executed when the value of the rendering process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end post-processing, whether the ending effect execution time timer set in the round post-processing (step S90176) has timed out (whether the elapsed time after starting the execution of the ending effect in the image display device 5 has reached the set time And the like are included. In the big hit end post processing, when the ending effect execution time timer times out, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning. In the prize effect determination process shown in FIG. 73, the effect control CPU 90120 first checks the stored contents in the start winning reception command buffer 90194A (step S90151), and uses the first starting opening winning combination designation command as a new reception command. Is determined (step S90152). When it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90152; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 receives the second starting opening winning combination designation command as a new reception command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S90154). If it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command has not been received (step S90154; NO), the effect determination process at the time of winning is ended.

  If it is determined in step S90152 that the first starting opening winning combination designation command has been received (step S90152; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a short time state (high probability high base state) (step S90155). If it is determined that the time saving state is not set (step S90155: NO), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a holding effect determination process (step S90160). In the holding effect determination process of step S90160 (the same as the holding effect determining process of step S90163), a process for determining a hold effect, an active display effect, an action effect (hold action failure effect, hold action failure effect etc), etc. include. Details will be described later.

  After executing the hold presentation determination process (step S90160), the effect control CPU 90120 stores the determination content of the hold presentation determination process (step S90161). Specifically, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the contents of the process of determining the holding effect etc. in association with the buffer number of the prefetch notice buffer 90194B corresponding to the buffer number of the start winning in the start winning receive command buffer 90194A. Remember.

  After executing the processing of step S90161, the effect control CPU 90120 adds a new hold display to the start winning storage display area 905H based on the determination content stored in step S90161 (step S90162). More specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the start control memory display area 905H to display an on-hold display according to the display mode at the time of addition stored in association with the buffer number of the above-described advance notice buffer 90194B. It is determined in the holding effect etc. determination process by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the set effect control pattern to the VDP of the display control unit 90123 etc. The hold display displayed in the display mode at the time of the addition is added to the start prize storage display area 905H. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  When it is determined in step S90154 that the second starting opening winning combination designation command is received (step S90154; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 refers to, for example, the high base flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 90191. Then, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state (high probability high base state) (step S90156). If it is determined that the time saving state (high probability high base state) is determined (step S90156: YES), the effect control CPU 90120 executes a holding effect determination process (step S90163). The holding effect etc. determination process of step S90163 is the same as the holding effect etc. determination process of step S90160.

  After executing the on-hold effect determination process (step S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the processes of step S90163, step S90164, and step S90165, and ends the effect determination process at the time of winning. The processes of steps S90163, S90164, and S90165 are similar to the processes of processes of steps S90160, S90161, and S90162, respectively.

  If it is determined in step S90155 that it is in the time saving state (step S90155: YES), or if it is determined in step S90156 that it is not in the time saving state (step S90156: NO) (S90166). Specifically, similar to the case where it is determined that the hold effect is not performed in the hold effect determination process (steps S90160 and S90163), the effect control CPU 90120 displays the normal display mode (at the time of addition and after each shift) For example, information indicating white) is stored, and a hold display displayed in a normal display manner is added to the start winning storage display area 905H. Then, the effect determination process at the time of winning is finished.

  FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process (S90171). In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 74, the effect control CPU 90120 first reads, for example, the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 or the like, and the special view display result is It is determined whether it is "" (step S90522).

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is "loss" (step S90522; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that constitutes the lost combination (the final stop symbol) Step S90524). As an example, the effect control CPU 90120 is a random number value updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193 (for example, a random number value for left fixed symbol determination, a random number value for right fixed symbol determination, Numeric data representing a random number value for final symbol determination) is extracted, and a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a left final symbol determination table, a right final symbol determination table, a central final symbol decision table, etc.) stored beforehand in the ROM 90121 etc. By referring to etc., a decorative symbol to be finally displayed in a stopped state in each of the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R is determined as a combination of finalized decorative symbols constituting a lost combination.

  When it is determined in step S90522 that the special view display result is not "losing" (step S90522; NO), that is, when the special view display result is "big hit (16R positive variation big hit, 8R positive variation big hit)", for effect control The CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decorative symbols constituting the big hit combination (step S90528). As one example, the effect control CPU 90120 extracts numerical data indicating a random value (for example, a random value for determining a big hit determination) updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 90193, and the ROM 90121 Etc. by referring to a predetermined symbol determination table (for example, a big hit determination symbol determination table etc.) stored in advance as a combination of the decoration design symbols constituting the big hit combination, the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, 905R Decide on the decoration pattern that will be finally displayed stop. In addition, depending on which type of big hit type (16R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit) is, and the presence or absence of the promotion effect, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the combination of the finalized decoration symbols that make up the big hit combination Good.

  After executing either the process of step S90524 or the process of step S90528, the effect control CPU 90120 executes a button development effect determination process (step S90529). The button development effect determination process includes a process of determining whether or not a button development effect (described later) is performed, and a process of determining a presentation mode of the button development effect when it is determined to execute the button development effect. Details of the button development effect determination process will be described later.

  After executing the process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 executes the reserve digest process (step S90530). Specifically, when the hold display displayed at the left end of the start winning storage display area 905H is moved (shifted) to the active display area AHA 'and there is another hold display in the start winning storage display area 905H, Move to the left about

  After executing the holding and digesting process of step S90530, the effect control CPU 90120 executes an effect control pattern set process (step S90532). For example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation as a usage pattern. That is, the effect control CPU 90120 sets the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main substrate 9011 as the usage pattern. Also, for example, the effect control CPU 90120 sets an effect control pattern corresponding to the button development effect determined in the button development effect determination process of step S90529 as a use pattern. That is, when it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed in the button development effect determination process of step S90529, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the effect mode (for example, button development effect pattern to be described later) etc. In the process of step S90532, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode or the like of the button expansion effect determined in the button expansion effect determination process of step S90529 is set as a use pattern. Thereby, in the variable display effect process (S90172), the display operation in the display area of the image display device 905 is performed according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specification command and the determination contents of the button development effect determination process (S90532) (See, for example, FIGS. 80 to 88).

  After executing the process of step S90532, the CPU 90120 for effect control sets an initial value of the effect control process timer of the process data of the effect control pattern set in step S90532 (step S90534), and starts the effect control process timer ( Step S90535) Control of the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 905 in accordance with the contents of the process data (step S90536). Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time (the special figure fluctuation time shown in FIG. 55) specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S90537).

  Subsequently, the effect control CPU 90120 digests the command stored in the start winning combination reception command buffer 90194 A (step S 90538). Specifically, the effect control CPU 90120 deletes the command (one set) stored in the area corresponding to the smallest buffer number among the commands associated with the start winning winning reception command buffer 90194A, and deletes it. The commands stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number larger than the buffer number of the command are shifted while maintaining the winning order. Further, in the process of step S90538, deletion or shift of information stored in the prefetch notice buffer 90194B provided in the RAM 90122 or the like is also performed according to command deletion or shift. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the variable display effect process (step S90539), and the variable display start setting process is ended.

  Hereinafter, the button development effect will be described in detail. The button development effect is an effect of changing (developing) an image (a button image imitating the push button 9031 B, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031 A) corresponding to the button etc. (push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A) . Hereinafter, an image corresponding to a button or the like may be referred to as a “button or the like image” or a “button or the like display”.

  The effect control CPU 90120 changes the display mode of an image such as a button of one type (for example, changes the display mode (display color, display size) of a button image), or the button of one type as button development effect. The image is changed to an image of another type of button (eg, a button image is changed to a stick controller image).

  In the following description, a small sized white button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “small button (white)” or a “first mode” as an image such as a button. In addition, a large sized white button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “large button (white)” or a “second aspect”. In addition, a large-sized red button image imitating the push button 9031 B may be referred to as a “large button (red)” or a “third aspect”. Further, a stick controller image imitating the stick controller 9031A may be referred to as a "stick" or a "fourth aspect".

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of a button development effect category and a button development effect pattern in the present embodiment. The button development presentation pattern indicates a presentation mode (display mode) of the button development presentation. The button development presentation category is a name when the button development presentation patterns are classified (aggregated) by type. In other words, the button development presentation category is a group name of each group including one or more button development presentation patterns categorized into common groups.

  In FIG. 75, “initial” is an initial display. "Final" is the final display. The “timing 1” is a first timing at which an image such as a button can change. The “timing 2” is a second timing at which an image such as a button can change. The “timing 3” is a third timing at which an image such as a button can change. Note that “timing 1”, “timing 2”, and “timing 3” may be different according to the variation pattern.

  Further, in FIG. 75 (also in the other drawings), “no change” indicates that there is no change in the image such as a button. "Weak change" indicates that there is a one-step change (one-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, "weak change (first → second)" is a one-step change from "first mode" to "second mode", that is, "small button (white)" to "large button (white)" Indicates that there is a change to The "weak change (second → third)" is a one-step change from the "second mode" to the "third mode", that is, the change from "large button (white)" to "large button (red)" It indicates that there is. "Weak change (third → fourth)" indicates that there is a one-step change from "third mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (red)" to "stick" ing. The "intermediate change" indicates that there is a two-step change (two-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, the "middle change (first to third)" is a two-step change from the "first mode" to the "third mode", that is, "small button (white)" to "large button (red)" Indicates that there is a change to "Medium change (second → fourth)" indicates that there is a two-step change from "second mode" to "fourth mode", that is, a change from "large button (white)" to "stick" ing. The "strong change" indicates that there is a three-step change (three-step change) of an image such as a button. Specifically, “strong change (first to fourth)” is a three-step change from “first mode” to “fourth mode”, that is, change from “small button (white)” to “stick” Indicates that there is a

  In FIG. 75, the button development effect category “BH1” has the “final” “first mode (small button (small button ( "White))", is a button development effect category. The button development presentation pattern "BH1-1" belongs to the button development presentation category "BH1".

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH1-1", the button etc. image does not change at any of timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3. Therefore, the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH1-1" is In both the first period (“initial”, ie, before “timing 1”) and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) A period of 4 (“final”, that is, “after timing 3”) is also the “first mode (small button (white))”.

  The button development effect category "BH2" is a button in which an image such as a button weakly changes at any one of three timings and "final" becomes "second mode (large button (white))". It is a development presentation category. The button development effect category "BH2" includes a button development effect pattern "BH2-1" having a weak change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH2-2" having a weak change at timing 2, and a timing change that is weak at timing 3. There is a button development effect pattern "BH2-3" that has a change.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH2-1", the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3. Therefore, the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH2-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In the second period (timing 3) and the fourth period (after timing 3), the second mode (large button (white)) is displayed.

  The button development effect category "BH3a" is a button in which an image such as a button weakly changes at any two timings out of three timings and "final" becomes "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development presentation category. In this embodiment, a button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" having a weak change at timing 1 and timing 3 and a button development effect pattern having a weak change at timing 2 and timing 3 in the button development effect category "BH3a" "BH3a-2" belongs.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1," the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1 and timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button etc. image by the button development performance pattern "BH3a-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In 2 "to" timing 3 ", the" second mode (large button (white)) "is selected, and in the fourth period (" timing 3 "and thereafter), the" third mode (large button (red)) "is performed.

  The button development effect category "BH3b" is a button in which an image such as a button changes in middle at any one of three timings and "final" becomes "third mode (large button (red))". It is a development presentation category. The button development effect category "BH3b" includes a button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" having a middle change at timing 1, a button development effect pattern "BH3b-2" having a middle change at timing 2, and a middle at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH3b-3" that has a change.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1", since the image of the button etc. changes in the middle at timing 1 and does not change at timing 2 or timing 3, the image of the button etc. by the button development effect pattern "BH3b-1" is In the first period (before “timing 1”), the “first aspect (small button (white))”, and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period (“timing”) In the second period to “timing 3” and the fourth period (after “timing 3”), “third mode (large button (red))” is displayed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4a", the image of the button etc. changes in the middle in any of the two timings of the three timings, and the image of the button etc. weakly changes in the later timing. This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth aspect (stick)". In this embodiment, the button development effect category "BH4a" has a middle change at timing 1 and a weak change at timing 3 with the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" and a middle change at timing 2 and a weak change at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH4a-2" that belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1," the button etc. image changes in the middle at timing 1, weakly changes at timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" The button etc. image becomes the “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "third mode (large button (red))" is selected, and in the fourth period ("timing 3" or later), the "fourth mode (stick)" is performed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4b", the image of the button etc. weakly changes at earlier timings at any two timings of the three timings, the image of the button etc. changes middle at later timings, and the "final" is This is a button development effect category that is the "fourth aspect (stick)". In this embodiment, the button development effect category “BH4b” has a weak change at timing 1 and a middle change at timing 3 and a button development effect pattern “BH4b-1”, a weak change at timing 2 and a middle change at timing 3 There is a button development effect pattern "BH4b-2" that belongs to.

  For example, in the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1," the button etc. image weakly changes at timing 1, changes in middle at timing 3 and does not change at timing 2, so the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" The button etc. image becomes the “first mode (small button (white))” in the first period (before “timing 1”), and the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”) or the third period In the period ("timing 2" to "timing 3"), the "second mode (large button (white))" is selected, and in the fourth period ("timing 3" or later), the "fourth mode (stick)" is performed.

  In the button development effect category "BH4c", the image of a button or the like strongly changes at any one of three timings (timing 3 in the present embodiment), and "final" is the "fourth aspect (stick) This is a button development presentation category. In the present embodiment, the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” having a strong change at timing 3 belongs to the button development effect category “BH4c”.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1," the image of the button etc. changes strongly at timing 3 and does not change at timing 1 or timing 2. Therefore, the image of the button etc. by the button development effect pattern "BH4a-1" is In the period 1 (before “timing 1”), the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2”), and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3”) (White)) ”, and the“ fourth aspect (stick) ”in the fourth period (after“ timing 3 ”).

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of button development effect determination processing (S90529). FIG. 77 is an explanatory view for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect and the like. FIG. 78 is an explanatory view for explaining the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern. In FIG. 77A (as well as in the other drawings), the variation pattern “PA4′-X” is the variation pattern of super reach α (loss) (specifically, the variation pattern “PA4′-1” “ PA4'-2 "or" PA4'-3 ". The fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (loss) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns "PA5'-1", "PA5'-2" and "PA5'-3") is there. The variation pattern "PB4'-X" is a variation pattern of super reach α (big hit) (specifically, one of variation patterns "PB4'-1", "PB4'-2", and "PB4'-3"). is there. The fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X" is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β (big hit) (specifically, any of fluctuation patterns "PB5'-1", "PB5'-2", "PB5'-3") is there.

  In the button development effect determination process shown in FIG. 76, the effect control CPU 90120 first determines whether or not the button development effect is to be performed (S90550). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not to execute the button development effect at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 77 (A). .

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”. The table stores numeric values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect execution presence / absence determination (for example, random number values updated in the effect random number update process (S9077)), “No execution” and “No execution”. It should be allocated at a ratio of 5:95 to “present”.

  Further, for example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA 5 ′ ′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect at a rate of 10%. For example, the ROM 90121 refers to a button development effect execution presence / absence determination table for super reach β (loss), which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA5′-X”. A numerical value to be stored and to be compared with the random value for determining whether or not to execute the button development effect execution may be allocated to the table at a ratio of 10:90 between “without execution” and “with execution”.

  In the effect control CPU 90120, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern of the super reach ("PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 ' Whenever the variation pattern ("PA1'-X", "PA2'-X", "PA3'-X", "PB1'-X", "PB3'-X") is other than "-X") Decide not to execute the rendition.

  According to FIG. 77 (A), when the button development rendition is executed, since it is always a super reach, the case where the button development rendition is executed is higher than the case where the button development rendition is not executed.

  Further, when in the low certainty state, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is performed in the super reach α is (probability of being “performed in“ PB 4 ′ −X ”) × (low certainty state” Probability of becoming “PB4′-X” at a certain time) / {(probability of being “performed” with “PB4′-X”) × (probability of becoming “PB4′-X” when in low probability state) It is about 18.5%, which is obtained from + (probability of being "executed" in "PA4'-X") x (probability of being "PA4'-X" in the low probability state)}. Note that the probability of being "execution" in "PB4'-X" is 15%, and the probability of being "execution" in "PA4'-X" is 5% (Fig. 77 (A)). Also, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 56), the probability of becoming “PB 4′-X” in the low probability state is (1/199) × (30/100) In the low probability state, the probability of becoming “PA4′−X” is (198/199) × (2/100) (see FIGS. 66 and 67). On the other hand, when the super reach α is executed in the low probability state, the probability of becoming a big hit is “PB 4′−X” in the low probability state. It is about 7%, which is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB4'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA4'-X" when in the low probability state. From the above, when the button development effect is performed in the super reach α, the big hit expectation is higher than in the case where it is not performed.

  Also, when in the low certainty state, the jackpot expectation when the button development effect is performed in the super reach β is (probability of being “performed in“ PB5′-X ”) × (low certainty state) Probability of becoming “PB5′-X” at a certain time) / {(probability of being “performed” with “PB5′-X”) × (probability of becoming “PB5′-X” when in low probability state) It is about 50%, which is obtained from + (probability of being "performed" with "PA5'-X") x (probability of being "PA5'-X" when in low probability state) ". Note that the probability of being "execution" in "PB5'-X" is 40%, and the probability of being "execution" in "PA5'-X" is 10% (Fig. 77A). Also, since the jackpot probability in the low probability state is about 1/199 (see FIG. 56), the probability of becoming “PB5′-X” in the low probability state is (1/199) × (50/100) The probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state is (198/199) .times. (1/100) (see FIG. 66, FIG. 67). On the other hand, when the super reach β is executed in the low certainty state, the probability of becoming a hit in the low certainty state is “PB5′−X” probability / (the low certainty state) It is about 20%, which is obtained from the probability of becoming "PB5'-X" + the probability of becoming "PA5'-X" in the low probability state. From the above, when the button development effect is performed in the super reach β, the jackpot expectation is higher than in the case where the button development effect is not performed.

  It returns to FIG. After executing the process of step S90550, the effect control CPU 90120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the button development effect in the process of step S90550 (S90551). If it is determined that the button development effect is not to be executed (step S90551; NO), the button development effect determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the button development effect is to be executed (step S90551; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category (S90552). Specifically, based on the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 77 (B).

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern “PA4′-X”, the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category “BH1” at a rate of 30%, and the button development effect The category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 10%, and the button development presentation category " "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 10%, button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach α (loss), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern “PA4′-X”. In the table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect category determination (for example, random number values updated in effect random number update processing (S9077)) are “BH1” and “BH2”. It may be allocated to "BH3a", "BH3b", "BH4a", "BH4b" and "BH4c" at a ratio of 30: 20: 20: 10: 10: 10: 0.

  For example, when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5 '-X", the effect control CPU 90120 determines the button development effect category "BH1" at a rate of 0%, and the button development The presentation category "BH2" is determined at a ratio of 30%, the button development presentation category "BH3a" is determined at a ratio of 20%, the button development presentation category "BH3b" is determined at a ratio of 20%, and the button development presentation category "BH4a" is determined at a rate of 15%, button development effect category "BH4b" is determined at a rate of 10%, and button development effect category "BH4c" is determined at a rate of 5%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a button development effect category determination table for super reach β (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". In the table, numerical values to be compared with random values for determining the button development effect category are “BH1”, “BH2”, “BH3a”, “BH3b”, “BH4a”, “BH4b”, and “BH4c”. It should be assigned at a rate of 0: 30: 20: 20: 15: 10: 5.

  According to FIG. 77 (B), in the super reach α, the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH4a” or “BH4b” to the determination ratio of the button development effect category “BH1” or “BH2” is the variation pattern “PB4”. The case of '-X' is higher than the case of the variation pattern 'PA4'-X'. That is, in the super reach α, the first mode (small button (white)) or the second mode (large button (white)) in the case where the image such as the button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick). Big hit expectation degree is higher than the case of staying in. Also, in the super reach β, when the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH4a" or "BH4b" or "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development presentation category "BH2" is the variation pattern "PB5'-X" Is higher than the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the super reach β, when the image such as a button finally changes to the fourth mode (stick), the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second mode (large button (white)) stops. In addition, although the relation of the big hit expectation was explained as super reach β> super reach α, according to FIG. 77 (B), the case of becoming super reach β is more than the case of becoming super reach α according to FIG. The image of the button or the like is likely to change to the fourth mode finally. From the above, the jackpot expectation of the fourth embodiment (stick)> jackpot expectation of the third embodiment (large button (red))> jackpot expectation of the second embodiment (large button (red))> first embodiment (small button) (White)) It is a big hit expectation degree of.

  Further, according to FIG. 77 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a" is a variation pattern in the case of the variation pattern "PB4'-X". It is higher than the case of "PA4'-X", and higher in the case of the variation pattern "PB5'-X" than in the case of the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, when "final" becomes "third mode" by one middle change (two-step change) (BH3b), "last" is "third" by two weak changes (one-step change) Big hit expectation is higher than (BH3a) in the case of “embodiment”.

  Also, according to FIG. 77 (B), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4c" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" or "BH4b" is the case where the variation pattern "PB5'-X" is It is higher than the case where it is a fluctuation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, in the case where the “final” becomes the “fourth mode” by one strong change (three-step change) (BH 4 c), one weak change (one-step change) and one moderate change (2 The jackpot expectation is higher than the case (BH4a, BH4b) in which “final” becomes “fourth mode” due to the step change). Further, when the determination pattern of the button development effect category "BH4b" to the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH4a" is the change pattern "PA4'-X" in the case of the change pattern "PB4'-X" The variation pattern "PB5'-X" is higher than the variation pattern "PA5'-X". That is, if the "final" becomes the "third mode" in the order of weak change (one-step change) and middle change (two-step change) (BH4b), middle change (two-step change) and weak change (two-step change) The big hit expectation is higher than the case (BH 4 a) where “final” becomes “third mode” in the order of one step change).

  It returns to FIG. After executing the processing of step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 determines one button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category determined in step S90552 (S90553).

  For example, when the button development effect category "BH2" is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command to be a fluctuation pattern "as shown in FIG. 78 (B). When PA4'-X "or" PA5'-X ", the button development effect pattern" BH2-1 "is determined at a rate of 36%, and the button development effect pattern" BH2-2 "is determined at a rate of 33% When the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" is determined at a rate of 31%, and the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", The button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is determined at a ratio of 31%, and the button development effect pattern "BH2-2" is divided by 33%. In determined, to determine the button development effect pattern "BH2-3" at a rate of 36%. For example, in the ROM 90121, a button development for super reach (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X" A presentation pattern (BH2-X) determination table is stored, and the table is compared with a random value for button development presentation pattern determination (for example, a random value updated in the presentation random number update process (S9077)) The numerical values may be assigned to "BH2-1", "BH2-2" and "BH2-3" at a ratio of 36:33:31. In addition, a button development effect pattern (BH2) for super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X" −X) A determination table is stored, and in the table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are 31 for “BH2-1”, “BH2-2” and “BH2-3”. : 33: 36 may be allocated.

  Further, for example, when the button development effect category “BH3a” is determined in step S90552, the effect control CPU 90120 causes the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command to be a fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 78C. When it is "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined at a rate of 55%, and the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" at a rate of 45% When the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X", the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is decided at a ratio of 45%. The button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" is determined at a rate of 55%. For example, in the ROM 121, a button development for super reach (lost) which is referred to when the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The effect pattern (BH3a-X) determination table is stored, and in the table, the numerical values to be compared with the random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are 55: 45 for "BH 3a-1" and "BH 3a-2". It should be assigned at the rate of In addition, a button development effect pattern for a super reach (big hit), which is referred to when the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X" (BH3a −X) A determination table is stored, and in this table, numerical values to be compared with random numbers for button development effect pattern determination are allocated to “BH3a-1” and “BH3a-2” at a ratio of 45: 55 It should be done.

  When the button development effect category "BH1" is determined in step S90552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH1" is one type (button development effect pattern "BH1-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 78A, the fluctuation patterns designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command are the fluctuation patterns “PA4′-X”, “PA5′-X”, “PB4′-X”, “PB5 ′. Even if it is any of "-X", button development presentation pattern "BH1-1" is determined. When the button development effect category "BH4c" is determined in step S90552, the button development effect pattern belonging to the button development effect category "BH4c" is one type (button development effect pattern "BH4c-1"). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X", "PA5'-X", "PB4'-X", "PB5 '. Even in any of -X, the button development effect pattern "BH4c-1" is determined.

  According to FIG. 78 (B), the determination ratio of button development effect category "BH2-3" to the determination ratio of button development effect pattern "BH2-1" is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-X". Is higher than the variation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". Also, according to FIG. 78 (C), the determination ratio of the button development effect category "BH3a-2" to the determination ratio of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is the variation pattern "PB4'-X" or "PB5'-". The case of -X is higher than the case of the variation pattern "PA4'-X" or "PA5'-X". The same applies to FIGS. 78 (D) to 78 (F). That is, the jackpot expectation is higher in the case where the change is performed at the later timing than in the case where the change is performed at the earlier timing.

  It returns to FIG. After executing the process of step S90553, the effect control CPU 90120 determines an action effect such as a button (simply “action effect” in the drawing) (S90554), and ends the button development effect determination process. More specifically, in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 changes the mode of the image such as the button at each of the timings 1 to 3 (“no change”, “weak change”, “medium change”, “strong change” In accordance with), the presence or absence of the execution of the effect such as the button (and the effect mode in the case of execution) is determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG.

  In the following description, the effect (character appearance) in which the character appears is referred to as "weak action effect" as the button effect or the like performed in the image display device 905, and the effect (cannon) in which the bombardment with a cannon is performed It may be referred to as a medium action effect, and an effect with a lightning strike (a lightning strike) may be referred to as a "strong action effect".

  For example, when the change mode of the image such as the button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is "no change", the effect control CPU 90120 makes 70% of "action effect no" as shown in FIG. 77 (C). Determine the "weak action effect" at a rate of 20%, determine the "medium action effect" at a rate of 10%, and determine the "strong action effect" at a rate of 0%. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a change useless button etc effect effect determination table which is referred to when there is "no change", and the table is compared with a random value for the button etc effect determination. The numerical values may be allocated to “action effect nothing”, “weak action effect”, “medium action effect”, and “strong action effect” at a ratio of 70: 20: 10: 0.

  Further, for example, when the change mode of the image such as a button at a certain timing (timing 1 to 3) is “weak change”, the effect control CPU 90120 sets “action effect nothing” to 20 as shown in FIG. Determine "weak action effect" at 70% rate, "medium action effect" at 8% rate, and "strong action effect" at 2% rate. For example, the ROM 90121 stores a weak change button etc. effect presentation determination table to be referred to when "weak change" is made, and the table is compared with a random value for determining a button etc. effect presentation The numerical values may be allocated to “action effect nothing”, “weak action effect”, “middle effect effect”, and “strong action effect” at a ratio of 20: 70: 8: 2.

  That is, in step S90553, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" is determined, timing 1 is "weak change", timing 2 is "no change", and timing 3 is "medium change". (See FIG. 75), in the process of step S90554, the effect control CPU 90120 determines “action effect non-existence” at a ratio of 20% for button operation effect with respect to “weak change” at timing 1, and “weak operation The effect is determined at a rate of 70%, the medium effect effect is determined at a rate of 8%, and the strong effect effect is determined at a rate of 2%. In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 determines 70% of “action effect none” at a ratio of 70%, and determines “weak action effect” at a ratio of 20% for button effects such as “no change” at timing 2. "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%. In addition, the CPU 90120 for effect control determines “no effect effect” at a rate of 5% and determines “weak effect effect” at a rate of 20% for the button effect etc. with respect to the “intermediate change” at timing 3. "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 55%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 20%. Further, for example, when the button development effect pattern "BH1-1" is determined in step S90553, all of the timings 1 to 3 become "no change" (see FIG. 75), but in the process of step S90554, The effect control CPU 90120 determines 70% of "action effect none" at a ratio of 70% and determines 20% of "weak operation effect" for button effects such as "no change" at each of timings 1 to 3. Then, "Medium action effect" is determined at a rate of 10%, and "strong action effect" is determined at a rate of 0%.

  According to FIG. 77 (C), when the button etc. operation effect (weak operation effect, middle operation effect, strong operation effect) is executed, the image of the button etc. changes (weak change, middle change, Strong change) easy to do. In addition, when the strong action effect is executed, the image of the button etc. always changes (weak change, medium change, strong change), and when the medium effect effect is executed, it is more than when the weak effect effect is executed. Images such as buttons are likely to change (weak change, medium change, strong change). Also, when the strong action presentation is performed, the change is more likely to occur than when the strong action presentation is not performed, and when the medium action presentation is performed, the medium change is more likely to occur than when the intermediate action presentation is not performed, When the weak effect presentation is performed, the change is more likely to occur than when the weak effect presentation is not performed.

  As described above, in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), since the effect control pattern corresponding to the effect mode of the button development effect, etc. is also set as the use pattern, the effect control CPU 90120 performs button development effect Determination contents determined in the determination process (for example, (button development effect pattern), production mode of action effects such as buttons (“action effect none” in “timing 1 to 3”, “weak operation effect”, “middle effect effect”, Information to specify the other of "strong effect presentation" etc. is stored in RAM 90122 etc. In step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), RAM 90122 etc. are referred to, and presentation control corresponding to the presentation aspect etc. of button development presentation The pattern may also be set as a use pattern.

  FIG. 79 (A) is an explanatory view for explaining various periods in the button development effect. Before describing FIG. 79A, “T1” to “T14” illustrated in FIGS. 79 to 88 will be described. "T1" represents the start timing of the fluctuation. "T14" represents the end timing of the change. "T2" represents the timing of reaching the reach. "T3" represents the timing of developing into super reach. Super reach developed from "T3" ends at "T13". That is, "T13" represents the timing at which the result of the super reach (such as winning or losing) is displayed (notified).

  "T4" represents the timing of the start of display of an image such as a button. An image such as a button displayed from "T4" is erased to "T13". That is, "T4" to "T13" are display periods of buttons and the like (display periods of images such as buttons).

  "T6" represents "timing 1" in FIG. "T8" represents "timing 2" in FIG. "T10" represents "timing 3" in FIG. “T5” represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change of the image of the button or the like at the timing 1 (T6) (change nothing, weak change, medium change, strong change) is started. The effects such as the button started at "T5" end at "T6". That is, “T5” to “T6” are execution periods of the button etc. corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 1. "T7" represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change in the image of the button or the like at timing 2 (T8) starts the execution of the effect presentation. The effects such as the button started at "T7" end at "T8". That is, “T7” to “T8” are the execution periods of the button etc. action effect corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 2. “T9” represents the timing at which the button or the like corresponding to the change in the image of the button or the like at timing 3 (T10) starts the execution of the effect presentation. The effects such as the button started at "T9" end at "T10". That is, “T9” to “T10” are the execution periods of the button etc. effect corresponding to the change of the image etc. of the button etc. at the timing 3. Note that "T11" and "T12" will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (A), a part (T11 to T13) of the button etc. display period (T4 to T13) is a valid period (operation is valid) of the button etc. (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) And the other periods (T4 to T11) are ineffective periods (periods in which the operation is not effective) such as a button. That is, "T11" represents the timing at which the operation of the button or the like becomes valid. During the ineffective period (T4 to T11), a "restriction line" is displayed superimposed on an image such as a button as an image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. In addition, during the effective period (T11 to T13), the "control line" is not displayed. That is, the "regulatory line" is erased at "T11".

  A period (T13 to T14) following the button display period (T4 to T13) is a period for displaying the result (e.g., winning or losing). More specifically, when there is no operation during the effective period (T11 to T13), when the effective period ends (T13), an image such as a button is erased and a period following the display period such as a button (T13 to T14) The result is displayed in). On the other hand, when the operation is performed during the effective period, when the operation is performed, the image such as the button is erased, and the result is displayed from the time of the operation. If there is an operation during the effective period, the effective period ends when there is an operation. Note that an effect such as displaying an image such as a button or the like during the effective period (T11 to T13) and displaying a result (such as winning or losing) after the image such as the button is erased may be referred to as "operation effect".

  Each of FIG. 79 (B) to FIG. 81 (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the flow of a specific button development effect.

(Specific example 1)
FIG. 79B shows the flow of the button development effect in the first example. In the specific example 1, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". The effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH1" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH1. “1” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for the button etc. effect to the timing 1 (“No change in“ BH1-1 ””) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH1-1”) Then, "Weak effect effect (character appearance)" is determined for button etc. effect presentation for "No change" (S90554), and "Action for button etc effect presentation for timing 3 (" No change "for" BH1-1 ") It is assumed that "no effect" is decided. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 79B, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH1-1” determined in the first specific example, the image of the button or the like is also displayed in the first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and in the second period (“timing 1”) “Timing 2” / T6 to T8), the third period (“Timing 2” to “Timing 3” / T8 to T10), and the fourth period (“Timing 3” or later / T10 to T13) also have small buttons (white) (See FIG. 75), and in any of the button development effect patterns, a “restriction line” is displayed during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). The button development rendition is executed like. Further, in the first example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for the timing 2 (no change), the character is made to appear in “T7” to “T8” but the image such as the button is not changed (Failure production).

(Specific example 2)
FIG. 80 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the second example. In specific example 2, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PA4'-X". The effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH2" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH2". 1) (S90553), "weak action effect" is determined for the button etc. effect for the timing 1 ("weak change (first to second in the case of BH2-1") "(S90554), timing "No effect presentation" is determined for button effect presentation for 2 ("no change" for "BH2-1") (S90554), button effect presentation for timing 3 ("no change" for "BH2-1") "Weak action effect" is determined for. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 80A, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH2-1” determined in the specific example 2, the button etc. image is “first mode (small button (white) in the first period (before“ timing 1 ”/ T4 to T6) And the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10) or the fourth period (“timing 1” to “timing 2” / T6 to T8). At timing 3 ”or later / T10 to T13), the“ second mode (large button (white)) ”is displayed (see FIG. 75), and in any button development effect pattern, the ineffective period (T4 to T11) In order to display a “regulatory line”, in the second example, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (A). Further, in the second specific example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 1 (weak change), the character is made to appear in “T5” to “T6” and an image such as a button is displayed in “T6”. The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to "the second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step) (success effect). Further, in the second example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (no change), the character is made to appear in “T9” to “T10” but an image such as a button is made in “T10” It has not changed (a failure production).

(Specific example 3)
FIG. 80B shows the flow of the button development effect in the third example. In the specific example 3, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB4'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH3a" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH3a". “2” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for button etc. effect presentation with respect to timing 1 (“No change in BH3a-2”) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH3a-2”) Then, "No effect presentation" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for "weak change (1st → 2nd)" (S90554), and "weak change (2nd → 3rd)" at timing 3 ("BH3a-2") “Weak action effect” is determined for the button etc. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 80B, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH3a-2" determined in the specific example 3, the image such as the button has a first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) and a second period ("timing 1" to " In the “timing 2” / T6 to T8, the “first mode (small button (white))” is selected, and in the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “second mode (large Button (white)), and in the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13), it becomes “third mode (large button (red))” (see FIG. 75), and any button development effect Even in the case of the pattern, in order to display the “control line” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in the third example, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (B). Further, in the third example, since “action effect non-existence” is determined for the timing 2 (weak change), the character etc. is not made to appear in “T7” to “T8”, and the button etc. It is changed (one step change) from the mode (small button (white)) to the "second mode (large button (white))". Further, in the third example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 3 (weak change), characters are made to appear in “T9” to “T10” and images such as buttons are displayed in “T10”. Change from “second mode (large button (white))” to “third mode (large button (red))” (changed by one step) (success effect).

(Specific example 4)
FIG. 81 (A) shows the flow of the button development effect in the fourth example. In the fourth example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X". Further, the effect control CPU 90120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4b" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH4b". Decide -1 "(S90553)," Weak effect presentation "is determined for button etc effect presentation for timing 1 (" Weak change (1st → 2nd in BH4b-1 ")" (S90554), timing "No effect presentation" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for 2 ("no change" for "BH4b-1") (S90554), and "intermediate change (second to fourth)" for timing 3 ("BH4b-1") It is assumed that "middle effect representation" is determined for the button etc. The determined content is set in step S90532 of the variable display start setting process (S90171), and as shown in FIG. 81A, the button development effect is executed.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern "BH4b-1" determined in the specific example 4, the image such as the button is "first mode (small button (white)" in the first period (before "timing 1" / T4 to T6) In the second period (“timing 1” to “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and in the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10) ”. Button (white)), and in the fourth period (after “timing 3” / T10 to T13), the “fourth mode (stick)” (see FIG. 75), and any button development effect pattern In the fourth embodiment, the button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81A in order to display the “regulatory line” during the ineffective period (T4 to T11). Further, in the fourth example, since “weak action effect (character appearance)” is determined for timing 1 (weak change), characters are made to appear in “T5” to “T6”, and images such as buttons are displayed in “T6”. The "first mode (small button (white))" is changed to "the second mode (large button (white))" (changed by one step) (success effect). Further, in the fourth example, since "medium effect effect (cannon)" is determined for timing 3 (middle change), the cannon is made to appear in "T9" to "T10", and the button etc. The second mode (large button (white)) is changed to a fourth mode (stick) (two-step change) (success effect).

(Specific example 5)
FIG. 81B shows the flow of the button development effect in the fifth example. In the fifth example, it is assumed that the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command is the fluctuation pattern "PB5'-X". Further, the CPU for effect control 120 determines to execute the button development effect in the button development effect determination process (S90529) (S90550), determines the button development effect category "BH4c" (S90552), and executes the button development effect pattern "BH4c". “1” is determined (S90553), “No effect presentation” is determined for button etc. effect presentation with respect to timing 1 (“No change in BH4c-1”) (S90554), timing 2 (“BH4c-1”) Then, "action presentation nothing" is determined for the button etc. effect presentation for "no change" (S90554), and the button etc. effect presentation for timing 3 ("strong change (first to fourth)" for "BH4c-1") It is assumed that the “strong action effect” has been determined for.

  In the case of the button development effect pattern “BH4c-1” determined in the fifth specific example, the image of the button or the like has a first period (before “timing 1” / T4 to T6) and a second period (“timing 1” to In the “timing 2” / T6 to T8) and the third period (“timing 2” to “timing 3” / T8 to T10), the “first mode (small button (white))” is obtained, and the fourth period At timing 3 ”and after / T10 to T13), the“ fourth mode (stick) ”is displayed (see FIG. 75). Also, in any button development effect pattern, during the ineffective period (T4 to T11),“ regulation ” In order to display a “line”, in the fifth example, a button development effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81 (B). Further, in the fifth example, since “strong action effect (lightening lightning)” is determined for the timing 3 (strong change), a thundercloud is made to appear in “T9” to “T10” and an image such as a button is displayed in “T10”. Change from the first mode (small button (white)) to the "fourth mode (stick)" (three-step change) (success effect).

  82 to 88 are diagrams showing an example of the display operation in the display area of the image display device 5. In FIGS. 82 to 88, character C 901 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α and super reach β, character C 902 is an enemy character appearing in super reach α, and character C 903 is an enemy character appearing in super reach β. It is.

  FIG. 82 and FIG. 83 show display operation examples of the specific example 3 (T2 and subsequent ones) shown in FIG. 80 (B). Specifically, FIG. 82 (A) → FIG. 82 (B) → FIG. 82 (C) → FIG. 82 (D) → FIG. 82 (E) → FIG. 82 (F) → FIG. 83 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 83 (I) → FIG. 83 (J) → FIG. 83 (K) → FIG. 83 (L) → FIG. 83 (M). FIG. 82 (A) shows a scene (T2) which has reached reach. FIG. 82 (B) shows a scene (T3) in which the super reach α is reached. FIG. 82C is a scene (T4) when the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Because of the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 82C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

  FIG. 82D is a scene (T5) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 1 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 1 etc. is not executed, in FIG. 82 (D), the display is the same as FIG. 82 (C) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 82E shows a scene (T6) in which a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In the example 3, since there is no change at the timing 1, in FIG. 82 (E), the display is the same as that in FIG. 82 (D) (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902).

  FIG. 82F is a scene (T7) at which the execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 2 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 2 etc. is not executed, in FIG. 82 (F), the display is the same as FIG. 82 (E) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 83G shows a scene (T8) where a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the third example, since a weak change occurs at timing 2, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a large button (white) D 902 (one-step change) in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 83 (G), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

  FIG. 83H is a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 3 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the third example, a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like, so in FIG. 83 (H), the character JS (code “JS” is not The image JS 901, which is illustrated, the same applies in the same manner, is displayed. FIG. 83I is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the third example, since the change is weak at timing 3, the large button (white) D 902 changes to a large button (red) D 903 (one-step change) in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 83I, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (red) D903. Further, in FIG. 83 (I), an image JS 902 in which character JS is pleased is also displayed.

  FIG. 83J is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 is enabled. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 83 (J). FIG. 83 (K) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 83 (J). In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the large button (red) D 903 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 83 (J) is displayed as the large button (red) D 903 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area. In FIG. 83 (K), information (gauge, numerical value) may be displayed to notify the amount of the remaining effective period. The same applies to FIGS. 85 (K), 86 (E), 87 (E) and 88 (E). In FIG. 80 (B), for convenience of illustration, the position of T12 is described separately from the position of T11. The same applies to the other drawings in FIG. 79 (B) and the like.

  In FIG. 83 (L), the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In specific example 3, since it becomes a big hit, character C 901 which is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 (large button (red) D 903 U), the outcome (win of the character C 901) is notified. In FIG. 83L, it is described that the player does not operate the push button 9031B as T13. The same applies to other figures. FIG. 83 (M) shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG. 83 (M).

  FIGS. 84 and 85 show display operation examples of the fourth specific example (T2 and subsequent ones) shown in FIG. 81 (A). Specifically, FIG. 84 (A) → FIG. 84 (B) → FIG. 84 (C) → FIG. 84 (D) → FIG. 84 (E) → FIG. 84 (F) → FIG. 85 (G) → FIG. H) → FIG. 85 (I) → FIG. 85 (J) → FIG. 85 (K) → FIG. 85 (L) → FIG. 85 (M). FIG. 84 (A) shows a scene (T2) that has reached reach. FIG. 84 (B) shows a scene (T3) in which super reach β is achieved. FIG. 84C is a scene (T4) when the display of the small button (white) D901 is started. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 84C, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901.

  FIG. 84D is a scene (T5) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 1 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button action effect corresponding to the change at the timing 1, etc. Therefore, in FIG. 84 (D), the image JS 901 that the character JS prays as the weak action effect is displayed. ing. FIG. 84E shows a scene (T6) where a change or the like at timing 1 is performed. In the fourth example, since a weak change occurs at timing 1, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a large button (white) D 902 (one step change) in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 84E, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902. Further, in FIG. 84 (E), an image JS 902 in which character JS is pleased is also displayed.

  FIG. 84F is a scene (T7) at which the execution of an action effect such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 2 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 2 etc. is not executed, in FIG. 84 (F), the display is the same as FIG. 84 (E) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C903). ing. FIG. 85G shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 2 in the fourth example, in FIG. 85 (G), the same display (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C903) as in FIG. 84 (F) is used.

  FIG. 85H shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change in timing 3 or the like (no change, weak change, moderate change, strong change) is started. In the fourth example, since the middle action effect (cannon) is executed as a button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 or the like, in FIG. FIG. 85I shows a scene (T10) where a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the fourth example, since the change is middle at timing 3, in FIG. 85 (I), the large button (white) D 902 is changed to the stick D 904 (two-step change). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 85 (I), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 85 (I), an image TS902 of the smoke of the firing gun and an image TS903 of the impact at the time of the hit are also displayed. In addition, when it does not change in a middle effect production (that is, when it is a failure production), for example, it may not fire, or it may not hit even if it fires.

  FIG. 85J is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) corresponding to the stick D 904 has become effective. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) is reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. FIG. 85 (K) is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 85 (J). In order to urge the player to operate the stick controller 9031 A, the stick D 904 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 85 (J) is largely displayed in the central portion of the display area as the stick D 904 U in FIG. ing.

  FIG. 85 (L) shows a scene when the player operates the stick controller 9031A during the effective period (T11 to T13), or the player sticks during the effective period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the controller 9031A ends. In the fourth example, since it becomes a big hit, the character C 901 which is an ally character wins. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the stick controller 9031A) corresponding to the stick D 904 (stick D 904U), the outcome of the victory (the victory of the character C 901) is notified. FIG. 85 (M) shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The fanfare effect is executed immediately after FIG. 85 (M).

  FIG. 86 shows a display operation example of the specific example 1 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 79 (B). Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 86 (A) → FIG. 86 (B) → FIG. 86 (C) → FIG. 86 (D) → FIG. 86 (E) → FIG. 86 (F) → FIG. 86 (G) Do. FIG. 86A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. In the example 1, since there is no change at the timing 2, in FIG. 86 (A), the small button (white) D 901 is displayed as in the timing 1 and subsequent ones. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 86A, the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D901. In the first example, although a weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button etc. corresponding to a change at timing 2 (no change, weak change, medium change, strong change), the change at timing 2 is Since there is no (i.e., a failure effect), the image JS 902 to which the character JS is pleased is not displayed in FIG. 86 (A).

  FIG. 86 (B) shows a scene (T9) at which execution of action presentation such as a button corresponding to a change at timing 3 is started. In the example 1, since the button etc. effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 etc. is not executed, in FIG. 86 (B), it becomes the same display as FIG. 86 (A) (except for the operation of the characters C901 and C902). ing. FIG. 86C is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the example 1, since there is no change at the timing 3, in FIG. 86 (C), the display is the same as in FIG. 86 (B) (except for the operations of the character C901 and the character C902).

  FIG. 86D is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the small button (white) D901 has become effective. Since the effective period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 86 (D). FIG. 86 (E) shows a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 86 (D). In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the small button (white) D 901 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 86D is displayed as the small button (white) D 901 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area.

  In FIG. 86F, the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031 B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or the player presses the push button 9031 B during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In the specific example 1, since it is a loss, character C902 which is an enemy character has won. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the small button (white) D 901 (small button (white) D 901 U), an outcome (win of the character C 902) is notified. FIG. 86G shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. The following variable display is performed immediately after FIG. 86 (G).

  FIG. 87 shows an example of display operation of the specific example 2 (T8 and subsequent steps) shown in FIG. 80 (A). Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 87 (A) → FIG. 87 (B) → FIG. 87 (C) → FIG. 87 (D) → FIG. 87 (E) → FIG. 87 (F) → FIG. Do. FIG. 87A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in the timing 2 in the second example, the large button (white) D 902 is displayed in FIG. 87 (A) as in the timing 1 and thereafter. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 87A, the restriction line K is displayed superimposed on the large button (white) D902.

  FIG. 87 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the button etc. corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the second example, the weak action effect (character appearance) is executed as a button action effect corresponding to the change at the timing 3 or the like, so in FIG. 87 (B), the image JS 901 that the character JS prays as the weak action effect is displayed. ing. FIG. 87C is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the example 2, since there is no change at the timing 3, in FIG. 87 (C), the same display (except for the operation of the character C901 and the character C902) as in FIG. 87 (B) is used. Since the effect is a failure effect, the image JS 902 to which the character JS is pleased is not displayed in FIG. 87 (C).

  FIG. 87D is a scene (T11) in which the operation (the operation of the push button 9031B) corresponding to the large button (white) D902 is enabled. Since the valid period (T11 to T13) has been reached, the restriction line K90 is not displayed in FIG. 87 (D). FIG. 87E is a scene (T12) immediately after FIG. 87D. In order to urge the player to operate the push button 9031 B, the large button (white) D 902 displayed at the lower right of the display area in FIG. 87 (D) is displayed as the large button (white) D 902 U in FIG. It is displayed large in the central part of the area.

  In FIG. 87F, the player pushes the scene when the player operates the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13) or the player presses the push button 9031B during the valid period (T11 to T13). It is a scene (T13) when the effective period in the case of not operating the button 9031B ends. In the second example, the enemy character C902 wins because it is a loss. That is, as a result of the operation (the operation of the push button 9031 B) corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 (large button (white) D 902 U), the outcome (win of the character C 902) is notified. FIG. 87G shows a scene (T14) when the variable display ends. Note that the next variable display is performed immediately after FIG. 87 (G).

  FIG. 88 shows a display operation example of the specific example 5 (T8 or later) shown in FIG. 81 (B). Specifically, the transition is as shown in FIG. 88 (A) → FIG. 88 (B) → FIG. 88 (C) → FIG. 88 (D) → FIG. 88 (E) → FIG. 88 (F) → FIG. Do. FIG. 88A shows a scene (T8) in which a change or the like at timing 2 is performed. Since there is no change in timing 2 in the second example, the small button (white) D1 is displayed in FIG. Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 88 (A), the restriction line K is displayed superimposed on the small button (white) D1.

  FIG. 88 (B) shows a scene (T9) where the execution of the button etc. corresponding to the change at the timing 3 is started. In the fifth example, a strong action effect (strike) is executed as a button effect effect corresponding to a change at timing 3 or the like, so in FIG. 88 (B), an image KS 901 of a thundercloud is displayed as a strong action effect. FIG. 88C is a scene (T10) in which a change or the like at timing 3 is performed. In the fifth example, a strong change occurs at timing 3, so in FIG. 88C, the small button (white) D 901 changes to a stick D 904 (three-step change). Since the ineffective period (T4 to T11), in FIG. 88 (C), the restriction line K90 is displayed superimposed on the stick D904. Further, in FIG. 88C, an image KS 902 of a lightning bolt and an image KS 903 of an impact at the time of hitting are also displayed. According to FIG. 77 (C), although a change is always performed in the strong action production, if there is no change in the strong action production (that is, if it is a failure effect), for example, there is no lightning strike or a lightning strike You may not try to hit it.

  Since FIG. 88 (D)-FIG. 88 (G) are the same as that of FIG. 85 (J)-FIG. 85 (M), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Note that the player may be required to perform a continuous hit operation (described later) or a long press operation (described later) as the operation during the effective period (T11 to T13). In addition, during the effective period (T11 to T13), an auto button or an automatic continuous hitting function described below may be enabled.

(About auto button, auto double hit)
Subsequently, the auto button will be described. The effect control CPU 90120 sets, for example, whether to enable or disable the function of the auto button (described later) before executing the effect determination process (S90150) at the time of winning in the effect control process (S9076). The auto button setting process of may be executed. That is, in the effect control process (S9076), the effect control CPU 90120 executes the auto button setting process, and then executes the effect determination process at winning (S90150), and then, the effect control flag setting unit 90191, etc. Depending on the value of the rendering process flag provided in any one of the processes in steps S90170 to 90177 can be selected and executed. The auto button setting process may be performed regardless of the value of the rendering process flag, and for example, the auto button setting may be performed after the winning combination rendering process (S90150) is performed in the rendering control process (S9076). The process may be executed, or the auto button setting process may be executed before the effect control process (S9076) is performed in the effect control main process (FIG. 70).

  In the following description, the button advance notice is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the notice is displayed based on the detection of the single-shot operation or the continuous hitting operation of the button etc. (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) in the button advance effect. Shall be displayed. The "single-shot operation" means that a button or the like is operated once, and the "continuous hitting operation" means that the button or the like is operated a plurality of times consecutively.

  In addition, the button advance presentation effect is the button development presentation described above, and the result (superiority etc.) of the super reach is displayed based on the detection of a single-shot operation such as a button or the continuous hitting operation in the button development presentation (during the effective period). May be

  Also, with the "auto button", the player actually executes the processing assuming that the button or the like (push button 9031B, stick controller 9031A) is not operated, but the button or the like is operated. It is. That is, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, even if the button or the like is not operated, the processing is executed on the assumption that the button or the like is operated one by one or continuously hit, and the advance notice is displayed.

  In addition, with “automatic consecutive strikes”, the player continues to operate the button etc. (for example, long press on the push button 9031 B, long stick on the stick controller 9031 A, etc.) There are also cases where it is referred to as “push operation”), but the button or the like is operated a plurality of times continuously (for example, the continuous hitting of the push button 9031B, the operation of continuously pulling the stick controller 9031A, etc.) It is a function to detect as. That is, when the function of automatic continuous hitting is set to be effective, even if the button etc. is not operated a plurality of times consecutively, the processing is executed assuming that the button etc. is operated continuously and a notice display is displayed. Do.

  Moreover, although one type may be sufficient as button advance production | presentation, multiple types may be sufficient as it. Hereinafter, it is assumed that a button preview effect A, a button preview effect B, and a button preview effect C) are prepared as a plurality of types of button preview effects. For example, when the effective period is started, button display effect A and button display effect B display a gauge display according to the number of times of operation of push button 9031 B, and whenever an operation of push button 9031 B is detected, gauge display The display is updated in such a manner that the scale of 1 has decreased by one, and when the number of times the operation is detected reaches a predetermined number of times (that is, the scale of the gauge display becomes 0), it is determined that the operation condition is satisfied. It is like displaying a notice display (for example, a character string such as “excessive heat!” Or “chance!”). In addition, for example, when the operation of the push button 9031B is detected once during the effective period, the button announcement effect C determines that the operation condition is satisfied, and displays an announcement (for example, the character A or the character B). It is like doing.

  In the following description, in addition to the button advance notice effect, the back button advance notice effect is provided in which the light emitting member 909 CC or the like is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode based on detection of the operation of the button or the like during the effective period. Do. In the button preview effect, when the effective period is started, a notification to indicate that the operation is effective or to prompt the operation is performed, while in the back button preview effect, the effective period (hereinafter, effective in the button preview effect) In order to distinguish it from the period, even when the special effective period may be called), notification that the operation is effective or indicating that the operation is effective is not performed. Therefore, there is a fun way to search for and execute a special effective period in the back button advance notice effect. From this characteristic of the back button advance notice effect, in the present embodiment, even if the function of the auto button is set to be effective, the back button advance notice is performed unless an operation such as a button is detected in the special effective period. Control is not performed to cause the light emitting members 909 CC and the like to emit light in a predetermined mode by the effect.

  In this embodiment, the auto button setting process is executed to execute an arbitrary timing (for example, a period during demonstration screen display, a period during which variable display of a decorative symbol is performed, a period during big hit game) It becomes possible to set whether the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled based on the operation of the button or the like. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to the setting of the auto button by the auto button setting process, the setting of the auto button can also be performed from the setting menu (menu screen on which setting of background image, volume, brightness etc. is possible). I assume. In the present embodiment, the auto-continuous hitting function is always enabled, but, like the auto button function, it may be possible to set whether to enable or disable.

  FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing an example of the auto button setting process. In FIG. 89 (also in FIGS. 90 and 91), the operation of the push button 9031B is described as the operation of the button or the like, but the same applies to the stick controller 9031A.

  In the auto button setting process, the effect control CPU 90120 confirms whether or not an auto button valid flag indicating that the function of the auto button is valid is set (step S907101).

  When it is determined that the auto button valid flag is not set (step S907101; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an operation valid period flag indicating that the operation in the button advance effect is in the valid period. It is checked whether or not it is (step S907102). If the flag is set during the operation valid period (step S907102; YES), the auto button setting process is ended.

  If it is determined that the flag is not set during the operation effective period (step S907102; NO), the effect control CPU 90120 checks whether the long press operation of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907103) . If the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is not detected (step S 907 103; NO), the auto button setting process is ended. As to whether or not the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, for example, in the timer interruption, the operation detection flag is set when the press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, and the operation detection is performed when the press operation is not detected. The flag is configured to be reset, and it is determined that the long press operation is detected when the operation detection flag is set and the state where the press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected continues for a predetermined period. You may do so.

  If the long press operation of the push button is detected (step S907103; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 sets an auto button valid flag (step S907104).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 5 to display an auto button valid display indicating that the function of the auto button is valid (step S907105). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to output an auto button effective sound indicating that the function of the auto button is effective (step S907106). In addition, the effect control CPU 90120 has the auto button function set to be different from that for the normal light emission mode (for example, emitting light in white) for the push button LED (LED provided to the push button 9031 B) Is controlled to emit light according to a special light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) for notifying (step S907107).

  If it is determined that the auto button valid flag is set (step S 907 101; YES), the effect control CPU 90120 has a special operation valid period flag indicating that it is in the valid period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect. It is checked whether it is set (step S907108). If the special operation valid period flag is set (step S907108; YES), the auto button setting process is ended.

  If it is determined that the flag is not set during the special operation effective period (step S907108; NO), whether or not the setting menu displaying flag indicating that the setting menu is being displayed is set. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step S907109), and if it is set (step S907109); YES, the auto button setting process is ended.

  When the setting menu display flag is not set (step S907109; NO), the CPU 90120 for effect control checks whether or not the pressing operation (single operation) of the push button 9031B is detected (step S907110). If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is not detected, the auto button setting process is ended.

  If the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is detected (step S 907 110; YES), the effect control CPU 90 120 resets the auto button valid flag (step S 907 111).

  Next, the effect control CPU 90120 controls the image display device 905 to display an auto button invalidation display indicating that the function of the auto button is invalid (step S907112). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to output an auto button invalidation effect sound (effect sound different from the above-described auto button effective effect sound) indicating that the function of the auto button is ineffective (step S907113). Further, the effect control CPU 90120 performs control to cause the push button LED to emit light in the normal light emission mode (step S907114).

  The auto button setting process has been described above with reference to FIG. 89. However, by executing the auto button setting process shown in FIG. 89, the function of the auto button can be set to be valid or invalid at an arbitrary timing. Specifically, the player can set the auto button function to be effective by performing the long press operation on the push button 9031 B while the function of the auto button is invalid (see steps S 907 101, S 907 103, and S 907 104). The auto button function can be set to be invalidated by pressing the push button 9031 B (single-shot operation) while the auto button function is enabled (see steps S 907 101, S 907 110, and S 907 111). With such a configuration, it is possible to easily change the setting of the auto button function not only during the demonstration screen display but also during the period during which the decorative symbol is variably displayed or during the big hit game. it can. That is, the setting of the auto button function can be easily changed without interrupting the game once, and it is possible to prevent the interest from being lowered by the interruption.

  However, in the present embodiment, a period in which the setting change of the auto button function is not received exceptionally is provided. For example, when the function of the auto button is invalidated, the long press operation may be performed to display the advance notice display during the effective period in the button advance effect, but the function of the auto button is performed according to the long press operation. When the setting of is changed, the setting change which the player does not intend is performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected during the effective period of the operation in the button advance presentation effect (that is, when the flag is set during the operation effective period), It is configured not to change the function from invalid to valid (see step S907102). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  In addition, during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect, the decision display effect (shows the hit or not as a success or failure notification based on the detection of the pressing operation of the push button 9031B during the effective period (one-shot operation) Since the predetermined control is performed based on the detection of the pressing operation (single-shot operation) during the effective period in the effect of displaying the), the player does not have to perform the long-press operation. However, since it is assumed that the intention to perform a one-shot operation results in a long press operation, the operation period of the back button advance notice effect is valid (that is, when the flag is set during the special operation validity period) Or, even during the effective period of the operation in the determination button effect (when the determination button effect operation effective period flag indicating that it is in the effective period of the operation in the determination button effect is set), long press on the push button 9031B Even if the operation is detected, the function of the auto button may be configured not to be changed from disabled to enabled. Similarly, a single-shot operation of the push button 9031B may be performed to change the setting of the background image and the setting of the auto button from the setting menu being displayed, but the intention of performing the one-shot operation results in a long press operation. Since it is also assumed that the setting button is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is set even if the long press operation of the push button 9031 B is detected. You may be configured not to change from invalid to valid.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, in order to execute the back button advance presentation effect, the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B must be performed. ing. Therefore, during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect, an operation for executing the back button advance notice effect may be performed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the auto button is detected even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B is detected during the effective period of the operation in the back button advance notice effect (that is, when the flag is set during the special operation effective period). It is configured not to change the function of from valid to invalid (see step S907108). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B may be performed to change the setting of the background image and the setting of the auto button from the setting menu. Therefore, in the present embodiment, while the setting menu is displayed (that is, when the setting menu display flag is set), the function of the auto button is enabled or disabled even if the pressing operation of the push button 9031B is detected. (Step S907109). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unintended change in setting of the function of the auto button.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, the button preview effect is started, and when the player operates the push button 9031 B according to the button preview effect, the auto button Is changed from valid to invalid (for example, realized by the processing of steps S907101 and S907108 to S907111), but in addition to the function of the auto button is changed from valid to invalid, the detection result of the operation May be configured to be reflected in the button preview effect. With such a configuration, even if the function of the auto button is set to be effective, if the player wants to perform an operation, the operation can be immediately reflected in the effect.

  When the player operates the push button 9031B in accordance with the button advance effect started when the function of the auto button is set to be enabled, the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to invalid. Instead of the configuration, for example, the setting of the function of the auto button is not changed during execution of the button preview effect, and the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to disabled after the end of the button preview effect. Good. The configuration for changing the function of the auto button from valid to invalid after the end of the button preview effect can be realized, for example, by executing the following processing. When the CPU 90120 for effect control detects the operation of the push button 9031 B in step S 907 110, it executes the processing of steps S 907 111 to S 907 114 if it is not in the effective period of the button advance effect, and the automatic button function is effective if it is in the effective period. A process of setting an auto button change suspension flag indicating that the change of the state to the invalid state is suspended is executed, and the auto button setting process is ended without executing the processes of steps S907111 to S907114. Then, the effect control CPU 90120 has the function of the auto button if the auto button change suspension flag is set at the end of the button advance effect (for example, the timing when the advance notice is displayed or the end timing of the effective period). Change from valid to invalid (that is, reset the auto button valid flag and reset the auto button change pending flag). In the configuration where the function of the auto button is changed from enabled to disabled after completion of the button advance effect (configuration in which the change in setting of the auto button function is temporarily held), the continuous hitting operation of the push button 9031B is Among button preview effect A and button preview effect B in which the preview display is displayed based on the detection, and button preview effect C in which the preview display is displayed based on detection of the one-shot operation of push button 9031B. The present invention may be applied to either one or both.

  When the player operates the push button 9031 B in response to the button advance effect, the function of the auto button is changed from active to ineffective after the end of the button advance effect. In addition to detecting the operation of the push button 9031B at predetermined intervals by the function, it may be detected that the player actually operated the push button 9031B and reflected in the effect. That is, the continuous hit operation by the automatic button and the operation actually performed may be reflected in the effect. In such a configuration, for example, when the auto button change suspension flag is set, the value of the operation number counter (effect according to the value is performed) is updated at predetermined intervals by the function of the auto button. In addition to the above, this is realized by updating the value of the operation number counter according to the operation of the push button 9031B.

  Also, for example, when the push button 9031 B is configured to be deformable, and the push button 9031 B is deformed into a shape different from the normal state in accordance with a predetermined effect (that is, the effect is being executed with the deformation of the push button 9031 B Also in the case where the pressing operation of the push button 9031 B is detected, the setting of the auto button may not be changed. For example, in the case where the operation is strongly urged by deforming the push button 9031B, it is conceivable that there is no intention to change the setting even if the operation is performed. When the push button 9031 B is deformed to a shape different from the normal state, for example, the button portion is deformed to be projected to the player side more than the normal state, or combined in the normal state. In addition to the case where the button parts are separated or the case where a plurality of parts for button parts are combined to form one button part, etc., it is rotatable (for example, around the rotation axis in the vertical direction) The case where the rotatable or rotatable button portion around the horizontal rotation axis is rotated is also included.

  Next, a display mode in the case of setting the function of the auto button to valid or invalid will be described. FIG. 90 is an explanatory view showing a specific example of the display mode when setting the function of the auto button to be valid or invalid. In FIG. 90, the modes of the display screen transition in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the case of FIG. 90 (1), it is assumed that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (1), when the player performs a long press operation on the push button 9031B while the variable display of the decorative symbol is being performed, as shown in FIG. 90 (2), the auto button Is set to be valid, a character string such as "auto button valid" is displayed on the image display device 905, and a message is displayed to the effect that the function of the auto button is set to be valid. At this time, control is performed to output the auto button effective effect sound from the speaker 908, and control to cause the push button 9031B to emit light in a special light emission mode (see steps S907103 to S907107).

  Also, when the function of the auto button is set to be effective, and the pressing operation (single-shot operation) of the push button 9031 B is performed by the player, the function of the auto button is invalidated as shown in FIG. The image display device 905 displays a character string such as "auto button invalid" and displays that the function of the auto button is set to be invalid. Further, at this time, control to output the auto button invalidation sound from the speaker 908 and control to cause the push button 9031 B to emit light in the normal light emission mode are performed (see steps S 907 110 to S 907 114).

  In the example of FIG. 90, the setting of the auto button function is changed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. However, in the present embodiment, the same operation is not limited to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The setting of the auto button function can be changed also in the demonstration screen display period, the big hit game period, and the like.

  Next, the difference between the case where automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed and the case where automatic continuous hitting by the automatic button function is performed will be described. FIG. 91 is an explanatory view showing a comparison example of an automatic continuous hit by a long press operation and an automatic continuous hit by an automatic button function. In the automatic continuous hit by long press operation during the effective period, the continuous hit determination is turned on after the lapse of a predetermined start standby period after the start of the long press operation of the push button 9031B, but in the start standby period It may be different depending on the type. In the description of FIG. 91, it is assumed that the start standby period of button preview effect A is 4 seconds, and the start standby period of button preview effect A is 2 seconds. In the example shown in FIG. 91, it is assumed that the execution of the button preview effect A is determined.

  In the case where automatic consecutive hit by long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period for button advance effect A, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), start standby after start of long press operation of push button 9031B After the period (4 seconds) has elapsed, the continuous hit determination is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is being performed after 4 seconds of the long press operation, and the scale of the gauge display decreases Go).

  On the other hand, in the case where automatic continuous hitting by the automatic button function is performed for the button advance effect A, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the continuous hitting determination is turned on immediately after the start of the valid period (that is, Immediately after the start of the effective period, the processing is executed on the assumption that the continuous hitting operation is being performed, and the scale of the gauge display decreases). With such a configuration, when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed, and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, the effect (for example, reduction of the scale of the gauge display) Can be made different, which can enhance the rendering effect.

  In addition, with regard to button preview effect B, although an illustration is omitted when automatic continuous hitting by a long press operation is performed after the start of the effective period, the start standby period (2 after the long press operation of push button 9031B is started After passing 2 seconds, the continuous hit judgment is turned on (that is, the processing is executed assuming that the continuous hit operation is being performed after 2 seconds of the long press operation and the scale of the gauge display decreases), and the button advance notice In the case of effect B, in the case where automatic continuous hitting is performed by the automatic button function, continuous hit determination is turned on immediately after the start of the effective period. That is, in either case of button preview effects A and B, effects are produced when the auto button function is enabled and the long press operation is not performed and when the auto button function is disabled and the long press operation is performed, The timing at which (for example, the reduction of the scale of the gauge display) is performed is configured to be different.

  The embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the apparatus configuration, data configuration, the process shown in the flowchart, the image display operation in the image display apparatus 905, etc. may be changed and modified arbitrarily without departing from the scope of the present invention. Is possible.

  For example, in the above embodiment, although the display start timing ("initial" in FIG. 75) of an image such as a button is after the super reach development (see FIG. 79A), the display start timing of an image such as a button is It may be before super reach development or at the time of super reach development. Further, in the above embodiment, the change timing of the image such as the button ("timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 3" in FIG. 75) is after the super reach has developed (see FIG. 79A). The change timing of the image, such as the button, may be before super reach development or during super reach development.

  In addition, the variation pattern of the super reach with pseudo continuous variation ("PA4'-2", "PA4'-3", "PA5'-2", "PA5'-3", "PB4'-2", "PB4 In the variation pattern of all or a part of '-3', 'PB5'-2', 'PB5'-3'), temporary stop indication and re-variable indication may be performed after becoming super reach May be

  In addition, the button development effect may be executed (display of an image such as a button) over a plurality of variable displays (or re-variable displays) in the pseudo continuous change. As an example, when the variation pattern “PB4′-2” progresses from “variable display start → reach → first temporary stop display and re-variable display → super reach β → final stop display” The display and change timing ("initial", "timing 1", "timing 2", "timing 3") of the button etc. image in the variation pattern "PB4'-2" is, for example, "initial" before reaching. Also, reach between the first temporary stop display as "timing 1", after the first temporary stop display until revariable display as "timing 2" and after revariable display as "timing 3" Good. Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the variation pattern "PB4'-2", variable display start-> display small button (white) ("initial")-> reach-large button ( It changes to white) (the timing 1) → the first temporary stop display → no change (the timing 2) → the revariable display → changes to the large button (red) (the timing 3) → the final stop display. As another example, the variation pattern "PB5'-3" changes from variable display start to reach first display of temporary stop and re-variable display to super reach beta second display of temporary stop and re-variable display final When progressing to stop display, the display and change timing of an image such as a button in the fluctuation pattern “PB5′-3” is, for example, “initial” between reach and the first temporary stop display, After the first temporary stop display to the re-variable display as "timing 1", after developing to super reach β to the second temporary stop display as "timing 2", after the second re-variable display It may be "timing 3". Therefore, when the button development effect pattern "BH3a-1" is determined in the variation pattern "PB5'-3", the variable display start → reach → small button (white) is displayed ("initial") → first time Temporary stop display → Change to large button (white) (Time 1) → Re-variable display → Advance to super reach β → No change (timing 2) → Second temporary stop display → Re-variable display → Large button (red) It progresses like a change (timing 3)-> final stop display.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when variable display start of a certain variable display is performed, whether or not to execute the button development effect is determined based on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (FIGS. 74, 76, 77 ( A) See) The presence or absence of the button development effect may be determined at another timing. For example, when there is a start winning, the presence or absence of the button development effect may be determined based on the change category or the like. It should be noted that, at other timings (for example, at the start winning), in addition to the presence or absence of the button development effect, the effect mode of the button development effect (button development effect pattern, etc.) Good.

  When deciding the presence / absence of button development effect, effect mode of button development effect (button development effect pattern etc.) or effect mode of button etc, when there is a start winning, the button before variable display according to the start winning The button development effect may be started during the variable display related to the start winning combination without starting the development effect, or may be started before the variable display related to the start winning combination.

  In addition, when the button development effect is started before the variable display relating to the start winning combination (so-called, when the button development effect is executed by prefetching), the button development effect is immediately started at the start winning combination The button development effect may be started at the start of the variable display corresponding to the winning before the starting winning (the shift of the suspension display), or the variable displaying corresponding to the winning before the starting winning ( The button development effect may be started before the reach or after the reach). In addition, the period from the start of button development effect in the pre-reading period (at the start of display of button display etc.) to the predetermined timing of variable display (for example, T13 in FIG. 79) related to the start winning is the button display period. is there.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the button etc. action effect (weak action effect, medium action effect, strong action effect) is suddenly executed without any foresight (for example, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the image JS 901 is Suddenly, the image TS901 is displayed suddenly as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the image KS 901 is displayed suddenly as shown in FIG. 88 (B), etc.). A notice effect for giving notice of being controlled to the gaming state (eg, an effect falling effect for dropping the movable role object 9017 down to the position of the central portion of the display area of the image display 905, a cut-in effect for cutting in the image, A button or other operation effect may be performed by executing a countdown effect or the like for displaying a number to count down. Specifically, it is sufficient if there is at least a case where a button etc. effect production is executed by execution of the preview production etc and a case where a button etc production effect is executed without the preview production being executed. May or may not be performed in the case where no action presentation such as a button is performed). In addition, the ratio of whether the image such as the button changes in the case where the effect such as the button etc is performed by the execution of the advance effect and the case where the effect such as the button etc is performed without the execution of the advance effect Alternatively, the ratio of changing to an image such as which button may be made different.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot expectation varies depending on the type of display such as the button (“small button (white)”, “large button (white)”, “big button (red)”, “stick”). (Refer to FIG. 77 (B)), depending on the type of display such as a button or the like, the degree of expectation of becoming a 16R probability variation jackpot may be different. Specifically, for example, the determination ratio of the button development effect category may be varied according to the jackpot type (see FIG. 57). Further, when a big hit is usually provided as a big hit type in addition to the big change big hit, depending on the type of display such as a button, the degree of expectation to be the big change big hit may be made different.

(A1) As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 901 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A And the specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, stick D904, shown in FIG. 75, FIG. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172) for performing small button (white) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. And the like), and the specific display execution means, as the specific display, the first specific display (for example, a small button (white D901 etc.) and an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, big hit expectation, 16R probability variation big hit (see FIG. 57) expectation, usually big hit and probability variation big hit if there is a big hit When the second identification display (for example, the first identification display is set to the small button (white) D901) having a high degree of expectation), the second identification display is the large button (white) D902, the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc. When the first specific display is the large button (white) D902, the second specific display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the first specific display is the large button (red) D903. (2) The specific display can display a stick D 904 or the like, and after displaying the first specific display, an action effect (for example, a weak action shown in FIG. 77C) The second specific display can be displayed by executing the middle action effect and the strong action effect (for example, after the small button (white) D 901 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (C), FIG. 84 (D 84E as shown in FIG. 84E by executing the weak-action effect that displays the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. ) After the large button (white) D 902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (E) or the D 902 can be displayed, the large button (white) D 902 is operated as shown in FIG. 85 (H) or FIG. 85D and the image TS 903 are displayed, and the stick D 904 can be displayed as shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved. For example, when the specific display changes due to the action effect, the effect is easy to understand, and the effect is improved.

(A2) The gaming machine of (A1) performs the operation after displaying the first specific display in an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). By performing the effect, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, after the large button (white) D 902 is displayed as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the display shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 (I), an image TS 901 acting on a large button (white) D 902, an image TS 902, and an image TS 903 are displayed during execution of a middle effect effect as shown in FIG. 85 (I). White) changing D902 to stick D904), the second specific display (for example, FIG. 85 (for example, FIG. 85 (for example, T11 to T13 illustrated in FIGS. 79 to 88)); Motion display using stick D 904 or stick D 904 U etc. as shown in FIG. 85 (K) (eg, as shown in FIG. 85 (L), prompting operation as shown in FIG. 85 (K) And the like) are performed.

  According to the above configuration, the sense of expectation before the effective period can be enhanced.

(A3) In the gaming machine of (A1) or (A2) above, there are a plurality of types of action effects (for example, weak action effects, medium action effects, strong action effects, etc. shown in FIG. 77C), The rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the operation effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 77C, there is no change and there is a change (weak change, middle) In the case of change or strong change), the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, so the button changes to the second specific display according to which button etc. Different proportions).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(A4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A3), the action effect is of a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action effect, etc. shown in FIG. 77C) There are multiple types of display modes of the specific display after change (for example, large button (white) D 902, large button (red) D 903, stick D 904, large button (white shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. 77), a large button (red) D 903 U, a stick D 904 U, etc.), and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is executed (for example, FIG. 77 (C In the case of weak change (one step change), medium change (two step change), and strong change (three step change), as shown in), weak action rendition, middle action rendition, strong action rendition Because each decision ratio of is different Depending on which button or other effect is performed, the ratio of weak change, medium change, or strong change differs, for example, when the small button (white) D 901 before the change, the weak change is performed Then, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, and a strong change is executed. And the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to which specific display differs depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is executed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(A5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. 87 is performed, and shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. 88, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D 904 executes the operation effect detected by the push button 31B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change. Execute detected motion effects).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(A6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A5), the specific display execution means is a non-effective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(A7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous fluctuation) The specific display can be displayed over the display, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and can be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(A8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the game machine of any of the above (A1) to (A7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state etc.) , A countdown effect, a feature falling effect, etc.), and the action effect is executed by executing the advance effect.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

  (A9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A1) to (A8) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be disabled) or in the second state (for example, the setting state relating to rendering) Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 89) settable to a state where the auto button function is effectively set, etc., and specific effect (eg, button preview when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, effect processing under variable display shown in FIG. 72, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being performed (for example, a part that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 89). Etc).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

(B1) The pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, and detection means capable of detecting the action of the player (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) And specific indication corresponding to the detection means (for example, small button (white) D901, large button (white) D902, large button (red) D903, stick D904, small button shown in FIG. 75, FIG. (White) D901U, large button (white) D902U, large button (red) D903U, stick D904U, etc. Specific display execution means (for example, button development effect processing (S90529), variable display effect processing (S90172), etc.) And the specific display execution unit may perform, as the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button (white) D901). ) And an advantage for the player than the first specific display (for example, a big hit expectation, an expectation to be a 16R probability variation big hit (refer to FIG. 57), an expectation to be a probability variation big hit when there is usually a big hit and a definite variation big hit The second specific display is a large specific button (white) D 902, a large specific button (red) D 903, a stick D 904, etc. (1) When the large display (white) D902 is used as the identification display, the second identification display is the large button (red) D903, the stick D904, etc., and the second identification is displayed as the large button (red) D903. The display can display a stick D904 or the like), and the first specific display can be performed in an ineffective period of detection by the detection unit (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). After the display, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, as shown in FIG. 82C, after the small button (white) D901 is displayed, the small button (white) D901 is displayed as shown in FIG. G) change to large button (white) D 902, and further change large button (white) D 902 to large button (red) D 903 as shown in FIG. 83 (I)), detection by the detection means In the effective period (for example, T11 to T13 shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88) of the second specific display after change (for example, as shown in FIG. Red) D 903 or large button (red) D 903 U, etc.) Operation presentation (for example, presentation to prompt operation as shown in FIG. 83 (K) and report result as shown in FIG. 83 (L)) Is executed.

  According to the above configuration, the rendering effect is improved. For example, since the specific display is changed during the ineffective period, a change can be shown, and the rendering effect is improved.

(B2) In the gaming machine of the above (B1), the first specific display is an effect that acts on the specific display (for example, a weak effect, a middle effect, a strong effect shown in FIG. 77C). Is changed to the second specific display (for example, the small button (white) D 901 shown in FIG. 84C is a small button (as shown in FIG. 84D or 84E). White) When the weak action effect of displaying the image JS901 and the image JS902 acting on D901 is executed, it changes to the large button (white) D902 as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the large shown in FIG. 85 (G) In the button (white) D 902, as shown in FIG. 85 (H) and FIG. 85 (I), the middle effect effect of displaying the image TS 901, the image TS 902 and the image TS 903 acting on the large button (white) D 902 is executed. According to Fig. 85 (I). The small button (white) D901 shown in FIG. 88 (A) changes to the stick D904 as shown, and the image KS901 acting on the small button (white) D901 as shown in FIG. 88 (B) or FIG. 88 (C). When a strong action effect of displaying the image KS 902 or the image KS 903 is executed, the stick D 904 changes as shown in FIG. 88C.

  According to the above configuration, the effect is improved by the action effect.

(B3) In the gaming machine of (B1) or (B2) above, the action effect acting on the specific display is a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle action effect, strong action shown in FIG. And the like, and the rate at which the second specific display changes is different depending on which of the action effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the case without change and the change) In the case of (weak change, medium change or strong change), since the determination ratio of the weak action production, the medium action production, and the strong action production is different, depending on which button etc. the action production is executed, the second The rate of change to the specific display is different).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(B4) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B3), the action effect acting on the specific display includes a plurality of types (for example, weak action effect, middle effect effect shown in FIG. 77C). The display mode of the specific display after the change is, for example, a large button (white) D 902, a large button (red) D 903, and a stick D 904 shown in FIG. 75 and FIG. There is a large button (white) D 902 U, a large button (red) D 903 U, a stick D 904 U, etc., and the ratio of changing to the specific display varies depending on which of the effects is performed (for example, As shown in FIG. 77C, in the case of weak change (one-step change), medium change (two-step change), and strong change (three-step change), weak-action effect, medium-action Each decision of production, strong action production Because the ratio is different, the ratio of weak change, medium change, strong change is different depending on which button etc. effect presentation is executed.For example, when the small button (white) D901 before change is When the weak change is executed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (white) D902, and when the middle change is performed, the small button (white) D901 changes to the large button (red) D903, which is strong When the change is performed, the small button (white) D 901 changes to the stick D 904. Therefore, the ratio of changing to any specific display differs depending on which button etc. the effect presentation is performed).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for the operation effect.

(B5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B4), the detection means has a plurality of types (for example, push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) and corresponds to the specific display after change. The operation effect detected by the detection means is executed (for example, the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (white) D 902 after change as shown in FIG. 87 is performed, and shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 85 and FIG. 88, the stick controller 9031A corresponding to the changed stick D 904 executes the operation effect detected by the push button 9031 B corresponding to the large button (red) D 903 after the change. Execute detected motion effects).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to focus attention on which specific display means corresponds to which operation means.

(B6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B5), the specific display execution means is an ineffective period of detection by the detection means (for example, T4 to T11 or the like shown in FIGS. 79 to 88). When the specific display is displayed, the specific display is displayed according to an aspect indicating that it is the ineffective period (for example, as shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. 88, a small button (superimposed on the control line K90) White) D901, large button (white) D902 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, large button (red) D903 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed, and stick D904 on which restriction line K90 is superimposed are displayed).

  According to the above configuration, it is easy to understand that it is the ineffective period.

(B7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B6), the specific display execution means displays the specific display over a plurality of variable displays (for example, a plurality of (re) variable displays as pseudo continuous change) The specific display can be displayed over the display, the specific display can be displayed over a plurality of variable displays by prefetching, etc., and can be changed.

  According to the above configuration, expectation can be enhanced over a plurality of variable displays.

(B8) A notice effect (for example, a cut-in effect) for notifying that the game machine of any of the above (B1) to (B7) is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state etc.) , The countdown effect, the feature fall effect, etc.), and the effect presentation acting on the specific display is performed by the execution of the advance presentation effect, and the second specification is performed by the action presentation being performed. It changes to the display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the sense of expectation for a specific advance notice effect.

  (B9) The gaming machine according to any one of the above (B1) to (B8) is in the first state (for example, the state in which the auto button function is set to be invalid) etc. or in the second state (for example, Setting means (eg, auto button setting processing shown in FIG. 89) settable to a state where the auto button function is effectively set, etc., and specific effect (eg, button preview when the effect execution condition is satisfied) In the effects A to C and the decision button effect, it is possible to execute the display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, the display of the advance notice and the display of the yes / no, etc. based on the operation of the push button 9031B being detected. Specific effect executing means (for example, effect processing under variable display shown in FIG. 72, etc.), the specific effect executing means, in the first state, the detection result of the detecting means It is possible to execute a specific effect based on the fact that the effect execution condition is satisfied, but in the second state, it is possible to execute a specific effect that the effect execution condition is satisfied regardless of the detection result of the detection means ( For example, when the auto button function is set to be effective, even if the push button 9031 B is not operated, display of the advance notice display, display of the pass / fail display, display to decrease the scale of the gauge display, etc.) are performed. The setting means can change the setting from the first state to the second state based on the detection result of the detection means while the variable display is being performed (for example, a part that executes the processing of steps S907103 to S907104 in FIG. 89). Etc).

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the interest from being reduced.

  In the above (A1) to (A9) and the above (B1) to (B9), the “detection means” is not limited to the push button 9031 B and the stick controller 9031 A, and an object provided in a case ( A sensor that detects an operation (for example, an operation of pushing the whole or a part of the object in the back direction or downward direction, an operation of pulling the object in the front direction or upward direction, an operation of rotating or sliding) May be In addition, it may be a sensor or the like that detects the contact of the player's body (hand or the like) on the glass surface or the like, or a sensor that detects the motion of the player's body (hand or face or the like) not in contact with the gaming machine. Or the like. That is, the "detection means" may be a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, a camera or the like. In the case where the “detection means” is, for example, a touch sensor capable of detecting a touch on the glass surface, the “specific display” is an image that evokes a touch on the glass surface (for example, an image imitating a palm etc. ) May be.

  In addition to the above, arbitrary changes and modifications are possible without departing from the scope of the invention. For example, in the above description, when it is determined to execute the button development effect, the button development effect category is determined before the button development effect pattern is determined (see FIG. 76), but the button development effect pattern is directly You may decide. That is, the concept of the button development effect category may not be used.

  The button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 75 is a button development effect pattern in which the “initial” is the “first mode (small button (white))”, but the “initial” is the “second mode (large button) A button development effect pattern may be provided that is (white)), "third mode (large button (red))", or "fourth mode (stick)".

  Further, in the above embodiment, the timing to start displaying an image such as a button is constant (T4), but the timing to start displaying an image such as a button may have a plurality of timings. There may be a plurality of timings for each type of image such as a button.

  Depending on the display start timing, the ratio of whether or not an image such as a button changes (grows up) later may be changed, and the ratio of changing to what extent. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate of change of an image such as a button or the like may be higher and the rate of change of stick habit may be higher. Further, in an aspect (described later) in which there are a plurality of types of timing when the non-effective period goes to the effective period, the ratio of the timing when the non-effective period goes to the effective period may be different according to the display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the rate at which the timing from the non-effective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than when it is early. Moreover, when there is an aspect (after-mentioned) which does not turn into an effective period from an ineffective period, you may vary the ratio of whether to become an effective period according to display start timing. For example, when the display start timing is late, the ratio of the effective period may be higher than when it is early. Moreover, in the aspect which performs removal success production (after-mentioned), according to display start timing, the execution ratio of removal success production may be varied. For example, when the display start timing is late, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be higher than when it is early.

  Also, although the button development effect pattern shown in FIG. 75 changes the image of the button or the like at maximum two change timings among the three change timings (timing 1, timing 2 and timing 3), all (three There may be a button or the like that changes the image at the change timing of). That is, a button development effect pattern is provided which changes weakly at timing 1 (first to second), weakly changes at timing 2 (second to third), and weakly changes at timing 3 (third to fourth). It is also good. The change timing may not be three times, but may be once, twice, four times or more.

  Further, a button development effect pattern may be provided to notify the determination of a big hit. As an example, a large sized rainbow button image ("large button (rainbow)") imitating push button 9031 B or a rainbow stick controller image ("stick (rainbow)" imitating stick controller 9031 A " The button development effect pattern (sometimes referred to as the "big hit confirmation button development effect pattern") where "the fifth" is the "fifth mode" and "the fifth mode" is provided, and the variation pattern of the super reach (big hit) ( In "PB4'-X" and "PB5'-X"), there is a case where the button development effect pattern of the big hit decision may be determined, but the variation pattern ("PA4'-X" and "PA5'-X") of the super reach (loss) In “)”, the button development effect pattern of the big hit determination may not be determined.

  In addition, the operating means (push button 9031 B, stick controller 9031 A, etc.) may emit light at least in part (or the periphery), and may change the operating means according to an image such as a button. For example, when no button or other image is displayed, the light emitting unit of the push button 9031 B and the light emitting unit of the stick controller 9031 A are turned off, and when the small button (white) is displayed, the light emitting unit of the push button 9031 B is white Lights up, and when the large button (white) is displayed, the light emitting portion of the push button 9031 B is blinked in white (or lit in red), and when the large button (red) is displayed, the push button 9031 B The light emitting unit may be lit in red (or blink in red), and the light emitting unit of the stick controller 9031A may be illuminated in white (or blink in white) when the stick is displayed. When the light emitting unit of the operation means is blinked, an image such as a button may be blinked.

  Further, in FIG. 75 and the like, an image such as a button corresponds to one of the two operation means (one operation means is made effective). Specifically, the small button (white), the large button (white), and the large button (red) correspond to the push button 9031 B, and the stick corresponds to the stick controller 9031 A. Instead of this, an image such as a button corresponding to both of the two operation means may be displayed. As an example, in any of the small button (white), the large button (white), the large button (red), and the stick, the push button 9031B and the stick controller 9031A may be effective. Since the effect is such that the operation means changes in the middle, by making both effective, it is possible to prevent a situation where the result (such as winning or losing) is not displayed although the operation is performed. Further, as another example, a logo mark corresponding to both the push button 9031 B and the stick controller 9031 A (for example, a logo mark related to a content used for rendering of the pachinko gaming machine 901, a brand name of the pachinko gaming machine 901 Logo mark etc) may be displayed. That is, when the logo mark is displayed during the effective period, the result is displayed even if the push button 9031 B is operated or the stick controller 9031 A is operated.

  Also, according to FIG. 77 (C), when “strong action effect” is executed, “strong change” is expected mainly, but “middle change” or “weak change” below expectation is expected. In some cases, If the "strong change" or "weak change" occurs due to the execution of the "strong action effect", the "strong change" expected corresponds to a so-called fall, and the player may be discouraged. Therefore, the "strong action effect" may not be determined when the "weak change" or the "middle change" is made. As a result, when the "strong action effect" is executed, the "strong change" is determined, and the player is not discouraged. In addition, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the “middle effect effect”, it is expected that the “middle change” will mainly be made, but in some cases the “weak change” may be less than expected. Therefore, in the case of "weak change", "middle effect effect" may not be determined. As a result, when the button image or the like changes after the execution of the "middle effect effect", the "middle change" or more is decided, and the player is not discouraged. Although "strong action effect" is not determined when "no change", "middle effect effect" may not be determined in addition to "strong action" when "no change".

  In addition, the change of the image such as the button is divided into the degree of change (the number of steps) ("weak action effect" to change one step, "middle effect effect" to change two steps, "strong action effect" to change three steps Etc.) but they are controlled (managed), but divided into what changes the change of the image such as the button etc. (for example, the second effect, the first aspect or the second aspect of changing from the first aspect to the second aspect) The control may be performed by changing the mode from the mode to the third mode, the first mode or the second mode, or the fourth mode for changing the mode from the third mode to the fourth mode.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the super reach is a so-called battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character confront each other, but the super reach is not limited to the battle effect. For example, in the case of a big hit, the story may be completed successfully (if the game is lost, the story may not be completed successfully). In addition, when the button development effect is executed in the story system super reach, for example, according to the operation in the effective period (as the operation effect), the result of the story is substituted for the result of the battle effect (e.g. It may be notified that (whether or not the story is completed successfully) is notified.

  An effect (hereinafter referred to as “removal effect” in which an image (for example, the restriction line K90 or the like illustrated in FIGS. 82 to 88) for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress is removed when the ineffective period starts. In addition, it may be called "removal success effect" in distinction from "removal failure effect" described later. For example, an effect (e.g., a character (such as a police officer or the like) recovers the restriction line K90) in which the restriction line K90 superimposed on the large button (white) D902 is removed between FIG. 87 (C) and FIG. Effect that sucks the restriction line K90 into the vacuum cleaner, an effect that burns out the restriction line K90 with flames, an effect in which the large button (white) D902 itself shakes etc. and the restriction line K90 deviates) may be performed .

  In addition, the removal failure effect (effect in which an image for notifying that the removal success effect is common to at least a part of the effect modes and informing that it is in the non-effective period) may be executed. When the removal failure effect is executed, the super reach may be ended without being the effective period. That is, for example, when the removal success effect is executed in FIG. 87, FIG. 87 (C) → deletion success effect → FIG. 87 (D) → FIG. 87 (E) → FIG. 87 (F) → FIG. 87 (G) 87 (C) → removal failure effect → FIG. 87 (F) → FIG. 87 (G). .

  In addition, there are multiple types of timing from the ineffective period to the effective period, and when the ineffective period is late when the ineffective period becomes late, the image such as the button is sufficient because the ineffective period is longer than when it is early. Change (growth). Also, in addition to the case where the removal failure effect is not performed even once, the removal success effect is performed after the removal failure effect is performed one or more times, or the removal failure effect is performed. After being executed one or more times, there may be cases where the removal success effect is not executed. As a result, when the player does not sufficiently grow an image such as a button, the removal success effect is not executed because it is premature as the arrival of the effective period (for example, the effect of trying to remove the restriction line K90 starts If it is done, it is hoped that ultimately the restriction line K90 will not be removed, that is not removal success production but removal failure production is being executed), but if the image such as a button is fully grown That the removal success effect is carried out as an effect of coming (for example, when the effect to remove the control line K90 is started, the control line K90 is eventually removed, that is, not the removal failure effect I hope that the removal success rendition is being performed). That is, it can be made to notice whether the presentation according to the situation is performed.

  In addition, the image for notifying that it is during the ineffective period may be not the image of the restriction line but another image. For example, it may be an image of a chain and a key placed on an image such as a button, or it may be an image of a translucent case for storing an image such as a button, or ice which is shown as an image such as a frozen button. It may be

  Depending on the type of the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, the ratio of whether the image such as a button changes (grows up) or the ratio of changing to a later time may be made different. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate of change in the image of the button or the like may be higher later than in the case of “control line”, and the rate of change of the stick may be higher. Also, in an aspect in which there are multiple types of timing when the ineffective period comes to the effective period, if the ratio of the timing from the ineffective period to the effective period differs according to the type of the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period. You may For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the rate at which the timing from the non-effective period to the effective period is later than the predetermined timing may be higher than in the case of the “regulatory line”. Further, in a case where the ineffective period does not become the effective period, the ratio of whether or not the effective period may be changed may be made according to an image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. For example, in the case of "chain and key", the ratio of the effective period may be higher than in the case of "regulatory line". Further, in the aspect of executing the removal success effect, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be varied according to the image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress. For example, in the case of “chain and key”, the execution ratio of the removal success effect may be set higher than in the case of “control line”.

  In addition, an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be changed (grown). For example, the small button (white) is set as a "control line", and the large button (white) is changed to "chain and key", and the large button (red) is used as a "translucent case". The image may be changed to notify that it is in the ineffective period at the same timing as the change timing of the button image, such as changing it to “ice” when it becomes a stick. . For example, when it is a large button (white), it changes from "control line" to "chain and key", and when it is a stick, it changes from "chain and key" to "semi-transparent case" and further "ice" The image for notifying that it is in the non-effective period may be changed at a timing different from the change timing of the image of the button or the like.

  In the aspect of changing the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period, the image for informing that it is in the ineffective period may be changed by the operation effect. The action effect of changing the image for informing that it is in the non-effective period may be the same (common) as the action effect of changing the image such as a button. In addition, when common effects and effects are executed, an image for notifying that an image such as a button or the like is in the ineffective period is also changed, and an information indicating that the image such as the button is also in the ineffective period is notified There may be a time when neither the image for change nor the change in one of the images changes. In addition, the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period and the action effect of changing the image such as a button may be different. That is, apart from the effect presentation that changes the image such as the button, a special effect presentation that changes the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period may be provided.

  In addition, there are cases where an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period changes (grows) by an effect of the same type, and an image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period is removed. It may be. In other words, by performing the action effect of changing the image for notifying that it is in the ineffective period, it is notified that it is in the ineffective period as in the case where the removal effect described above is performed. In some cases, the image to be removed may be removed. That is, when a certain effect (effect having both action effect and removal effect property) is executed, there is a time when an image such as a button changes and a time when it does not change, and it is informed that it is during the ineffective period. There may be times when the image for change may be changed and when it may be removed. In addition, it may be removed after the change (for example, the "ice" after the change is removed after the change from the "semi-transparent case" to the "ice", etc.). Although the image for notifying that it is in the non-effective period has been described in two ways, whether it is removed or not removed, there are stages in the removal, and the images may be gradually removed. That is, when a certain effect (a effect having both the effect and the effect of the removal effect) or the removal effect is executed, the "ice" is slightly broken, and again, a certain effect (the effect having both the effect and the removal effect) or the removal The "ice" may be completely cracked and removed when the rendition is performed. If the image for notifying that the ineffective period is in progress is in the process of removal, it may not be changed, or may be changed and return to the original state after the change. The state during the change may be maintained after the change. For example, if the "translucent case" is slightly broken, it may not be changed to "ice", or it may be changed to unbroken "ice", or it may be slightly broken. It may change.

  Further, in the above embodiment, although the reserve data (first reserve information) of the first special figure game and the reserve data (second reserve information) of the second special figure game are not distinguished, they are digested in the order of winning ( 68), the second hold information may be preferentially prioritized.

  Moreover, in the above embodiment, the “ratio” is not limited to one having a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B: C = 70%: 20%: 10%. As shown in FIG. 77 (B) and FIG. 78 (A), those having a relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% or A: B: C = 70%: 30%: 0% (ie, , 100% and 0% allocations are also included).

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, although the number of rounds is 2 types of 8 rounds and 16 rounds, three or more types of rounds may be sufficient. For example, there may be three types: 4R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, and 16R probability variation big hit. Further, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine in which only the probability variation big hit is provided as the big hit category is shown, but as described above, the game may include a non-deterministic variation big hit (usually a big hit) as the big hit category.

  Moreover, although the said embodiment showed the aspect which carries out the variable display of multiple types of special symbols, such as a number which shows "0"-"8", and a symbol which shows "-", and a display result is derived and displayed, the said variable display Is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the special symbol to be displayed variably may be different from the special symbol to be derived and displayed as the variable display result. In other words, special symbols that are not included in the changing multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as the variable display result, and among the changing multiple types of special symbols, those that are not specially derived displayed as the variable display result May be included. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the aspect may be such that variable display is performed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (may be alternately turned on / off). That is, repetition of lighting and extinguishing may be variable display. And even in this case, the one kind of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end It may be In addition, the same applies to variable display of other symbols (for example, a normal symbol, a decorative symbol, etc.).

  In the above embodiment, the big hit game state is controlled based on the big hit symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 904A and the second special symbol display device 904B, but the big hit game state is controlled. The aspect to perform is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided in the vicinity of the second starting winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the game ball entering (passing) in the specific area You may be there.

  Further, in the above embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 9012 of a change pattern indicating a change mode such as the change time and the type of reach effect and the presence or absence of pseudo-link, one change pattern specification command In the example of transmitting the change pattern, the effect control board 9012 may be notified of the change pattern by two or more commands. Specifically, when notified by two commands, the microcomputer 90100 for game control is before reaching reach, such as presence or absence of pseudo sequence, presence or absence of slip effect in the first command (in the case where it does not reach, so-called Send a command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop, and the second command after reaching reach such as reach type and re-lottery effect (if it does not reach, so-called (2) after the stop may be transmitted a command indicating a fluctuation time or a fluctuation mode. In this case, on the effect control board 9012 side, effect control in variable display may be performed based on the fluctuation time derived from the combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 90100, the variation time is notified by each of two commands, and a specific variation mode to be executed at each timing is selected by the effect control board 9012. It is also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after sending a first command, after a predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the next timer interrupt) And the second command may be sent. In addition, the fluctuation | variation aspect shown by each command is not necessarily limited to this example, It can change suitably also about the order to transmit. As described above, by notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands, it is possible to reduce the amount of data which has to be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the main substrate 9011 stores the determination table for random number values (display result determination table, big hit type determination table, and variation category determination table), and is extracted from the main substrate 9011 at the start winning prize. Based on the random number values (MR1 'to MR3'), the main substrate 9011 refers to the random number value determination table and determines random number value determination processing (determination of whether or not to be a big hit, and determination of variation category, and big hit) In some cases, the determination of the type of the big hit is executed, and the effect control board 9012 receives an example of the determination result determined in the main board 9011 and shows an example of executing pre-reading notice effect based on the received determination result. However, the mode of execution of the prefetch advance notice effect is not limited to this. For example, the random number value determination table is stored in the effect control substrate 9012 and the random number itself is transmitted from the main substrate 9011 to the effect control substrate 9012 (for example, an effect control command capable of specifying random number values from the main substrate 9011) Is transmitted to the effect control board 9012), the effect control board 9012 receives the random number value itself extracted in the main board 9011, and based on the received random number value, refers to the random number value determination table and refers to the random number value. The pre-reading notice effect may be performed based on the determination result of the determination process. That is, the determination process of the random number value may be performed in the effect control board 9012. Further, the determination process of the random number value may be performed on both the main substrate 9011 and the effect control substrate 9012. For example, the effect control board 9012 may receive a part of random number values and execute the process of determining the random number value, and may receive the determination result determined in the main board 9011. Specifically, for example, the effect control board 9012 receives the random number values (MR1 'and MR2') and performs determination of whether or not to be a big hit and determination of the type of big hit if it is a big hit, The determination result of the variation category determined by the main substrate 9011 based on the random value (MR3 ') may be received. That is, the effect control board 9012 can execute the advance notice / notification effect based on the judgment result judged by itself and the judgment result judged by the main board 9011.

  The random numbers may not be synchronized by changing the update timing of each random number or changing the update range of each random number.

  In addition, for example, a gaming machine that gives a gaming score for use in a game by using a frequency that is a gaming value of a size specified by recording information of a gaming recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can be applied. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the gaming machine into the game area.

  In the above description, it has been described that the ROM 90101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables and the like prepared for the CPU 90103 to make various determinations, determinations, and settings. It does not necessarily have to be stored in a table format (including, for example, a structure, an array, etc.). That is, although the determination value (decision value) to be compared with the extracted random value may be stored together in the ROM 90101, it may be dispersed (dotted) in a plurality of locations in the ROM 90101 and stored. Alternatively, the ROM 90101 may store an equation or program for outputting the result (for example, a big hit or a loss in the example of FIG. 56) when the extracted random number value is input. The same applies to the determination table and the like stored in the ROM 90121.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted to set a predetermined bet number, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the control lever by the player. A slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when the combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player The present invention is also applicable to slot machines equipped with at least one of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as a bonus etc.). For example, a slot machine to which the present invention is applied performs detection means (rendering button) capable of detecting the action of the player, and a specific display (rendering button image imitating a reproduction button) corresponding to the detecting means. And a specific display execution unit, wherein the specific display execution unit has a first specific display (a button image for presentation (white)) and an advantage for the player over the first specific display as the specific display. The second specific display (a button image for effect (red)) can be displayed (for example, a high expectation of becoming a bonus, etc.), and after displaying the first specific display, an action effect that acts on the specific display It may be a slot machine capable of displaying the second specific display by executing.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed / provided by a removable recording medium to the computer device etc. included in the pachinko gaming machine 901, but the computer device etc. It may be distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing unit, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It does not matter.

  And the execution form of the game is not limited to that executed by attaching the removable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line etc. in the internal memory etc. It may be executed directly using hardware resources of another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

1 pachinko gaming machine 2 gaming board 3 gaming machine frame 4A 1st special symbol display device 4B 2nd special symbol display device 5 image display device 6A regular winning ball device 6B regular variable winning ball device 7 special variable winning ball device 8L speaker 8R Speaker 9 game effect lamp 11 main board 12 effect control board 13 voice control board 14 lamp control board 15 relay board 20 normal symbol display 21 gate switch 22A 1st starting opening switch 22B 2nd starting opening switch 23 count switch 31A stick controller 31B Push button 100 Microcomputer 101 ROM for game control
102 RAM
103 CPU
104 random number circuit 105 I / O
120 CPU for production control
121 ROM
122 RAM
123 Display control unit 124 Random number circuit 125 I / O
901 Pachinko game machine 902 game board 903 game machine frame 904A 1st special symbol display device 904B 2nd special symbol display device 905 image display device 905H start winning memory display area 906A normal winning ball device 906B normal variable winning ball device 907 special variable Winning ball device 908 speaker 909 lamp 9011 main control board 9012 effect control board 9013 voice control board 9014 lamp control board 9015 relay board 9016 character control board 9017 movable part 9020 normal symbol display 9021 gate switch 9022A first starting opening switch 9022 B 2 Start port switch 9023 Count switch 9031A Stick controller 9031B Push button 90100 Microcomputer for game control 90101, 90121 ROM
90102, 90122 RAM
90103 CPU
90104, 90124 random number circuit 90105, 90125 I / O
90120 CPU for effect control
90123 Display control unit 90126 RTC circuit

Claims (1)

A game machine capable of performing variable display, controlling in an advantageous state advantageous to a player, and controlling a gaming state after the end of the advantageous state into a special state which is more advantageous than a normal state,
The game machine further comprises display means capable of displaying a specific image which can be specified for the number of times controlled to the advantageous state when the gaming state is the special state;
The display means can display numerical information on gaming value obtained in the advantageous state, together with a specific image corresponding to the advantageous state.
further,
Detection means capable of detecting the action of the player;
Specific display execution means for performing specific display corresponding to the detection means;
Equipped with
The specific display execution means is
As the specific display, it is possible to display a first specific display and a second specific display which is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display.
After the first specific display is displayed in the ineffective period of detection by the detection means, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display,
A game machine characterized in that an operation effect using the second specific display after change is executed in an effective period of detection by the detection means.